Anna von Reitz: The Banking System Including Specifics On The World Bank And Karen Hudes February 24 2020 | From: PhiBetaIota / Various
The banks are crooked. All of them. They have no other choice. And THAT is the problem.
We have, whether we know it or not, created a criminal banking system and then stood back and let it roll. What kind of results do we expect from that?
A train wreck is what I expect from that, and “transitioning” out of this crooked system is made difficult by the fact that both alternative models, the gold-backed system and the quantum system, are known to be crooked, too.
What bothers me is that the bankers know this and I know this and you should know it if you don’t - but nobody is talking about this fundamental fact.
The Federal Reserve [Worldwide Reserve Banking] system is a fantasy built on grossly criminal practices requiring impersonation, enslavement, and barratry.
The IMF system is built on a currency commodity rigging scheme - the “Exchange Stabilization Fund”.
The BRICs system is built on manipulation of gold reserves and artificially restricting access to gold - commodity rigging, again.
The Quantum system is another fantasy built on manipulation of old MS-DOs programming and manipulation of digits, more rigging...
It’s all about manipulation of “perceived values” of symbols and artificially controlling access to commodities. It’s all crooked. And if you think about it more than five minutes, it’s also crazy.
It’s idolatry. Just like people used to carve statues and worship the “image of God” they had themselves created, we create these “symbols of value” - coins, pieces of paper, etc. - and give them value based on our belief that they have value.
Years ago I waved a dollar bill at a friend who was staring at me like I was nuts.
I said to him, “Look at this! What is it? It’s a piece of paper! And it’s not even a useful piece of paper. It’s printed all over, so not good to write on. It’s too stiff and hard-surfaced to use for toilet paper.
What in the hell do you think this is? What gives it any “value” if not your pig-headed belief that it HAS value?”
Well?
And it is the same thing with a gold coin. Sure, gold is a metal, so relatively speaking, more valuable than paper.
It’s even a fairly rare metal with some special properties as metal, which increases its value for some industrial applications.
But, when you get right down to it, what good is it to you? Can you eat it? Wear it? Will it keep you warm or fuel your car?
And if you don’t use gold or silver, what other commodities are you going to arbitrarily pick? Blueberry jam? Seltzer water?
You see, this whole system of thinking and doing things is crazy, so instead of arguing over which idiot-system we are going to use, let’s stop being idiots.
There is only one (1) and exactly one (1) honest form of money possible.
And that is money based on the value of all traded commodities and all labor, worldwide.
A currency based on all traded commodities and all labor immediately guts the motivation for rigging commodities and buffers everyone against losses. It also puts a curb on “futures trading” - because every country is a producer of “currency standard goods”, and so, at least potentially, is every individual.
So, we could have honest money, free trade, and global harmony for the cost of issuing a currency based on the total value of traded goods and labor, worldwide.
It could be issued by one international Think Tank and all the various countries could take turns sending their own oversight teams to make sure nobody was fudging anything.
That takes care of the fear that there would be one bank controlled by one set of all powerful bureaucrats.
Along with this, strict and permanent accords would have to be adopted guaranteeing every living man and woman the absolute right to engage in trade and to use this global currency without restriction or fear of losing access to it and the transfer systems related to it.
Our money would stand for the labor, both skilled and unskilled, of workers in China as well as Belize, Germany, and all the other countries of the world. It would stand for all the commodities traded on every stock exchange worldwide.
So a gain in the value of skilled labor in Bangladesh would increase the value of the money worldwide, and a new forest planted in Brazil would increase the value of the money worldwide.
In this way, the monetary system would encourage everyone to do better and to help each other.
It would also encourage every government on Earth to be diligent in guarding against counterfeiting and hoarding and other evils, because they would know that it was their money being victimized by these practices, along with everyone else’s.
Ah, but what about the Eternal Problem? How to pay for the disabled, the sick, the elderly, the infants - all those who, for one reason or another, are not able to pull their weight?
We simply value them more, and in our new banking system, we give them extra tokens.
Life itself is infinitely valuable, beyond price.
So we need to stop focusing on the comparatively petty issue of how do we feed the poor and infirm - and start focusing on the much larger issue of properly valuing life and thereby valuing our brothers and sisters, fathers and mothers, friends and neighbors, the dogs at our feet and the trees lining our streets.
Comment: The following links were articles recently released by the 'Reserve Bank of New Zealand.'
In an utterly obsurd attempt to keep the narrative going that the local chapter of a Rothschild-run private central bank
has any legitimacy to lend currency to a nation - they bang on about being inclusive of all racial groups - and get this - even pat themselves on the back for winning a central bank award for transparency?
Transparency from a central bank? Who are they kidding?
ENOUGH.
These lying criminals can see the writing on the wall.
“It is important for our legitimacy that a broad cross-section of New Zealanders – rather than a few technical experts or regulated institutions – are interested in and understand our activities. Where we fit, what we do, and what we don’t do. We are working for all current and future New Zealanders.”
"We want to be a ‘Great Team, Best Central Bank’ and transparency plays a crucial part to get there. This award recognises our efforts to bringing a higher level of transparency and accountability in achieving our mandate,” Mr Orr said. "
These quotes are absolute nonsense.
The people are waking up
- and in this context they are now repeating the most important question of all relating to this:
“Why is a privately owned and run banking institution issuing and controlling the currency of my country?”
After all, everything that we trade and everything that we earn from work and services, is all predicated on being alive and having needs and desires as living people.
Most of us are both producers and consumers, but those who are only able to consume are vitally important as well.
It is the consumers who give meaning and value to what the producers produce, whether it is goods or services.
Consumers are the ultimate source of “perceived value” in any such system. Put another way, it’s my hunger that makes your hot dog valuable in the first place.
If we remember these simple facts when we create economic service systems - and that is all that banking and insurance and stock and bond markets are - and properly value consumers for what they contribute, then everything falls back into balance. Both the yin and the yang have their due.
From that perspective, it then becomes possible for people to see that all of this, whether honest or crooked in its factual operation, is arbitrary.
It’s a game. We are keeping tally and nobody really knows why.
That simple act of keeping track of what goes into the system and what comes out of the system and into “your” account and “my” account, is what creates the illusion of limitation, separation, and value. Accounting makes rich men rich and poor men poor.
Accounting is the mechanism of enslavement, just as law is the instrument of condemnation.
So we need to ask ourselves - what are we accounting for? Why?
Perhaps it might make sense if the purpose of accounting was to make sure that everyone gets a fair share, or to make sure that something pencils out in terms of effort going into it versus benefit coming out of it, but instead, the main purpose of accounting in the modern world is to keep track of digits and shunt them here and there, to keep a tally of symbols - signifying what? Non-existent piles of silver? Hours that nobody ever worked?
This might be harmless enough in a theoretical world, but our actual experience tells us that it is harmful, because people forget it is a game and charlatans make false claims in commerce based on these tallymarks.
They take actual homes and farms and factories “in return for” - well, nothing at all.
Yes, I will give you credit for reading this, because most people can’t bear to think about these things - and I will note that there is no big difference between me “giving you credit” for reading this and any bank giving you credit for filling out a loan application, pledging your assets to them, so that they have credit to loan you.
You finally see how stupid this is? How important it is to know what you are valuing? And how that value is accounted fof?
Value, like beauty, is actually in the eye of the beholder. It doesn’t exist external to the relationship between individual Producers and individual Consumers.
So focus the economic services industry on the relationship between Consumer and Producer, and properly value the Consumers.
The simpler, more mindful, more direct, and more honest we can make the interface between Consumers and Producers on a worldwide basis, the better.
Instead of quibbling about what physical material we use to make tokens - our little Tiki gods made of gold, plastic, paper or what-have-you - or what form the tokens take, our attention should be on what we value and why we value it and how we account for it.
The more abundant and the more widely dispersed the tokens are, whatever we use as tokens, the better.
We don’t need to be coy or chintzy about our reasons for distributing tokens, either, so as to make them seem more valuable by being scarce. We can freely give every man, woman, and child on this planet more than enough tokens to live and live well, which should be the goal of any sane economic system.
And then, we need to ask ourselves a lot of disturbing questions like: do we really need ten Barbie dolls?
Do we need to eat meat every night of the week? What impacts do our consumer choices have on the planet? The plants, the animals, and other people?
Do we need to make other choices and value other things? Or value different things more?
Maybe love and health should hit the scales and weigh in as being “valuable”? These are the worthy questions, and the answers we give can change the world.
It really doesn’t matter whether we use gold, paper, plastic, or digits as a “medium of trade”.
Whatever tokens we use to represent value, they remain tokens, in the same way that a statue representing a saint remains a statue.
So let’s re-focus our thinking and the worldwide debate about banks and “money” and currencies, and most of all about “value” - and let’s squarely face such questions as, “Can value be stored?”
I, for one, don’t believe that value can be stored in a gold coin like storing electrons in a car battery; rather, I see that some delusions are more durable than others. People more readily believe that gold has value, so according to their belief, it does.
But that’s like saying I believe in ghosts, so I am more scared when I hear something go bump in the night.
It’s not a reflection of the value of gold. It’s a reflection of people’s long term belief in the value of gold.
Let’s ask - what is our standard for assigning “value” to a cord of wood, or an hour of time? Let’s ask why your hour as a brain surgeon is so much more valuable than my hour cleaning ten toilets?
Most of all, let’s ask who all this really belongs to - because to be honest, none of us created any of what we are trading.
Even our ability to walk around and think and perform work is being constantly created for us by powers we don’t begin to comprehend.
So, in the final analysis, what are we doing, but indulging in an adult game of “Pretend”?
Let’s look at what we are doing, why we are doing it, and how we are doing it. And then answer the real question that we are being asked by the entire Universe: what do you want? Do you want things to be like this?
Karen Hudes is a flak for the World Bank - but this statement requires analysis of what the “World Bank” is. It’s a bank of banks, controlled by bankers from all over the world.
So what happens when the World Bank does things that endanger or offend the member banks?
If things get bad enough and the implications liability-wise are clear enough, those member banks that stand to lose the most will need a “whistleblower” to dampen down the improper actions being taken by the World Bank.
The same scenario could develop within the World Bank itself. The Directors could find themselves being outgunned and out-maneuvered by several very powerful member banks - in effect, forced to do immoral or illegal things and left to take the blame for it.
Enter Karen Hudes.
That is the kind of “Whistleblower” she is - not the brave, lonely figure alerting the world to criminal wrong-doing, but the Insider being employed to blow the whistle because internal organizational control mechanisms aren’t working.
You might think of her as the person being paid to pull the emergency brake on a runaway train.
So, she’s certainly not an enemy of the World Bank. She still indirectly works for them and so, last time I looked, does her husband.
She was, in fact, taking action to help at least some factions within the World Bank and most likely, her activities stem from the second scenario - that is, most likely she was working for some of the directors of the World Bank to save the World Bank.
My beef with Karen is that she either doesn’t know or chooses not to tell the truth about the American issues. She misrepresents American history and does so in a way that undermines efforts to settle accounts.
And why that is?
She has spent her life in Europe and even many Americans who grew up and stayed in this country for a lifetime don’t know their own history, so it is completely plausible and even likely that she simply doesn’t know that she is misrepresenting what went on here.
It could also be that she knows the history and is - again - protecting the World Bank.
The World Bank has reasons why it does not want to hear about what it owes Americans.
1. We know that FDR collected by his own admission 20,000 tons of privately held American gold.
We know that 6,000 tons of that was used to capitalize the Federal Reserve System, and 14,000 tons was used as a bankruptcy guarantee for the other Secondary Creditors - the World Bank and IBRD (International Bank of Reconstruction and Development).
We know this gold stash was used as a collateral guarantee backing both the World Bank and IBRD as a result.
We also know that when the bankruptcy of “the” United States of America, Incorporated was finally settled in November of 1999 - that gold was not returned to the Americans.
World Bank and IBRD claimed it as “abandoned assets” - and made no attempt to contact us and return the assets to the lawful heirs - the living people of this country.
I have a problem with that.
It’s bad enough that they had the free use of our assets as collateral for 66 years without our consent and even worse that FDR stole our assets at gunpoint in the first place - which they also had cause to know - without adding injury to insult by purloining the assets once the bankruptcy was over.
We want the 14,000 tons of American gold returned to the lawful government of this country, to be returned for the direct benefit of the heirs of those it was stolen from.
It’s just simple law and decency. If your Grandmother was forced at gunpoint to “donate” her wedding ring, you’d feel the same way I do. It’s not even the thought of any riches. It’s the thought of justice and property being returned to the lawful heirs and owners.
Second Bone to Pick:
Upward of $21 trillion dollars worth of credit owed to Americans is also owed by the banks - and the World Bank and its members certainly have cause to know this.
The “system” adopted in 1913 and completely implemented in 1934 is a debt-credit system using a private military script I.O.U. known as the FEDERAL RESERVE NOTE - FRN’s, as currency.
Like any other “Note” this is just a piece of paper promising to pay at some later date.
But to be legal there has to be a redemption date and there is none published on these notes - why?
Because the debt was transferred to Treasury Bonds that are issued in tranches and paid off on specific dates - to the purported investors, the Federal Reserve Banks.
But are the Federal Reserve Banks the actual investors?
No. They are just a bunch of check kiters, illegal securities brokers, and crooks..
The American States and People are the actual investors - again, at gun point, forced to “invest” by Legal Tender Laws.
So let’s look a little deeper at the actual situation.
They are using debt as legal tender which results in what is known as a debit-credit system.
I give you an I.O.U. and you give me a hamburger.
Have I paid you for the hamburger?
No.
I have promised to pay you back sometime in the future.
In this way the “US National Debt” accumulated, and so also did the American National Credit.
All the Americans who exchanged their actual labor and actual hamburgers for I.O.U.s are owed pre-paid credit for every penny of the US National Debt.
Plus interest.
This is a fact that none of the banks want to face, because they all benefited from using this credit that was in fact owed to us. They purloined it, leveraged it, invested it, cashiered it away so that we couldn’t have any direct benefit from it, and now, they don’t want to admit what they did and return it.
In fact, they can’t return it, but they could make a good faith effort to benefit the people they wronged by carrying through on the promised remedy passed by their Congress back in 1934, and honoring a system of Mutual Offset Credit Exchange Exemption, which the miscreants never actually disclosed to the public or fully implemented.
In a MOCEE system both parties owe each other debts.
In this case, we owe them for government services and they owe us for the goods, services, credit, etc., that they receive from us - so we simply agree to “offset” our debts.
I owe you $10, you owe me $100, so we agree that henceforth, I owe you nothing and your debt to me is reduced to $90.
Confirmed - Loans & Mortgages Are Created Out Of Thin Air By The Banks
This stunning news clip from New Zealand TV news show 'Seven Sharp' confirms the revelations shared by 'The Money Masters' and other such pioneering thinkers and researchers who have long sought to bring forward the truth about how money works.
The is as stunning as it is simple: whenever you apply for a loan or a mortgage THE BANK YOU APPLIED TO CREATES THE MONEY OUT OF NOTHING.
It is not lent to you from the banks' holdings, it is not borrowed from other accounts. It simply is entered into a bank account digitally and from that day forth you are contractually responsible for paying back the created money PLUS all the interest that accrues.
This fiat currency is destroying the confidence, trust, and agreements that we hold with one another and with merchants on a daily basis by corrupting the medium of exchange that we all collectively agree to use.
Many will go on to expound the details of promissory notes, double entry book keeping and all sorts of other confusing details, but it is essential that this video or the source for it at Seven Sharp should be shared with every one you know.
Please, take 5 minutes now to share this video and explain why it is so important that everyone knows that the banks are hoodwinking the people and it does not need to be this way any more.
If the rats had simply carried through and made this available to the Americans, the US Debt would have been kept in check and never “blossomed” into a $21 trillion dollar behemoth. Plus interest.
Now the “US” Corporations, including the Federal Reserve System, responsible for this theft and embezzlement of pre-paid credit owed to the Americans, applied for and received bankruptcy protection because of the bogus “US National Debt” that should have been offset -but clearly, this was all predicated on fraud and embezzlement of credit owed to us, so that no bankruptcy protection should have been allowed.
Those who benefitted from this theft and who protected the perpetrators - the Pope and the Queen - remain on the stick for it, but all the banks worldwide benefitted, so Karen’s buddies at the World Bank are squeezing their knees together, too.
It’s an absolutely staggering amount of pre-paid credit that was extracted from us and the interest owed on it has taken on a life of its own.
The pre-paid American National Credit is the elephant in the downstairs bathroom.
We know that they can never pay us back in actual fact, but they can begin to make amends by doing what they agreed to do in the first place. They need to be authorizing Mutual Offset Credit Exchange Exemptions for all Americans, allowing us to offset all public debts.
In real time that means that we would be able to offset mortgage payments (which are public debt, not private - but that’s another story), college loans, utility payments, and various other bills.
This could be done simply by issuing a special purpose credit card.
In this way, Americans would finally obtain relief and the Perpetrators would finally be paying some of their own bills and nobody would have to go broke over it.
So far, they are trying tooth and nail to obscure and cover up the facts, but both the history and the very nature of a debt-credit system belie them.
They are stuck and they either come to terms to provide relief that is owed, or eventually enough “wolves” will wake up - enough other countries will realize that they have been or are being victimized in exactly the same way, and then all bets are off.
I suspect that this latter fact is what makes the World Bank so nervous.
Growth and profits are good things for corporations - and that includes banks, but not at the cost of enslaving people you are supposed to serve, and not at the cost of fraud, embezzlement, and all the other crimes involved.
This is just "the credit side" of things. There’s more that puts us - Americans - at odds with Karen and the World Bank on the actual assets side.
In 1868, the Scottish Government chartered a commercial corporation calling itself “The United States of America, Inc.”
They then gained access to our credit using this semantic deceit.
Their plan and the plan of every other corporation operating in this manner ever since, was simply to charge up our credit cards to the limit, claim bankruptcy protection for themselves, and claim that we were their co-signers - so as to leave us holding the proverbial bag.
Before their planned bankruptcy, however, they did a number of things that have still to be corrected or accounted for.
Most significantly, they bought the Philippine Islands “for” us, using our money to do it, and then, they transported all our physical gold to the Philippines for “safe-keeping” offshore.
That original Doppleganger went bankrupt in 1906 and the next Doppleganger, “the” United States of America, Inc. pulled the same basic trick, inflated the currency, ran up the stock market, caused the whole “Roaring Twenties” and Prohibition mark up, went bankrupt in 1933 - and in 1934, their Board of Directors calling itself a “Congress” passed legislation “creating and independent government for the Philippines”.
This created a situation wherein we owned the land of the Philippines lock, stock, and barrel, but now the Philippines had an “independent government” to act as the Trustee for all our gold that was packed off and stored there.
This is the connect between Marcos and the Philippines and our gold and President Kennedy and the various agreements that various Presidents made “for” us and that Karen keeps hooting about - the Bilateral Minefields and Green Hilton and so on.
Comment: Anna's knowledge on matters in the East (and especially with regards to deposited historical gold and other assets in bunkers in Eastern Asian countries) is outside of her otherwise extremely well-versed sphere of expertise. Therefore some of her comments on Eastern matters are not always well informed.
To put it mildly, all that went on back then by any sane evaluation, is piracy.
And by Maxim of Law, “Possession by Pirates does not change ownership.”
Everything that they stashed over there still belongs to us and we have the shipping and docket and flat and box numbers and everything else from those days down to this. We even have their supreme Bank Trustee in our jurisdiction, and are working with him to sort this Mess out.
So, that is stroke Number Three that Karen Hudes and the World Bank don’t want to face.
Don’t get me wrong. The Americans don’t own all the gold that is cashiered in the Philippines and Indonesia. We do, however, own a very goodly part of it, and we own it outright.
Our gold and silver deposits collateralize many, many, many banks and the loss of that collateral is what ultimately terrifies the banks.
As with so many other bunko schemes they changed the meaning of “Depositor” to allow themselves to seize deposits left in their keeping, but our deposits were made before those surreptitious changes away from a “normal course of business” - so we are unaffected and grandfathered-in.
Karen and her Employers at the World Bank don’t know whether to stand up or sit down as a result. Nobody knows what to do, and at the same time, nobody wants to talk to us - because they are afraid of us.
They know how mercilessly we have been cheated and defrauded and they expect no mercy in return.
I can only assume that they judge others by themselves.
However, in the broad scheme of life, it does no good for anyone to seek the destruction of others. That just opens up another avenue for nasty people to profit themselves at everyone else’s expense, so no, we are not proposing vengeance.
We are proposing a peace and reconciliation process to discharge odious debt and open up credit resources and restore a sane economic system, at the same time that we fully restore our own government - putting Americans in control of America again.
This should be good news for people worldwide, as it dawns on them that “the US” is not America.
It should also be a relief that we are proceeding in a lawful and peaceful manner and not being vengeful.
At the same time, Mr. Trump and the Pope and the Queen, need to talk directly to the actual Creditors and dispense with any pretense that we are anyone or anything but what we are: the American States and People, doing business as The United States of America [Unincorporated].
Obviously, Karen and the World Bank and the community that she represents professionally have tried to avoid these facts and tried to explain them (and us) away, and that is why I have a less-than-high regard for Karen.
I see her as someone who is grinding her own wheel and actually protecting interests that have been less than honest and forthcoming both now and in the past.
That doesn’t mean that they can’t change, and it doesn’t mean that we won’t talk to them in the interests of resolving all these issues. It just means that the facts as we know and observe them don’t jive with the story that Karen is selling.
A Final Comment from Anna:
[This comment is not part of the original article. It came to me from Anna today, February 23 2020 via email. I told her that I wanted to republish this article from PhiBetaIota and asked her for any additional comments:]
The fact is that the same parties control all the world’s gold just as they control oil supplies and soon hope to control water supplies.
The game now is to locate, jail, or otherwise neutralize these whackjob criminals.
I stand by everything I said in that article and it does not matter what you choose for your idol - paper, gold, crude oil - nor does it matter if it comes from the East or the West.
It’s all crooked, it’s all idolatry, and if the Pope or the Mullahs or the leaders of the Synagogues of the world were worth their salt, they would all be denouncing it and calling for the honest currency system I described.
Until we adopt such a system there will be commodity rigging and fraud. I am sorry but that is just the way it goes. Human nature is what it is.
Bill Clinton Poses With Epstein’s ‘Pimp’ Ghislaine Maxwell And A Sex Slave On Board Private Jet The ‘Lolita Express’ February 23 2020 | From: TheSun / Various
Bill Clinton poses side-by-side with suspected pimp Ghislaine Maxwell - as the pair board pedophile Jeffrey Epstein’s notorious private jet.
Click on the image above to view a close up version in a new window
The former US President is seen smiling on the steps of the plane - dubbed the Lolita Express - next to Maxwell, in astonishing pictures exclusively obtained by The Sun.
In another image he has his arm round Epstein's personal masseuse and sex slave Chauntae Davies - who had been ordered to wear a 'pilot' shirt to look professional.
Other never-seen-before images show Clinton traveling on the infamous Boeing 727 jet while playing cards and chomping on a cigar.
Now, for the first time, Chauntae Davies has revealed the extraordinary details of Clinton's long distance flight to Africa with Maxwell and a number of other celebrities.
The star-studded group – which included actors Kevin Spacey and Chris Tucker – visited Ghana, Nigeria, Rwanda, Mozambique, Johannesburg and Cape Town in a five-day humanitarian trip.
There is no suggestion Clinton, Spacey, 60, or Tucker, 48, did anything wrong during the tour, or knew of Maxwell's alleged activities on Epstein's behalf, or the abuse Chauntae suffered at his hands.
However, it will further raise concerns about how some of the world's most famous and powerful people were drawn into Epstein's circle at a time when he was committing horrific sex crimes.
Clinton was pictured with his arm around Epstein's private masseuse Chauntae Davies
"It’s clear that Epstein was using this private jet and his wealth to get close to rich and powerful people.
“Looking back at these images now it raises a lot of questions about why Bill Clinton was using the plane and what perhaps Jeffrey may have been trying to accomplish by having him around.”
Victims of the monster say he organised orgies on board the three-engine commercial jet.
American dignitaries and rich and powerful figures - including under-fire royal Prince Andrew - also regularly travelled on the plane.
No evidence has emerged to prove that Andrew or Bill Clinton took part in sexual activity on the Lolita Express.
But Chauntae, who suffered a series of rapes and sexual assaults at the hands of disgraced Wall Street tycoon Epstein, opened up about the September 2002 Africa trip for the first time.
It was part of a project for Clinton’s foundation, in order to raise awareness about poverty and the AIDS crisis.
But it also saw pedophile Epstein and his alleged pimp Maxwell - who has always vehemently denied any wrongdoing - rubbing shoulders with America’s former commander-in-chief and other A-list celebs.
Chauntae, then aged 22, categorically denied that any improper behavior occurred around Clinton and that he was a “complete gentleman” the entire time.
The former president also previously issued a statement in regards to his travels on the plane and denied knowing anything about the financier’s crimes.
It said:
"President Clinton knows nothing about the terrible crimes Jeffrey Epstein plead guilty to in Florida some years ago, or those with which he has previously been charged in New York.
“In 2002 and 2003, President Clinton took a total of four trips on Jeffrey Epstein’s airplane: one to Europe, one to Asia, and two to Africa, which included stops in connection with the Clinton Foundation.
Staff, supporters of the Foundation, and his Secret Service detail traveled on every leg or every trip.”
Chauntae has never accused Andrew of any wrongdoing and Andrew himself has always denied any impropriety.
Speaking on his behalf, Buckingham Palace said: “The Duke of York has been appalled by the recent reports of Jeffrey Epstein’s alleged crimes."
Describing how she found herself on the once-in-a-lifetime trip, Chauntae revealed how she received a call from Epstein’s office asking if she would come on a trip he was hosting. He gave her just a week’s notice to prepare.
She said:
"That was all I was told, just a simple yes or no and can I leave in a week?
Meaning, get all necessary shots, reschedule any existing appointments, pack a suitcase and meet us in New York to fly to Africa.
It did weigh heavy on my mind the remoteness of being on the other side of the world with Jeffrey, not knowing what to expect from him.
I was praying Jeffrey wouldn’t make a move on me, desperately wanting everything about this trip to be kept professional.”
Massage therapist Chauntae - who was allegedly raped and sexually assaulted by Epstein on other trips, including at his private Caribbean island of Little St James - was terrified of the American.
At the time of the Africa trip she had recently broken her finger and recalls that Ghislaine Maxwell – who had first recruited her into Epstein’s inner circle - was unsure if she should travel.
Chauntae said: “Ghislaine, after first convincing me I didn’t want to miss out on this opportunity when I initially hesitated, had doubts I could help carry things and prepare food."
“I took a commercial flight from LA to New York and then walked from that plane to Jeffrey’s plane sitting in the middle of the tarmac."
“A man ushered me over and I boarded to find Sarah Kellen and two other assistants, waiting for Jeffrey and Ghislaine’s arrival, along with whoever they were hosting."
“I was curious to see who my travel companions would be. I hoped we got along. The man handed me a packet and suggested I look through it and become familiar with the itinerary."
“He gave us uniformed shirts to wear, white button downs with captain shoulder patches. I felt like a goober but I was a good sport and put it on."
“We were given a briefing on the food that was available on the plane and our flight schedule, but then we took a seat.”
Chauntae then told how she was shocked and surprised to see the A-list guests arrive, including ex-Prez Clinton.
She said: “I jumped out of my seat and was immediately aware that my travel mates had arrived. And in walks Bill Clinton."
“He continued to walk onto the plane, introducing himself. I thought him to be charming and sweet."
“More of the guests arrived, and somehow, as the plane closed its doors, I stood looking around the room at all the new faces I just met."
“A movie was put on, everyone took either a seat in the giant armchairs or on the floor, and watched it all together. Eventually, everyone fell asleep to the movie.”
The trip saw the group attend events in Ghana, Rwanda, Nigeria, Mozambique and South Africa.
On the Ghana leg of the trip, Chauntae revealed she went shopping at a small wooden jewellery store and helped the former President pick out a bracelet for his daughter Chelsea.
She said: “He and I were bonding over the fact that my great uncle, Russel Cronkhite was the head chef for the Blair House, the guest house of the White House, during his Presidency."
“He was the chef that made Chelsea’s infamous pizzas for her thirteenth birthday party."
“Clinton was a great guy on the trip. He’d sit around on the plane with a cigar in his mouth, playing cards between flights."
“I wrote in my journal at the time that I wished he could be president again. He was charismatic and funny and kind and personable."
“It was obvious he cared about not just our country but the world. He was a gracious host.”
Following the final leg of the trip in South Africa, Epstein’s plane departed for London and Clinton and the other celebrities left.
Chauntae and a smaller group of people flew to Paris with Epstein.
Despite the experiences on the foreign visit, Chauntae was haunted by her previous experiences with Epstein.
She added: “I felt shamed by what had been happening with Jeffrey and I was doing my best acting performance to keep things looking as professional as I could."
“I had to cover it up for everyone. I still thought it was happening only to me and I couldn’t talk about it with any of the other assistants.”
Screentime Is Making Kids Moody, Crazy, And Lazy February 22 2020 | From: PsychologyToday
Children or teens who are “revved up” and prone to rages or - alternatively - who are depressed and apathetic have become disturbingly commonplace.
Chronically irritable children are often in a state of abnormally high arousal, and may seem “wired and tired.”
That is, they’re agitated but exhausted. Because chronically high arousal levels impact memory and the ability to relate, these kids are also likely to struggle academically and socially.
At some point, a child with these symptoms may be given a mental-health diagnosis such as major depression, bipolar disorder, or ADHD, and offered corresponding treatments, including therapy and medication. But often these treatments don’t work very well, and the downward spiral continues.
What’s happening?
Both parents and clinicians may be “barking up the wrong tree.” That is, they’re trying to treat what lookslike a textbook case of mental disorder, but failing to rule out and address the most common environmental cause of such symptoms - everyday use of electronics.
Time and again, I’ve realized that regardless of whether there exists any “true” underlying diagnoses, successfully treating a child with mood dysregulation today requires methodically eliminating all electronics use for several weeks - an “electronics fast” - to allow the nervous system to “reset.”
If done correctly, this intervention can produce deeper sleep, a brighter and more even mood, better focus and organization, and an increase in physical activity.
The ability to tolerate stress improves, so meltdowns diminish in both frequency and severity.
The child begins to enjoy the things they used to, is more drawn to nature, and imaginary or creative play returns. In teens and young adults, an increase in self-directed behavior is observed - the exact opposite of apathy and hopelessness.
It’s a beautiful thing.
At the same time, the electronic fast reduces or eliminates the need for medication while rendering other treatments more effective.
Improved sleep, more exercise, and more face-to-face contact with others compound the benefits - an upward spiral! After the fast, once the brain is reset, the parent can carefully determine how much if any electronics use the child can tolerate without symptoms returning.
Restricting electronics may not solve everything, but it’s often the missing link in treatment when kids are stuck.
Children’s brains are much more sensitive to electronics use than most of us realize. In fact, contrary to popular belief, it doesn’t take much electronic stimulation to throw a sensitive and still-developing brain off track.
Also, many parents mistakenly believe that interactive screen-time - Internet or social media use, texting, emailing, and gaming - isn’t harmful, especially compared to passive screen time like watching TV.
In fact, interactive screen time is more likely to cause sleep, mood, and cognitive issues, because it’s more likely to cause hyperarousal and compulsive use.
Here’s a look at six physiological mechanisms that explain electronics’ tendency to produce mood disturbance:
Because light from screen devices mimics daytime, it suppresses melatonin, a sleep signal released by darkness. Just minutes of screen stimulation can delay melatonin release by several hours and desynchronize the body clock.
Once the body clock is disrupted, all sorts of other unhealthy reactions occur, such as hormone imbalance and brain inflammation. Plus, high arousal doesn’t permit deep sleep, and deep sleep is how we heal.
Many children are “hooked” on electronics, and in fact gaming releases so much dopamine - the “feel-good” chemical - that on a brain scan it looks the same as cocaine use.
But when reward pathways are overused, they become less sensitive, and more and more stimulation is needed to experience pleasure.
Meanwhile, dopamine is also critical for focus and motivation, so needless to say, even small changes in dopamine sensitivity can wreak havoc on how well a child feels and functions.
In fact, animal studies show that exposure to screen-based light before or during sleep causes depression, even when the animal isn’t looking at the screen.
Sometimes parents are reluctant to restrict electronics use in a child’s bedroom because they worry the child will enter a state of despair - but in fact removing light-at-night is protective.
Both acute stress (fight-or-flight) and chronic stress produce changes in brain chemistry and hormones that can increase irritability.
Indeed, cortisol, the chronic stress hormone, seems to be both a cause and an effect of depression - creating a vicious cycle. Additionally, both hyperarousal and addiction pathways suppress the brain’s frontal lobe, the area where mood regulation actually takes place.
In today’s world, it may seem crazy to restrict electronics so drastically.
But when kids are struggling, we’re not doing them any favors by leaving electronics in place and hoping they can wind down by using electronics in "moderation."
It just doesn't work.
In contrast, by allowing the nervous system to return to a more natural state with a strict fast, we can take the first step in helping a child become calmer, stronger, and happier.
Why Medically Caused Deaths Continue To Be Ignored February 21 2020 | From: JonRappoport / Various
More than any other reporter, I have continued to champion and spread the word about Dr. Barbara Starfield’s revelation: The US medical system kills 106,000 people a year with its medicines. Extrapolate that number for a decade: more than MILLION DEATHS.
I interviewed her in 2009, when she told me that her death numbers (106,000 per year) were conservative, and that the federal government was doing NOTHING comprehensive to fix the ongoing disaster.
Imagine that, coming from a doctor who was a revered public health expert at the Johns Hopkins School of Public Health.
Since I’ve written more articles about Dr. Starfield’s revelations than any reporter around, I also know the reaction of the mainstream press over the years: SILENCE. And more silence. And more.
So this time, I thought I’d explain the main reasons for the silence.
On one obvious level, it stems from the fact that the pharmaceutical industry buys enormous amounts of ads on and around news media. Do not bite the hand that feeds you.
And of course, blaming the medical system for a million deaths per decade…well, if you’re the New York Times and you’re making this into a take-no-prisoners ongoing building story, you’re going to incur considerable heat. Blowtorch heat.
Then there is this: nowhere in the medical literature is there any evidence, based on published studies of drugs, that these substances do such catastrophic damage. In fact, the studies and reports of clinical drug trials are largely glowing.
Only one conclusion can be reached: the medical literature is rife with fraud from top to bottom.
This fact would immediately throw the reputations of the most prestigious medical journals in the world into garbage landfills.
Indeed, we have, on the record, an editor of one of these publications broadly confessing to a mind-boggling reality: Dr. Marcia Angell, editor of The New England Journal of Medicine for 20 years, has written:
"It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines.
I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine.”
- NY Review of Books, January 15, 2009, “Drug Companies & Doctors: A Story of Corruption”
Next: if the press dug deep into the guts of the Starfield story, the FDA, which must approve all medical drugs before they are released for public use, would go down with a blinding crash.
No one would be able to defend the Agency. Its profound criminal alliance with Pharma would come full force to the surface.
Multiple medical schools would come under the gun for their relationships with Pharma, and their basic practice of teaching monopolistic drug medicine and not nutritional medicine.
These schools pretend “the evidence of safety and efficacy” for drugs is wide-ranging and invariably clear. Therefore, they, the schools, are abetting what amounts to a capital crime.
And what of the basic Hippocratic oath to “first do no harm”?
Where is that vaunted pledge that tries to establish the practice of medicine as supremely ethical?
As you can see, a whole long line of dominos would fall, if the Starfield story were pursued, by the mainstream, with time, energy, money, and passion for the truth. (Starfield is not the only citation on medically caused deaths. I have documented others in the past.)
Finally, we arrive at a psychological and even philosophical reason for press silence on this ongoing holocaust: for millions of people, the institution of medicine is a foundational pillar of Reality in the world.
Attachment to it is, in a way, mythological. Loyalty to the medical system runs the gamut from hope for raw physical survival to spiritual sustenance.
Creating doubt, widespread doubt, about such a powerful building block of Existence - that would be tinkering with the very structure of things, “meddling with the primal forces of nature.”
But here, on these pages, I’ll meddle with anything I want to. If you can’t handle that, so be it. If I want to make a true fact into a sledgehammer and use it over and over, I will. And on this issue of medical caused deaths, I’d be crazy not to.
The Spider's Web: Britain's Second Empire February 20 2020 | From: IndependentPoV
At the demise of empire, City of London financial interests created a web of secrecy jurisdictions that captured wealth from across the globe and hid it in a web of offshore islands.
Today, up to half of global offshore wealth is hidden in British jurisdictions and Britain and its dependencies are the largest global players in the world of international finance.
The Spider's Web was substantially inspired by Nicholas Shaxson's book Treasure Islands you can read an extract of it here: The Truth ABout Tax Havens
For those interested to learn more about tax justice and financial secrecy, read about the Tax Justice Network's campaigning and regular blogs - become part of the movement for change and listen to the Tax Justice Network's monthly podcast/radio show the Taxcast: TaxJustice.net
Will Google’s Social Credit System Determine Your Future? February 19 2020 | From: Mercola / Various China started rolling out a social credit system in 2018, which awards and subtracts points for certain types of behavior.
Google is the largest monopoly the world has ever seen, and its data-siphoning tentacles reach deep into our everyday lives, collecting data on every move you make and conversation you have, whether online or in the real world.
By the end of 2021, approximately 1 billion cameras will be watching public movements across the globe. Cities are also inviting residents and businesses to plug their private surveillance cameras into their police network, which expands the surveillance system even further.
To make sense of all this footage, video analytic software and artificial intelligence are used. Video analytic capabilities include fight and fall detection, loitering and motion recognition, dog walking, jaywalking, toll fare evasion and lie detection.
There are now proposals suggesting all of this data, in combination with AI-enabled analytics systems, could be used for “predictive policing” as illustrated in the 2002 movie “Minority Report,” where suspected perpetrators are arrested before actually committing the crime.
You may have heard about China's social credit system - a dystopian monitoring scheme focused on the moral dimension of human life and behavior - which was conceived in 2014 and rolled out in in earnest in 2018. As reported by Business Insider in October that year:1
"Like private credit scores, a person's social score can move up and down depending on their behavior. The exact methodology is a secret - but examples of infractions include bad driving, smoking in non-smoking zones, buying too many video games and posting fake news online.
China has already started punishing people by restricting their travel. Nine million people with low scores have been blocked from buying tickets for domestic flights.
They can also clamp down on luxury options - three million people are barred from getting business-class train tickets. The eventual system will punish bad passengers specifically. Potential misdeeds include trying to ride with no ticket, loitering in front of boarding gates, or smoking in no-smoking areas."
Aside from impeding your ability to travel, an individual's punishment for "bad behavior" per the social credit system can also result in slower internet speed, being banned from attending certain schools or getting a higher education, being barred from certain types of employment, confiscation of pets and, of course, public shaming.
In the bitchute video above, Truthstream Media details how this kind of public "trustworthiness" scoring can alter the way people behave - indeed their view of reality itself, and the vast data mining required for the system to work. As noted in the video:
"Social credit scores award or remove points based on behavior. It's Big Data meets Big Brother. This will be a world with no more personal experiences, only transactions for the social credit system.
This [the system] knows every person, every bike, every car, every bus. That's because it essentially turns every public interaction into a transaction where points can be earned or lost."
Google, of course, is a perfect fit for this kind of Orwellian surveillance scheme. It is, by far, the largest monopoly the world has ever seen, and its data-siphoning tentacles reach deep into our everyday lives, collecting data on every move you make and conversation you have, whether online or in the real world.
Google actually tracks your movements online, even when you don't think you are using their products. Most websites you visit use the 'free' Google Analytics program to track everything you do on a website. Google purchased Urchin Software back in 2005, and by giving it away were able to integrate this important surveillance tool into most of the internet.
Google Analytics integrates with Google's ad network monopoly, as well as the largest email service Gmail. These systems are not free, they are a tightly integrated package of surveillance tools - selling your data, selling ads served to you, and manipulating content to direct your behavior.
These tools collect data along with other Google products like the Android 'smart' phones, the Nest home security system, and even Google's Home Assistant. You can expect these surveillance products to become free over time as the absolute goal is to exploit every bit of data they can collect from you.
A 2015 Wired article revealed some of the details of how Google's online empire is built, noting "One of the company's cluster switches provides about 40 terabits per second of bandwidth - the equivalent of 40 million home internet connections," and "Google now sends more information between its data centers than it trades with the internet as a whole."
As highlighted in a January 27, 2020, article by The Intercept, smart camera networks equipped with facial recognition and video analytic software will advance global surveillance even further, and should be banned to prevent an inevitable slide into invisible yet all-encompassing authoritarianism.
"The rise of all-seeing smart camera networks is an alarming development that threatens civil rights and liberties throughout the world.
Law enforcement agencies have a long history of using surveillance against marginalized communities, and studies show surveillance chills freedom of expression - ill effects that could spread as camera networks grow larger and more sophisticated," The Intercept notes.
Exposing China's Digital Dystopian Dictatorship | Foreign Correspondent
China is marrying Big Brother to Big Data. Every citizen will be watched and their behaviour scored in the most ambitious and sophisticated system of social control in history.
Silicon Valley Is Building America's Social Credit System
According to Fast Company, China's social credit system is not entirely unique. A parallel system is developing in the United States, in part as the result of Silicon Valley and technology-industry user policies, and in part by surveillance of social media activity by private companies," Fast Company writes.
For example, life insurance companies can now use content shared in social media posts to determine your premium. "That Instagram pic showing you teasing a grizzly bear at Yellowstone with a martini in one hand, a bucket of cheese fries in the other, and a cigarette in your mouth, could cost you," Fast Company notes.
PatronScan is another example. These devices are used by restaurants to identify fake IDs and undesirable customers - people previously removed from an establishment for causing a fight, committing sexual assault, stealing or doing drugs.
The list is shared among PatronScan customers, so getting banned in one bar or restaurant effectively bans you from all bars and restaurants in the U.S., Canada and U.K. for up to one year. For additional examples, see the original Fast Company article.
Many TV's now have a camera and can be used to record your emotions while watching presidential debates or the evening news.
The Intercept article cited earlier goes on to detail the rise and expansion of video surveillance, starting with Axis Communications' internet-enabled surveillance camera, launched in the late '90s, to more modern video management systems that organize all this visual data into databases.
By the end of 2021, the marketing firm IHS Markit predicts 1 billion cameras will be watching public movements across the globe. As if that's not enough, cities are also inviting residents and businesses to plug their private surveillance cameras into their police network, which expands the system even further.
According to The Intercept, Detroit, Chicago, New Orleans, New York City and Atlanta have all deployed these types of "plug-in surveillance networks," and many others are considering it as well. To actually make sense of all this footage, video analytic software and artificial intelligence (AI) are used.
Video analytic capabilities include "fight detection, motion recognition, fall detection, loitering, dog walking, jaywalking, toll fare evasion and even lie detection," The Intercept report
Object recognition and "anomalous or unusual behavior detection" are also used to flag particular incidents that are then reviewed by human eyes. The Intercept recounts how this information can be used by law enforcement to identify potential crime situations:
"In Connecticut, police have used video analytics to identify or monitor known or suspected drug dealers.
Sergeant Johnmichael O'Hare, former Director of the Hartford Real-Time Crime Center, recently demonstrated how BriefCam helped Hartford police reveal 'where people go the most' in the space of 24 hours by viewing footage condensed and summarized in just nine minutes.
Using a feature called 'pathways,' he discovered hundreds of people visiting just two houses on the street and secured a search warrant to verify that they were drug houses"
Is a 'Pre-Crime' Department Next?
Companies are also working on searchable databases that can access and make sense of visual data from a range of different platforms, which will "supercharge the ability to search and surveil public spaces," The Intercept says.
What's more, there are now proposals suggesting all of this data, in combination with AI-enabled analytics systems, could be used for "predictive policing" as illustrated in the 2002 movie "Minority Report," where suspected perpetrators are arrested before actually committing the crime.
Sound too crazy to be true? The Intercept cites a 2018 document by the data storage firm Western Digital and the consulting company Accenture, "Value of Data: Seeing What Matters - A New Paradigm for Public Safety Powered by Responsible AI," which predicts smart surveillance networks may be deployed "across three tiers of maturity."
The first tier is where we're at now, where law enforcement use CCTV networks to investigate crimes after they've already occurred.
At the second tier level, predicted to be in place by 2025, municipalities will be transformed into fully connected "smart cities," where the cameras of businesses and public institutions are all plugged into a government-run AI-enabled analytics system. The third tier, predicted by 2035, will have predictive capabilities. As reported by The Intercept:
"A 'public safety ecosystem' will centralize data 'pulled from disparate databases such as social media, driver's licenses, police databases, and dark data.' An AI-enabled analytics unit will let police assess 'anomalies in real time and interrupt a crime before it is committed.' That is to say, to catch pre-crime"
Google's Ad Network Monopoly
Google's monopoly goes well beyond web search. It also has a potentially dangerous monopoly on online advertising. In 2007, Google bought DoubleClick, which already dominated the digital advertising market. As reported by InfoWorld:
"Here's the danger: Google already knows a tremendous amount about the traffic it sends to individual Web sites - where it comes from, what people are looking for, even some basic demographics.
With DoubleClick in the fold, they will also know what ads are being served on any given page. That gives Google unprecedented insight into publishers' business. And remember, those publishers may be partners, but they are also competitors, often trying to woo the same advertisers as Google.
Web sites live and die based upon ad revenue and on charging advertisers a certain rate based upon the number of pages served and the quality of their readership/user base. I could imagine a not-entirely-paranoid fantasy in which Google can run the numbers, turn around, and offer better rates to advertisers for a similar audience."
To learn more of Google's surveillance of you and those you love, please view my comprehensive interview with Robert Epstein below.
Epstein, former editor-in-chief at Psychology Today, is now a senior research psychologist for the American Institute of Behavioral Research and Technology, where for the last decade he has helped expose Google's manipulative and deceptive practices.
Google Goes After Your Health Data
More recently, it's also become apparent Google is going after everyone's health data. Fitbit, which was recently purchased by Google, will provide them with all your physiological information and activity levels, in addition to everything else that Google already has on you.
As discussed in "How Google Is Stealing Your Personal Health Data," Google, Amazon and Microsoft also collect data entered into health and diagnostic sites, which is then shared with hundreds of third parties - and this data is not anonymized, meaning it's tied specifically to you, without your knowledge or consent.
In other words, DoubleClick, Google's ad service, will know which prescriptions you've searched for on Drugs.com, for example, thus providing you with personalized drug ads. "There is a whole system that will seek to take advantage of you because you're in a compromised state," Tim Libert, a computer scientist at Carnegie Mellon University told Financial Times.
Google and various tech startups have even been investigating the possibility of assessing mental health problems using a combination of electronic medical records and tracking your internet and social media use.
Undisclosed data mining is also occurring in hospitals. A whistleblower recently revealed Google amassed health data from millions of Americans in 21 states through its Project Nightingale, and patients have not been informed of this data mining, as reported by The Guardian:
"The secret scheme … involves the transfer to Google of healthcare data held by Ascension, the second-largest healthcare provider in the U.S. The data is being transferred with full personal details including name and medical history and can be accessed by Google staff. Unlike other similar efforts it has not been made anonymous though a process of removing personal information known as de-identification."
According to Google and Ascension, the data being shared will be used to build a search tool with machine-learning algorithms that will spit out diagnostic recommendations and suggestions for medications that health professionals can then use to guide them in their treatment.
Google claims only a limited number of individuals will have access to the data, but just how trustworthy is Google these days? Since the data includes full personal details, sooner or later, they're likely to find a way to use it.
Google and Mastercard Track Your Purchasing Habits
Your credit card data, which at first glance would appear completely separate from Google, is also being used by the internet giant to customize ads.
As reported by Bloomberg August 31, 2018, four unnamed insiders, three of whom claim to have been directly involved in the negotiations, claim Google and Mastercard brokered a business alliance that gives Google access to Mastercard users' retail spending.
The two companies never made the agreement public, though. Christine Bannan, counsel with the advocacy group Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC) told Bloomberg:
"People don't expect what they buy physically in a store to be linked to what they are buying online. There's just far too much burden that companies place on consumers and not enough responsibility being taken by companies to inform users what they're doing and what rights they have."
According to Google, Mastercard users can opt out of ad tracking using Google's online Web & App Activity console. The question is, how would users know to do that when they were never told such tracking was occurring in the first place?
Google's Store Sales Measurement service also suggests it's not just Mastercard users that are being tracked. As noted by Bloomberg, when Google announced the new sales measurement service in 2017, it claimed it had access to about 70% of U.S. credit and debit card sales.
Goodbye Google
To have any chance of protecting your privacy, you simply must avoid Google products, as they account for the greatest personal data leaks in your life.
To that end, Mercola.com is now Google-free. We do not use Google Analytics, Google ads or Google search for internal searches. To boycott Google, be sure to ditch or replace:
Gmail, as every email you write is permanently stored. It becomes part of your profile and is used to build digital models of you, which allows them to make predictions about your line of thinking and every want and desire.
Many other older email systems such as AOL and Yahoo are also being used as surveillance platforms in the same way as Gmail. ProtonMail.com, which uses end-to-end encryption, is a great alternative and the basic account is free.
Google's Chrome browser, as everything you do on there is surveilled, including keystrokes and every webpage you've ever visited. Brave is a great alternative that takes privacy seriously.
Brave is also faster than Chrome, and suppresses ads. It's based on Chromium, the same software code that Chrome is based on, so you can easily transfer your extensions, favorites and bookmarks.
Google search engine, or any extension of Google, such as Bing or Yahoo, both of which draw search results from Google. The same goes for the iPhone's personal assistant Siri, which draws all of its answers from Google.
Alternative search engines include SwissCows and Qwant. Avoid StartPage, as it was recently bought by an aggressive online marketing company, which, like Google, depends on surveillance.
Android cellphones, which run on a Google-owned operating system, can track you even when you're not connected to the internet, whether you have geo tracking enabled or not. Blackberry is more secure than Android phones or the iPhone. Blackberry's upcoming model, the Key3, may be one of the most secure cellphones in the world.
Google Home devices, as theyrecord everything that occurs in your home or office, both speech and sounds such as brushing your teeth and boiling water, even when they appear to be inactive, and send that information back to Google. Android phones are also always listening and recording, as are Google's home thermostat Nest, and Amazon's Alexa.
Additional Privacy Tips
In my recent interview (above) with Epstein, he also offered the following guidance for those seeking to protect their online privacy:
Use a virtual private network (VPN) such as Nord, which is only about $3 per month and can be used on up to six devices. In my view, this is a must if you seek to preserve your privacy. Epstein explains:
"When you use your mobile phone, laptop or desktop in the usual way, your identity is very easy for Google and other companies to see. They can see it via your IP address, but more and more, there are much more sophisticated ways now that they know it's you. One is called browser fingerprinting.
This is something that is so disturbing. Basically, the kind of browser you have and the way you use your browser is like a fingerprint. You use your browser in a unique way, and just by the way you type, these companies now can instantly identify you.
Brave has some protection against a browser fingerprinting, but you really need to be using a VPN. What a VPN does is it routes whatever you're doing through some other computer somewhere else. It can be anywhere in the world, and there are hundreds of companies offering VPN services. The one I like the best right now is called Nord VPN.
You download the software, install it, just like you install any software. It's incredibly easy to use. You do not have to be a techie to use Nord, and it shows you a map of the world and you basically just click on a country.
The VPN basically makes it appear as though your computer is not your computer. It basically creates a kind of fake identity for you, and that's a good thing. Now, very often I will go through Nord's computers in the United States. Sometimes you have to do that, or you can't get certain things done. PayPal doesn't like you to be in a foreign country for example."
Nord, when used on your cellphone, will also mask your identity when using apps like Google Maps.
Clear your cache and cookies - As Epstein explains in his article:23
"Companies and hackers of all sorts are constantly installing invasive computer code on your computers and mobile devices, mainly to keep an eye on you but sometimes for more nefarious purposes.
On a mobile device, you can clear out most of this garbage by going to the settings menu of your browser, selecting the 'privacy and security' option and then clicking on the icon that clears your cache and cookies.
With most laptop and desktop browsers, holding down three keys simultaneously - CTRL, SHIFT and DEL - takes you directly to the relevant menu; I use this technique multiple times a day without even thinking about it. You can also configure the Brave and Firefox browsers to erase your cache and cookies automatically every time you close your browser."
Don't use Fitbit, as it was recently purchased by Google and will provide them with all your physiological information and activity levels, in addition to everything else that Google already has on you.
Emotional Intelligence: The Social Skills You Weren't Taught In School February 18 2020 | From: StumbleUpon
You’re taught about history, science, and math when you’re growing up. Most of us, however, aren’t taught how to identify or deal with our own emotions, or the emotions of others. These skills can be valuable, but you’ll never get them in a classroom.
Emotional intelligence is a shorthand that psychological researchers use to describe how well individuals can manage their own emotions and react to the emotions of others.
People who exhibit emotional intelligence have the less obvious skills necessary to get ahead in life, such as managing conflict resolution, reading and responding to the needs of others, and keeping their own emotions from overflowing and disrupting their lives. In this guide, we’ll look at what emotional intelligence is, and how to develop your own.
What Is Emotional Intelligence?
Measuring emotional intelligence is relatively new in the field of psychology, only first being explored in the mid-80s. Several models are currently being developed, but for our purposes, we’ll examine what’s known as the “mixed model,” developed by psychologist Daniel Goleman.
Self-awareness: Self-awareness involves knowing your own feelings. This includes having an accurate assessment of what you’re capable of, when you need help, and what your emotional triggers are.
Self-management: This involves being able to keep your emotions in check when they become disruptive. Self-management involves being able to control outbursts, calmly discussing disagreements, and avoiding activities that undermine you like extended self-pity or panic.
Motivation: Everyone is motivated to action by rewards like money or status. Goleman’s model, however, refers to motivation for the sake of personal joy, curiosity, or the satisfaction of being productive.
Empathy: While the three previous categories refer to a person’s internal emotions, this one deals with the emotions of others. Empathy is the skill and practice of reading the emotions of others and responding appropriately.
Social skills: This category involves the application of empathy as well as negotiating the needs of others with your own. This can include finding common ground with others, managing others in a work environment, and being persuasive.
You can read a bit more about these different categories here. The order of these emotional competencies isn’t all that relevant, as we all learn many of these skills simultaneously as we grow. It’s also important to note that, for our purposes, we’ll only be using this as a guide. Emotional intelligence isn’t an area that most people receive formal training in. We’ll let psychologists argue over the jargon and models, but for now let’s explore what each of these mean and how to improve them in your own life.
Self-Awareness
Before you can do anything else here, you have to know what your emotions are. Improving your self-awareness is the first step to identifying any problem area you’re facing.
Here are some ways to improve your self-awareness:
Keep a journal: Career skill blog recommends starting by keeping a journal of your emotions. At the end of every day, write down what happened to you, how you felt, and how you dealt with it. Periodically, look back over your journal and take note of any trends, or any time you overreacted to something.
Ask for input from others: As we’ve talked about before when dealing with your self-perception, input from others can be invaluable. Try to ask multiple people who know you well where your strengths and weaknesses lie. Write down what they say, compare what they say to each other and, again, look for patterns. Most importantly, don’t argue with them. They don’t have to be correct. You’re just trying to gauge your perception from another’s point of view.
Slow down (or meditate): Emotions have a habit of getting the most out of control when we don’t have time to slow down or process them. The next time you have an emotional reaction to something, try to pause before you react (something the internet makes easier than ever, if you’re communicating online). You can also try meditating to slow your brain down and give your emotional state room to breathe.
If you’ve never practiced intentional self-awareness, these tips should give you a practical head start. One strategy I personally use is to go on long walks or have conversations with myself discussing what’s bothering me. Often, I’ll find that the things I say to the imaginary other end of the conversation can give me some insight into what’s really bugging me. The important aspect is to look inwards, rather than focusing solely on external factors.
Self-Management
Once you know how your emotions work, you can start figuring out how to handle them. Proper self-management means controlling your outbursts, distinguishing between external triggers and internal over-reactions, and doing what’s best for your needs.
One key way to manage your emotions is to change your sensory input. You’ve probably heard the old advice to count to ten and breathe when you’re angry. Speaking as someone who’s had plenty of overwhelming issues with depression and anger, this advice is usually crap (though if it works for you, more power to you).
However, giving your physical body a jolt can break the cycle. If you’re feeling lethargic, do some exercise. If you’re stuck in an emotional loop, give yourself a “snap out of it” slap. Anything that can give a slight shock to your system or break the existing routine can help.
Lifehacker alum Adam Dachis also recommends funneling emotional energy into something productive. It’s alright to let overwhelming emotions stew inside you for a moment, if it’s not an appropriate time to let them out. However, when you do, rather than vent it on something futile, turn it into motivation instead:
"I recently started playing tennis for fun, knowing that I’d never become exceptional because I began too late in life. I’ve become better and have a very minor talent for the game, so when I play poorly I now know and I get down on myself.
When up against an opponent with far more skill I find it hard to do much else than get angry. Rather than let that anger out, I take note of it and use it to fuel my desire to practice more. Whether in sports, work, or everyday life, we can get complacent with our skill and forget that we always have some room for improvement.
When you start to get mad, get better instead."
You can’t always control what makes you feel a certain way, but you can always control how you react. If you have some impulse control problems, find ways to get help when you’re feeling calm. Not all emotions can be vented away. My struggle with depression taught me that some emotions persist long after the overflow. However, there’s always a moment when those feelings feel a little less intense. Use those moments to seek help.
Motivation
We talk about motivation a lot. When we’re talking about motivation as it relates to emotional intelligence, however, we don’t just mean getting up the energy to go to work. We’re talking about your inner drive to accomplish something. That drive isn’t just some feel-goody nonsense, either. As Psychology today explains, there’s a section of your prefrontal cortex that lights up at the mere thought of achieving a meaningful goal.
Whether your goal is building a career, raising a family, or creating some kind of art, everyone has something they want to do with their life.When your motivation is working for you, it connects with reality in tangible ways. Want to start a family? Motivated people will start dating. Want to improve your career? Motivated people will educate themselves, apply for new jobs, or angle for a promotion.
Daniel Goleman suggests that in order to start making use of that motivation, you first need to identify your own values. Many of us are so busy that we don’t take the time to examine what our values really are. Or worse, we’ll do work that directly contradicts what we value for so long that we lose that motivation entirely.
Unfortunately, we can’t give you the answer for what it is you want in life, but there are lots of strategies you can try . Use your journal to find times when you’ve felt fulfilled. Create a list of things you value. Most of all, accept the uncertainty in life and just build something. Fitness instructor Michael Mantell, Ph.D suggests that using lesser successes you know you can accomplish. Remember, everyone who’s accomplished something you want to achieve did it slowly, over time.
Empathy
Your emotions are only one half of all your relationships. It’s the half you focus on the most, sure, but that’s only because you hang out with yourself every day. All the other people that matter to you have their own set of feelings, desires, triggers, and fears. Empathy is your most important skill for navigating your relationships.
Empathy is a life-long skill, but here are some tips you can use to practice empathy:
Shut up and listen: We’re gonna start with the hardest one here, because it’s the most important. You can’t experience everyone else’s lives to fully understand them, but you can listen. Listening involves letting someone else talk and then not countering what they say. It means putting aside your preconceptions or skepticism for a bit and allowing the person you’re talking to a chance to explain how they feel. Empathy is hard, but virtually every relationship you have can be improved at least marginally by waiting at least an extra ten seconds before you retake the conversation.
Take up a contrary position to your own: One of the quickest ways to solidify an opinion in your mind is to argue in favor of it. To counter this, take up a contrary position. If you think your boss is being unreasonable, try defending their actions in your head. Would you find their actions reasonable if you were in their shoes? Even asking the questions of yourself can be enough to start empathizing with another’s point of view (though, of course, getting real answers from others can always help).
Don’t just know, try to understand: Understanding is key to having empathy. As we’ve discussed before, understanding is the difference between knowing something and truly empathizing with it. If you catch yourself saying, “I know, but,” a lot, take that as an indicator that you should pause a bit more. When someone tells you about an experience that’s not your own, take some time to mull over how your life might be different if you experienced that on a daily basis. Read about it until it clicks. It’s okay if you don’t spend all your time devoted to someone else’s life, but putting in just some time—even if it’s idle thought time while you work - can be beneficial.
By definition, empathy means getting in the emotional dirt with someone else. Allowing their experiences to resonate with your own and responding appropriately. It’s okay to offer advice or optimism, but empathy also requires that you wait for the right space to do that. If someone’s on the verge of tears, or sharing some deep pain, don’t make light of it and don’t try to minimize the hurt. Be mindful of how they must feel and allow them space to feel it.
Social Skills
Summing up all social skills in one section of an article would do about as much justice to the topic as if we snuck in a brief explainer on astrophysics. However, the tools you develop in the other four areas will help you resolve a lot of social problems that many adults still wrestle with. As Goleman explains, your social skills affect everything from your work performance to your romantic life:
"Social competence takes many forms – it’s more than just being chatty. These abilities range from being able to tune into another person’s feelings and understand how they think about things, to being a great collaborator and team player, to expertise at negotiation.
All these skills are learned in life. We can improve on any of them we care about, but it takes time, effort, and perseverance. It helps to have a model, someone who embodies the skill we want to improve. But we also need to practice whenever a naturally occurring opportunity arises – and it may be listening to a teenager, not just a moment at work."
You can start with the most common form of social problems: resolving a disagreement. This is where you get to put all your skills to the test in a real-world environment.
We’ve gone into this subject in-depth here , but we can summarize the basic steps:
Identify and deal with your emotions: Whenever you have an argument with someone else, things can get heated. If someone involved is emotionally worked up, deal with that problem first. Take time apart to vent, blow off steam on your own, then return to the problem. In a work environment, this may just mean complaining to a friend before you email your boss back. In a romantic relationship, remind your partner that you care about them before criticizing.
Address legitimate problems once you’re both calm: Once you’re in your right headspace, identify what the conflict is. Before you jump to solutions, make sure you and the other person agree on what the problems really are. Propose solutions that are mutually beneficial and be sympathetic to any concessions the other person may be unwilling to make (but be sure to stand firm on your own).
End on a cooperative note: Whether in business or pleasure, relationships work best when everyone involved knows that they’re on the same page. Even if you can’t end on a positive note, make sure that the last intention you communicate is a cooperative one. Let your boss/coworker/significant other know that you want to work towards the same goal, even if you have different views.
Disputes are best resolved when you know what you want, can communicate it clearly, understand what someone else wants, and come to favorable terms for everyone. If you’ve been paying attention, you’ll notice that this involves every other area of the emotional intelligence model.
Research Shows We Can Heal With Vibration, Frequency & Sound + Which Is Worse: The NSA Or The FDA? February 17 2020 | From: CollectiveEvolution / NoMoreFakeNews / Various
Cymatics is a very interesting topic. It illustrates how sound frequencies move through a particular medium such as water, air, or sand and as a result directly alter physical matter.
There are a number of pictures all over the internet as well as youtube videos that demonstrate how matter (particles) adjust to different sounds and different frequencies of sound.
When it comes to ancient knowledge, sound, frequency and vibration have always been perceived as powerful forces that can influence and alter life all the way down to the cellular level.
Sound healing methods are often used by Shamans, who employ drums and singing to access trance states. Research has even demonstrated that drumming and singing can can be used to slow fatal brain disease, and it can generate a sense of oneness with the universe.
In Brief:
The Facts: Multiple studies and examples have shown how sound, frequency and vibration can literally alter physical material matter. Research has also shown that sound, frequencies and vibration can be used as a significant healing method for various ailments.
Reflect On: How plausible would it be for these interventions to become a regular part of therapy, just as much as pharmaceutical drugs are now?
Sound therapy is getting more popular, and it can have many medical applications, especially within the psychological and mental health realms.
Sound, frequency and vibration are used all throughout the animal kingdom, and there are many examples. If we look at the wasp, they use antennal drumming to alter the caste development or phenotype of their larvae.
Conventional thinking has held for quite some time that differential nutrition alone can explain why one larvae develops into a non-reproductive worker and one into a reproductive female (gyne). However, this is not the case, according to a 2011 study:
"But nutrition level alone cannot explain how the first few females to be produced in a colony develop rapidly yet have small body sizes and worker phenotypes.
Here, we provide evidence that a mechanical signal biases caste toward a worker phenotype. In Polistes fuscatus, the signal takes the form of antennal drumming (AD), wherein a female trills her antennae synchronously on the rims of nest cells while feeding prey-liquid to larvae.
The frequency of AD occurrence is high early in the colony cycle, when larvae destined to become workers are being reared, and low late in the cycle, when gynes are being reared.
Subjecting gyne-destined brood to simulated AD-frequency vibrations caused them to emerge as adults with reduced fat stores, a worker trait.
This suggests that AD influences the larval developmental trajectory by inhibiting a physiological element that is necessary to trigger diapause, a gyne trait.”
This finding indicates that the acoustic signals produced through drumming within certain species carry biologically meaningful information (literally: ‘to put form into’) that operate epigenetically (i.e. working outside or above the genome to affect gene expression).
Pretty fascinating, isn’t it? Like many other ancient lines of thought, this has been backed by modern day scientific research.
Another example comes from cancer research. In his Tedx talk, “Shattering Cancer with Resonant Frequencies,” Associate Professor and Director of Music at Skidmore College, Anthony Holland, tells the audience that he has a dream.
That dream is to see a future where children no longer have to suffer from the effects of toxic cancer drugs or radiation treatment, and today he and his team believe they have found the answer, and that answer is sound. Holland and his team wondered if they could affect a cell by sending a specific electric signal, much like we do with LCD technology.
After searching the patent database for a device that could accomplish this, they came across a therapeutic device invented by New Mexico physician Dr. James Bare.
The device uses a plasma antenna that pulses on and off, which, as Holland explains, is important because a constant pulse of electricity would produce too much heat and therefore destroy the cell.
For the next 15 months, Holland and his team searched for the exact frequency that would directly shatter a living microorganism.
The magic number finally came in the form of two inputs, one high frequency and one low. The high frequency had to be exactly eleven times higher than the low, which in music is known as the 11th harmonic.
At the 11th harmonic, micro organisms begin to shatter like crystal glass.
After consistently practicing until they became efficient at the procedure, Holland began working with a team of cancer researchers in an attempt to destroy targeted cancer cells.
First they looked at pancreatic cancer cells, eventually discovering these cells were specifically vulnerable between 100,000 - 300,000 Hz.
Next they moved onto leukemia cells, and they were able to shatter the leukemia cells before they could divide. But, as Holland explains in his talk, he needed bigger stats in order to make the treatment a viable option for cancer patients.
In repeated and controlled experiments, the frequencies, known as oscillating pulsed electric field (OPEF) technology, killed an average of 25% to 40% of leukemia cells, going as high as 60% in some cases. Furthermore, the intervention even slowed cancer cell growth rates up to 65%.
You can read more about the story, find sources, and watch that TEDx talk here.
Another example occurred in 1981, when biologist Helene Grimal partnered with composer Fabien Maman to study the relationship of sound waves to living cells.
For 18 months, the pair worked with the effects of 30-40 decibel sounds on human cells. With a camera mounted on a microscope, the researchers observed uterine cancer cells exposed to different acoustic instruments (guitar, gong, xylophone) as well as the human voice for 20-minute sessions.
They discovered that, when exposed to sound, cancer cells lost structural integrity until they exploded at the 14-minute mark. Far more dramatic was the sound of a human voice - the cells were destroyed at the nine-minute mark.
After this, they decided to work with two women with breast cancer. For one month, both of the women gave three-and-a-half-hours a day to “toning” or singing the scale.
Apparently, the woman’s tumor became undetectable, and the other woman underwent surgery. Her surgeon reported that her tumor had shrunk dramatically and “dried up.” It was removed and the woman had a complete recovery and remission.
These are only a few out of multiple examples that are floating around out there.
Let’s not forget about when Royal Rife first identified the human cancer virus using the world’s most powerful microscope. After identifying and isolating the virus, he decided to culture it on salted pork.
At the time this was a very good method for culturing a virus. He then took the culture and injected it into 400 rats, which, as you might expect, created cancer in all 400 rats very quickly.
The next step for Rife was where things took an interesting turn. He later found a frequency of electromagnetic energy that would cause the cancer virus to diminish completely when entered into the energy field.
A 2014 study published in the Journal of Huntington’s Disease found that two months of drumming intervention in Huntington’s patients (considered an irreversible, lethal neurodegenerative disease) resulted in “improvements in executive function and changes in white matter microstructure, notably in the genu of the corpus callosum that connects prefrontal cortices of both hemispheres.”
The study authors concluded that the pilot study provided novel preliminary evidence that drumming (or related targeted behavioral stimulation) may result in “cognitive enhancement and improvements in callosal white matter microstructure.”
A 2011 Finnish study observed that stroke patients who were given access to music as cognitive therapy had improved recovery.
Other research has shown that patients suffering from loss of speech due to brain injury or stroke regain it more quickly by learning to sing before trying to speak.
The phenomenon of music facilitating healing in the brain after a stroke is called the “Kenny Rogers Effect.”
A 2012 study published in Evolutionary Psychology found that active performance of music (singing, dancing and drumming) triggered endorphin release (measured by post-activity increases in pain tolerance), whereas merely listening to music did not.
The researchers hypothesized that this may contribute to community bonding in activities involving dance and music-making.
According to a study published by the National Institute of Health, “Music effectively reduces anxiety for medical and surgical patients and often reduces surgical and chronic pain. [Also,] Providing music to caregivers may be a strategy to improve empathy, compassion, and care.”
In other words, music is not only good for patients, it’s good for those who care for them as well.
Below is an interesting interview with Dr. Bruce Lipton. You can view his curriculum vitae here.
What About The Mind?
A few years ago, these scientists held an International Summit on Post-Materialist Science, and created a manifesto to explain its significance.
The scientists involved were Mario Beauregard, PhD (University of Arizona), Gary E. Schwartz, PhD (University of Arizona), and Lisa Miller, PhD (Columbia University), in collaboration with Larry Dossey, MD, Alexander Moreira-Almeida, MD, PhD, Marilyn Schlitz, PhD, Rupert Sheldrake, PhD, and Charles Tart, PhD.
There are hundreds of published peer-reviewed publications showing statistically significant results for this type of science, yet unfortunately, it is still shunned by mainstream academia, even though so many mainstream academic scientists support it. What is going on here?
The idea that the mind affects physical material reality is not trivial, and it’s been demonstrated repeatedly with statistically significant results through fascinating research undertaken by government programs, places like the Institute of Noetic Sciences (founded by Dr. Edgar Mitchell), and, in more recent developments, the group of internationally recognized scientists mentioned above.
Many studies have been conducted in these realms as well. Let’s look at water.
Experiments over the past four decades have investigated whether human intention alone can affect the properties of water. This question has been of interest to alternative medicine research, because the human body is made up of approximately 70% water.
Interest in this topic has been rekindled recently by multiple researchers suggesting that intentionally influenced water can be detected by examining ice crystals formed from samples of that water.
Scientists have hypothesized and shown that water influenced by intention can indeed influence the physical formation of the ice crystals that water produces.
Consistent results commonly point to the idea that positive intentions tend to produce symmetric, well-formed, aesthetically pleasing crystals, and negative intentions tend to produce asymmetric, poorly formed, and unattractive crystals.
Dean Radin, the Chief Scientist at the Institute of Noetic Sciences, along with Masaru Emoto, Takashige Kizu, and Nancy Lund, designed an experiment that tested this hypothesis.
"Over three days, 1,900 people in Austria and Germany focused their intentions towards water samples located inside an electromagnetically shielded room in California.
Water samples located near the target water, but unknown to the people providing intentions, acted as ‘‘proximal’’ controls.
Other samples located outside the shielded room acted as distant controls. Ice drops formed from samples of water in the different treatment conditions were photographed by a technician, each image was assessed for aesthetic beauty by over 2,500 independent judges, and the resulting data were analyzed, all by individuals blind with respect to the underlying treatment conditions.
Results suggested that crystal images in the intentionally treated condition were rated as aesthetically more beautiful than proximal control crystals (p < 0.03, one-tailed). This outcome replicates the results of an earlier pilot test.”
The information presented in this article isn’t even the tip of the iceberg when it comes the the medical applications of sound, frequency and vibration, which are all obviously correlated.
One thing is clear, however, which is that there are many more methods out there, like the ones discussed in this article, that should be taken more seriously and given more attention from the medical establishment.
It seems all mainstream medicine is concerned about is making money and developing medications that don’t seem to be representative of our fullest potential to heal.
“Alternative” therapies shouldn’t be labelled as alternative, they should be incorporated into the norm.
As my readers know, I’ve reported on a number of scandals concerning the toxicity of medical drugs, including shocking death numbers in the US.
These scandals are leaks from inside the National Security State.
If you visit Wikileaks, Cryptome, Public Intelligence, and other similar sites, how many purely medical documents do you find posted? How many damaging leaks exposing the crimes of the medical cartel do you find?
Very, very few.
Where are the medical insiders who are liberating and passing along incriminating documentary evidence?
Some of the best exposers of political, intelligence-agency, and military crimes are way behind the curve, when it comes to medical matters.
The medical sphere, for various reasons, is far better protected than any other segment of society.
For the hundredth time, let me cite Dr. Barbara Starfield’s stunning review, “Is US health really the best in the world?” published on July 26, 2000, in the Journal of the American Medical Association.
Starfield, at the time, was working as a highly respected public health expert, at the Johns Hopkins School of Public Health.
She concluded that the US medical system kills 225,000 Americans a year. That would add up to 2.25 million deaths per decade.
Laid directly at the door of the American medical complex. 106,000 of those annual deaths, as Starfield reports, are the direct result of medical drugs.
Aside from the genocidal death toll, Starfield’s findings also imply massive fraud in all medical journals that routinely publish glowing results of clinical trials of drugs.
Such trials open the door to the marketing of drugs that kill, according to Starfield, 106,000 Americans every year. How is this possible unless deep, continuing, and abetted research fraud are the order of the day?
Indeed, Dr. Marcia Angell, the editor of New England Journal of Medicine for 20 years, wrote the following:
"It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines.
I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine.”
In March 2015, the Australian National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) published an Information Paper on homeopathy, commonly referred to as ‘The Australian Report’, essentially declaring homeopathy to be no better than placebo.
This document concludes that “…there are no health conditions for which there is reliable evidence that homeopathy is effective”.
This report triggered headlines around the world falsely suggesting NHMRC had found that homeopathy doesn’t work for any condition.
However, it wasn’t until after the report had been released, and headlines generated, that the alarming flaws in NHMRC’s approach to the Homeopathy review were brought to light. The most serious scientific breach… NHMRC did the review twice, only publishing their second attempt...
The FDA, of course, is the single government agency responsible for certifying drugs as safe and effective, before their public release is permitted. Yet the FDA takes absolutely no responsibility for the deaths.
Can you imagine the feeding frenzy, if, say, some leaker in the Pentagon passed along a political / military document to Wikileaks that showed the Dept. of Defense was poisoning to death, like clockwork, a hundred thousand of its own soldiers every year?
Let’s stop this insane nonsense of separating one whole set of government crimes from another, simply because the propagandized priests in the white coats are above reproach.
We’re not living in 1950 anymore, and this isn’t Kansas.
In 1988, when I was writing my first book, AIDS INC., I stated that medical covert ops are the most successful methods for pacifying, debilitating, and controlling populations, through toxification, because these ops fly the flag of political neutrality.
They appear to favor no king, dictator, president, government administration or partisan position.
Their propaganda is all about healing and helping.
In fact, the medical cartel is, in the long run, the most effective branch of political repression, from one end of the planet to the other.
It favors top-down control by those in power, whoever they are, whatever they claim to stand for.
Consider this: when Ed Snowden released NSA documents that showed the extent of government surveillance on populations, no one from the intelligence establishment made a serious case that Snowden’s revelations were false.
Instead, they attacked Snowden for exposing “methods” of “the war on terror.”
However, in the medical arena, leakers would be afraid that doctors, medical bureaucrats, public health agencies, government leaders, drug-company fronts, and major media outlets would, all at once, deny the validity and truth of the leaks - despite the fact that the truth is there for all to see.
In other words, the best protected cartel in the world - medical - would act in a far more Orwellian fashion. It would say: the truth is not the truth, the facts are not the facts, 2 and 2 do not equal 4 - and the cartel would get away with doing that.
This is the kind of clout we’re talking about when it comes to medical matters.
Over the years, I’ve alerted mainstream reporters to the Starfield review, cited above, and other confirming published studies that reveal the horrific extent of medical destruction.
Those reporters who bothered to get back to me issued blanket denials. They essentially said, “Yes, I see the evidence and the facts, but the facts aren’t facts. What’s happening isn’t happening.”
Now we’re talking about some heavy brainwashing.
By comparison, it makes the quality of the scandal around Snowden seem like a Sunday lunch in the park.
A few years ago, I had one reporter, who exposes political leaks, tell me: “I don’t mess with medical stuff. It would ruin my credibility.”
Indeed. Another indication of how powerful the medical apparatus is.
Recently, the Washington Post highlighted a new study that puts “medical errors” as the 3rd leading cause of death in America. There hasn’t been any significant follow-up. There hasn’t been an explosion of outrage. So even when exposure occurs, the brainwashing factor is so strong it makes no difference. It’s just another ho-hum day in the news business.
That’s mind control par excellence. That’s tremendous protection of criminals.
That’s like a crime boss saying, “Yeah, I kill 225,000 people every year, but it’s an accident” - and nothing happens.
He goes his merry way, and everyone praises him as a humanitarian.
There is a wide misperception that chlorine dioxide is the same thing as chlorine.
Chlorine reacts with organic matter to produce very toxic metabolites, but chlorine dioxide does not. Sodium chloride is another chlorine-containing molecule that can be toxic in large amounts - but it is essential for health and it is commonly known by the more familiar name of table salt.
Chlorine dioxide mainly reacts with sulfur-containing organic matter, and oxidizes the sulfur in them. This can be very beneficial in promoting the synthesis of sulfate.
Sulfate deficiency is a key factor in autism, and is probably caused by glyphosate. Chlorine dioxide enables the macrophages to produce hypochlorite which they commonly use to kill pathogens.
Chlorine dioxide, while not as effective as chlorine, can also break down glyphosate. While high doses of chlorine dioxide could be damaging because it is an oxidizing agent, I believe that in low doses it is very safe, certainly much safer than many of the prescription drugs that are currently being used to treat autism symptoms.
Talk about inventing and selling false reality. This one is at the top of the charts, and it stays there.
I could stop here, but I’m going to take this one step further, because, as you can see, I’m talking about mind control. So here is the vital add-on:
From the dawn of history, humans have been particularly vulnerable to statements, from “selfless altruists,” about being saved, being rescued, being given gifts from above. And behind those statements, when there is an organization involved, a top-down organization, the threat level rises considerably.
Leaders have always recognized that if they match their pronouncements and assurances with the population’s unflagging hope of being saved, they, the leaders, win. They win big.
Even in societies where overt human sacrifice was practiced, the cover story involved some kind of healing and rescue. The good gods would see the sacrifices and intervene to produce “better days.” Better life for all.
This is what was sold, and this was what was bought. For many people, the times have not changed. Make them a promise of medical rescue, and they’re in. They’re floating in a hopeful trance.
A hypnotic induction has been performed, and it works.
The controlled subject responds with gratitude. At that point, you can engage in complete contradictions, rank absurdities, and doublespeak. The trance will hold.
As my old research collaborator, hypnotherapist Jack True, once told me in an interview, “People want dreams. When they lose faith in their own ability to dream about the life they want, they’ll accept someone else dreaming for them.
That’s what hypnosis is. Someone else dreaming for you. You accept a substitute. That’s mind control. That’s believing you can live in someone else’s creation forever…”
If I were the head of an institution of higher learning, I would engrave that quote above the gates, and I would build a four-year course that explores the implications of the quote in every dimension of human existence.
The medical cartel is the best-protected organization on the planet.
The Toronto Protocols February 16 2020 | From: RightEdition / HeartOfEurope / Various
From the International Free Press Agency “Intelligence Report” by Serge Monast (1995).
The debate about the existence of a master plan for the economic, cultural and political unification of the world and the radical transformation of societies has been going on for decades.
Even though the mainstream media consistently regards these assumptions as conspiration theories, videos and posts about secret organizations, their meetings and the establishment of a united “One World” reach millions of viewers on YouTube and other social networks.
The origin of the so called “Toronto Protocols” - which were published 20 years ago - is still not clear, but the bare content of the document seems to be certified by the elapsed time.
The document running under the name “Toronto Protocols” was published by a French-Canadian journalist, Serge Monastin May, 1995.
There is little accessible information about Monast - who was born in 1945 - but what we do know about him was amassed in a post by “Konteó blog” in 2012. Monast started off as a poet and writer, but from the second half of the ‘80s he became interested in investigative journalism.
End of June 1967: in Montreal there is Expo 67; in Ottawa, there are the final preparations for the “Centenary of the Confederation”; in the U.S it is the challenge of the Vietnam War and, through the country, the “Flower Power”.
We are close to the events of May 1968 in France, the explosion of nationalism in Quebec, the Woodstock Festival in the U.S. But at the same time, the end of June 1967 marks the final preparations for the development of the Plan of the “Fall of Nations” by the highest levels of Anglo-Saxon Freemasonry in Toronto (Canada).
This secret meeting, highly “Confidential”, is organized by the “6.6.6.” (so they call themselves), i.e. those who run the 6 largest banks in the world, the 6 largest energy consortia on the planet (including the oil part), and the 6 largest consortia of agri-food (which includes the control of the main Food Roads of the World).
These 6.6.6., being the most senior international financiers, will define, within their meeting, a “Common Strategy” for absolute control over “World Trade”; on the possession of the Energy Weapon (the open gateway of the twenty-first century); and the international control of the food (which also includes, for them, the pharmaceutical companies which include, in turn, the global market for “Vitamins” and “vaccines”).
Their “plan” boils down to three major themes: The Economic, the Political, and the Social Policy for the 70’s and 80’s. If successful, it must inevitably lead to the capture of “Global Power” by implementing the “New World Order”, the same which U.S President George Bush will do much to promote in the early 90s.
The Title of the Document of the 6.6.6: “PANEM and circuses” (From Bread and Circus Games) [i.e. an old Roman phrase to describe how the Emperors used to entertain and feed the masses so that they would be distracted from taking an interest in politics].
Bread and Circus, Medication and Conditioning, Omission and Denial
This is Big Sports and Entertainment have been designed to keep the masses appeased so they don’t have time to become concerned about how the Establishment is ripping them off at every level nor any inclination to be motivated to stop them from doing so.
And it's not a new trick but a variation on a theme developed by the elit in Roman times.
This is where the great schism lies. The awake and aware have snapped out of the control system. Those who haven't are being tooled around like puppets on a million nano strings. When you don't know, you don't know that you don't know...and are very easy to keep being fooled.
When you've woken up, the world is completely reversed from everything you were told and believed before. You now know that you now know! And everything rights itself and all is clear.
It takes some cobweb clearing to get a handle on the real picture but it happens, and in a relative hurry.
Truth not only defends itself, but drives itself.
The Romans came up with the idea that if you keep the people fed, watered and entertained - distracted - the 'elite' can get away with anything, behind the scenes. Today we have professional sports hysteria, mass media movies, mindless reality TV and music filling that role nicely, while subconsciously programming the masses with the themes and thoughtforms the elite decide on to further their agendas
"Bread and circuses"(or bread and games; from Latin: panem et circenses) is metonymic for a superficial means of appeasement. In the case of politics, the phrase is used to describe the generation of public approval, not through exemplary or excellent public service or public policy, but through diversion; distraction; or the mere satisfaction of the immediate, shallow requirements of a populace, as an offered "palliative."
Its originator, Juvenal, used the phrase to decry the selfishness of common people and their neglect of wider concerns. The phrase also implies the erosion or ignorance of civic duty amongst the concerns of the commoner.
Much of the violence and filth we have to live with can be directly attributed to this powerful mind-kontrol system which operates by the power of 60 HZ conditioned susceptibility, hypnosis for many. Hollywood superstars are paid big money because what they do is important to the Establishment Hierarchy, in terms of mind-kontrolling the masses and much of the world.
How do they maintain this illusion? Mental conditioning is the name of the game for the designers and propagators of the matrix.
Globalist Project Goal: The “Vital Genocide for the Benefit of the Hidden Profit”. Project Financing Means: Among other things, use of Humanitarian Aid, International Food Aid to fund the “Multinationals” of the 6.6.6.
-- The Document: Bread and Circus 1967
[all the historic periods having led to the decline of civilizations were quite marked, without exception, by “the Spirit of the Wandering people”.
Today, we have to make so that this “Spirit” is translated by a “World Society of the Leisure” under all its forms. This “Leisure” has to consist of the [Sex], of the [Drugs], of the [Sport], of the [Travel / Exoctism], and [Leisure activities] in general, but accessible to all the sectors of society.
The Man has to manage to believe that it is “Modern”, and that his modernity consists of his capacity, and his possibility of being able to enjoy much, and now all which surrounds him.
To achieve this objective it is imperative to be able to infiltrate the Medias (radio, television, newspapers), settings of “Fashion” and “Culture” (circles of New Music) by which we will influence, for sure all the layers of Western Societies.
Thus taking under the control of the “Senses” the youth (tomorrow’s adults), we will have consequently the way clear for infiltrating and transform in depth without being disturbed, the Politics, and the Legal System and the Education and thus allowing us to radically change the course, the future direction of Societies covered by our “Plan”.
The populations, we know it, do not have any historical memory. They tirelessly repeat mistakes of the past without realizing that these mistakes had driven their forefathers before them, to the same forfeitures as they will live for the worse before the end of this century.
See, for example, that their grandfathers had lived at the beginning of this century thanks to the relentless work of our predecessors.
After having experienced, without limitation, the liberation of the morals, the abolition of the morality (in other words, the wandering of the spirit), they experienced the “Economic Crisis” and then the “War”.
Today, their grandchildren and their children will go straight to an outcome similar, even worse because this time, he will finally allow us to establish our “New World Order” but none of them are able to realize this, they will all be too preoccupied to excessively satisy their most primary sensual needs.
A “standard” generally more important, and that has already proven itself at the beginning of this century in the construction and implementation of the [Communist system] by the late-lamented Senior Officers of our lodges is the profitability of “the Exception”.
In principle, we know the Exception proves the General rule that is contrary to it. But in our vocabulary, it is the Exception that should be imposed to all.
We need to make sure to make “Exceptions” in different spheres of the Society, as being new “Rules” applicable to all conditions, a primary objective of all the future social protests carried out by the Nations Youth.
Thus exception will become the fuse by which all the historical society will collapse on itself in shortness of breath and an unprecedented confusion.
The foundations of the “Western Society”in their essence, originate in a straight line from the Judeo-Christian heritage. It is precisely this same heritage which made of “Family”, the “Node”, the “Cornerstone” of all existing social structure.
Our predecessors who had financed the revolutionary writers of the late nineteenth century and early twentieth century had understood the importance to divide, then to shatter the “vital Nucleus” if they wanted to, in Russia, to succeed in setting up the new “Communist System” at that time.
And that is precisely what they did by making meticulously produced by nonconformist philosophers and writers at the time: “A Manifesto to the glory of the God-State”, which shall have the absolute priority on the individual, on the “Family”.
To end with certainty in the construction of a World Government, [ A New Community World Order] where all the individuals, without exception, will be subjected to the “World State” of the “New Order”, we have to, first of all, remove the “Family” (what will entail, at the same moment, the disappearance of the ancestral religious teachings), and in the second place, level all the individuals by removing “Social classes”, in particular, “Middle classes”.
But we have to proceed in such a way that all these changes appear as arising from the popular will; that they have the appearance of the “Democracy”.
In using isolated cases, but amplifying them to the extreme with the help of student protests infiltrated by us, journalists favorable to our cause and politicians purchased, we will be able to put in place new organizations having all the appearances of the “Modernity” as an “Office of Child Protection” protected by a “Charter of Rights and Freedoms”.
For the success of our “World Plan: [The Red Plan]”, it is necessary us to make implant in all the Western Societies of the 70’s, “Offices for the Protection of Children” among which the officials (of young intellectuals without experience, freshly out of Universities where are highlighted our internationalist principles), will comply literally, without proper judgment, the “Charter of the Rights of the Child”.
Who will dare to oppose this without being identified at the same time with the barbarians of the Middle Ages?
This “Charter” painstakingly developed in our “Lodges”, we will finally eliminate any parental authority in the family by shattering people fiercely opposed to one another for the protection of their personal interests.
It will encourage children to denounce parents very authoritarian because too traditional, too religious. It will contribute thus to subjecting parents to a “Collective Psychosis of Fear”, which inevitably will cause, in a general way in society, a relaxation of parental authority.
Thus we shall have succeeded in the first instance, to produce a society similar to that of Russia of the 50’s where the children denounced their parents to the State, and this without anyone noticing.
Thereby transferring to the State the “Parental Role”, it will be much easier thereafter, of us to monopolize, one by one, all the responsibilities that had been, until to date, the exclusive responsibility of the parents.
This is how we can make be considered by all as an abuse against children, the traditional religious education of the Judeo-Christian origin.
In the same time, but at another level, we shall make register in the highest Laws of the Nations, than all the Religions, the Worship and the religious Practices of any kind, including the “Witchcraft and the Magic” must all be respected in the same way as the others.
This will then be of a disconcerting ease than to transfer this role of the state in relation to the child to the highest international bodies such as the United Nations.
Understand this well: “Our goal is not to protect children, or anyone from another, but to cause the collapse and subsequent fall of Nations which are a major obstacle to the implementation of our “New World Order”.
That is why the “Office of Child Protection” must be invested with absolute legal authority. They must be able, as they see fit, but always under the pretext of protecting the child, to remove them from their original home environments and place them in family backgrounds or foreign government centres that have been established for our internationalist principles and religions.
Therefore, it will complete the final breaking of the “Western Family Unit”. For without the protection and monitoring of their original parents, these children will be permanently handicapped in their psychological and moral development, and consequently represent natural prey, easily adaptable to our global aspirations.
For guaranteed success of such an enterprise, it is essential that civil servants working in these “offices” in the service of the State, are young, without past experience imbued with theories which we know empty and ineffective, and especially should be obsessed with the missionary spirit of the great protectors of children at risk.
Because for them all parents must represent as potential criminals, potential hazards to the welfare of the child here considered to be a “God”.
An “Office of Child Protection” and “Bill of Rights of the Child” have no reason to be without children at risk. In addition, the exceptions and the historical examples used for their implementation eventually sooner or later up disappearing if they were not constantly fed with new cases occurring on an ongoing basis.
In this sense, we must infiltrate the “Education System” of the Nations in order to make disappear under the cover of “Modernity” and “Evolution”, the teaching of Religion, History and Good Manners while diluting at the same time, under an avalanche of new experiments in the milieu of the Education, that of the language and mathematics.
In this way, by removing from the younger generations, any basis and any moral boundary, all knowledge of the past (and therefore any national pride), so all respect for others, all the power and knowledge of the language of science (and thus reality), we will help build a youth largely disposed to all forms of crime.
In this new universe fragmented by the fear of parents, and their abandonment of all responsibility regarding their children, we will have a clear path to form in our own way and according to our primary objectives, a youth where arrogance, contempt, humiliation of others will be considered as a new basis of “Affirmation of Self” and “Freedom”.
But we know from past experience even, that a similar youth is already doomed to self-destruction because this is fundamentally “individualistic”, so an “Anarchist” by definition. In this sense, it can not possibly represent a solid basis for the continuity of any society whatsoever, and even less a sure value for the care of its elderly.
In the same vein, it is also imperative to create a “Charter of Rights and Individual Freedom” and the “Office of Citizen Protection” by dangling to the masses, that these innovations are part of the:
“Modernity” of the “New Societies” of the Twentieth Century
In the same manner and at the same time, but at another level, to pass new laws for the “Respect and Individual Freedom”.
As in the case of the “Family”, but on the level of the “Society”, these laws will come into conflict with the rights of the Community, thereby leading the societies mentioned, right to their self-destruction.
Because here, the inversion is complete: “It is no longer society (the right of the majority) that must be protected against individuals that can threaten, but rather (the Right of the Individual) which needs to be protected against the potential threats of the majority”. This is the goal that we set.
To complete the breakdown of the family, the education system, thus the society in general, it is essential to encourage the “Sexual Freedom” at all levels of the Western Society.
It is necessary to reduce the individual, therefore the masses, to the obsession of satisfying their primal instincts by all possible means.
We know that this step represents the culmination by which any society will eventually collapse on itself. Had it not been so in the Roman Empire at its height, and similar to all civilizations throughout history?
By men of Science and the laboratories funded by our Lodges, we have managed to develop a chemical process that will revolutionize all the Western Societies, and relegate to oblivion forever, moral principles and religious Judeo-Christians.
This process, in pill form, will open the way wide to the “Sexual Freedom” without consequences, and push the “Women” of the Nations to want to break with what will then be perceived as the yoke of the past (the slavery of women subjected to men and the traditional Judeo-Christian family).
Formerly “Centre and pivot of the family unit”, the modern woman, now as an independent individual, wants to break with its traditional role, break away from the family and lead her life according to their own personal aspirations.
Nothing more natural, we know, but where we will intervene strongly, it will be to infiltrate all the new “Feminine Protest movements” by pushing their logic to its extreme limits of consequence.
And these limits can be found already registered in the definitive breakdown of the traditional family and Judeo-Christian Society.
This “Sexual liberation” will be the ultimate means by which it will be possible to us to remove the “Popular Consciousness” any reference to the “Good and to the Evil”.
The collapse of this religious and moral barrier will permit us to finish the process of the false “Liberation of Man’s Past”, but which in reality is a form of slavery that will be profitable to our “Globalists Plans”.
This open door for the encouragement of “sexual freedom” to the “Divorce” to “abortion” on demand to the legal recognition of diverse forms of homosexuality will help us to radically change the historical basis of the “Legal Right” of the Societies.
It be a major asset to push for all of the individuals in a general relaxation of the morals, to divide the individuals as compared against each other, according to their instincts and their own interests, to destroy the future of the youth by pushing the adverse experiences of early sexuality and and the Abortions, and to break morally the future generations by pushing them to alcoholism, different drugs (which our Senior International Lodge Officers will take charge of taking the control at the world level), and in the suicide (that it be considered by a youth disillusioned and abandoned to themself, as being the chivalrous end).
Let us deceive the youth of the Nations by showing him to their parents as being irresponsible, atheistic, immoral; searching, after all, only for the pleasure, for the escape and for the wild satisfaction of their instincts at the price of the lie, the hypocrisy and the treason.
Let us make of the divorce and the abortion a new social custom accepted by all. Thus encouraging him to the criminality under all the forms, and to take refuge in different groups, out of reach of the family environment that it will perceive, inevitably, as being a threat for its own survival.
The social fabric being so upset for ever, it will be possible to us from then on to act on Politics and the Economic of Nations to subject them in our thank you; to come there to accept of strength, our Plans of a New World Order.
Because, it is well necessary to acknowledge, the Nations, deprived that they will be then to be able to count on a strong youth, on a Society where the individuals, grouped around a common ideal, strengthened by indestructible moral ramparts, would have been able to provide its historical support, can only than abdicate to our global will.
Thus we can then inaugurate what was so much announced by our past creations: “The communist system which prophesied a world revolution set into motion by all the rejected of the earth” and “Nazism by which we had announced a New World Order for 1000 years”.
That is our ultimate goal; the work rewarded for all the valorous dead in labor for its accomplishment for centuries. Saying it loud and clear: “All the Brothers of the Lodges passed, died in the anonymity for the realization of this ideal to us is now possible to touch with the fingertips”.
It is well recognized by all that the Man, once after having assured their basic needs (food, clothing and shelter), is much more inclined to be less vigilant.
Let us allow him to lull his conscience while orienting to our way his mind, creating in himself pure piece of favorable economic conditions.
Therefore during this period of 70 years where our agents will infiltrate all over the different spheres of the Society to accept our new standards in Education, Legal Law, Social Policy and we will make sure to spread him around an economic climate of confidence.
Labour for all, the opening of Credit for all; Leisure for all will be our bogie for the illusory creation of a new social class: the “Middle Class”.
Because once our objectives reached, the “Class” in the middle, between the secular poor, and we the rich, we will definitely remove by cutting off all means of survival.
This way, we shall make Nation states, the new “Parents”of the individuals. Through this reliable climate where our “International Agents” will have done what’s necessary to to push aside any spectre of world war, we shall encourage the excessive “Centralization” for the State.
In this way, the individuals can acquire the impression of a total freedom to explore while the legendary burden of personal liabilities will be transferred to the State.
Thus it will be possible to sharply increase the burden of the State by multiplying without any limit body of intellectual public servants. Insured for years in advance of material security, they will be consequently perfect for executors of “Governmental Authority”, in other words, of our “Power”.
Thus creating an impressive body of officials who in itself will form (a Government within the Government), irrespective of the political party that is in power.
This anonymous machine can serve us one day means of leverages when the moment comes to accelerate the economic collapse of the Nation States, because these will not be able indefinitely sustain such mass salaries without having going into debt beyond their means.
On the other hand this same machine will give an image cold and uncaring of the government apparatus, and how this complex machine useless in many of its functions, will serve as a cover and protection against the populations.
For who would dare to venture through the mazes of such a labyrinth in order to assert his personal grievances?
Always during this period of general intoxication, we shall also take advantage of it to buy or eliminate, according to the necessities of the moment, all the company directors, the persons in charge of the major Bodies of State, Centers of Scientific research among which the action and the efficiency would risk to give too much ower to the Nation states.
The State should not absolutely become an independent strength in itself which would risk to escape us, and to put in danger our ancestral “Plans”.
We shall also watch to have an absolute control on all the supranational structures of the Nations. These international Bodies must be placed under our absolute jurisdiction.
In the same sense, and to guarantee the profitability of our influence with the populations, we shall have to control all the News media.
Our Banks will thus see to finance only those who are favorable to us whereas they will oversee the closure of the more recalcitrant. It should go almost unnoticed in principle in the populations, whom they will be absorbed by their need to make more money, and to entertain themselves.
We shall have to take care with finalizing, from now on, the phase of deregionalisation of the rural regions begun at the beginning of the “Economic crisis” of 1929.
Overcrowding the cities was our bedfellow of the “Industrial revolution”. The rural owners, by their economic independence, their capacity to produce the basis of the food supply of the States, is a threat for us, and our future Plans.
Piled up in cities, they will be more dependent on our industries to survive.
We cannot allow ourselves the existence of groups independent from our “Power”. Thus let us eliminate the landowners by making of them obedient slaves of the Industries being under our control.
As for others, let us allow them to get organized in Agricultural Cooperatives that our Agents will infiltrate to direct them better according to our future priorities.
Through the State, let us attempt to highlight well the compulsory “Respect” for the diversity of the “Cultures”, of the “Peoples”, of the “Religions”, of the “Ethnic groups” which are all ways, for us, to convey the “Personal freedom” before the notion of “National Unity”; which will allow us to divide better the populations of Nation Sates, and so to weaken them in their authority, and in their capacity to maneuver.
Pushed to these extreme limits but on the international plan, this concept, in the future, will urge the ethnic groups of the various Nations to group together to claim, individually, each their own part of “Power”; that will finish ruining Nations, and will make them burst in endless wars.
When Nation states will so be weakened by so much infighting, quite established on the recognition of the “rights of Minorities” in their Independence; that the nationalists divided into various cultural and religious factions will oppose blindly in fights without outcome; that the youth will have totally lost contact with its roots; then we can use the United Nations to begin to impose our:
New World Order.
Moreover, at that point, the “Humanitarian, Social and Historical Ideals” of the Nation States will have long since burst under pressure from the internal divisions.
-- End of Document 6.6.6. dated end June 1967.
Eighteen years later, or (6.6.6.) in the time, was held another La Réunion of importance for Canada.
The Group 6.6.6. meets once again in Toronto, at the end of June, 1985, but this time to finalize the last stages that should result, and on the collapse of the Nation States, and on the taking of the International Power by the United Nations.
Globalist Project Goal: ESTABLISHMENT OF THE OCCULT WORLD Means of Financing Project: Control of IMF, GATT, Brussels Committee, NATO, UN and other International Organizations.
“The last eighteen years were very profitable for the progress of our world projects. I can say to you, Brothers, that we touch now almost the goal. The fall of the Nation States is not more than a question of time, relatively short, I have to admit to you confidently”.
Due to our Infiltration Agents and our colossal financial resources, unprecedented progress has now been made in all areas of Science and Technology of which we control the largest corporations financially.
Since secret meetings with M. de Rothchild within the 56 years, which were aimed at finalizing the development and implementation of the World “Computers”, it is now possible to foresee the establishment of a kind of “International Highway” where all these machines are interconnected.
Because, as you already know the direct control of individual populations of the planet at the very least would be be totally impossible without the use of computers, electronic and attaching them to each other in a vast “Global Network”.
These machines also have the advantage of replacing millions of people. In addition, they have neither conscience nor any moral, which is essential for the success of a project like ours.
Above all, these machines do, without question, everything is dictated to them. They are perfect slaves which our predecessors have dreamed, but not that they were able to doubt that one day it would be possible to perform such a miracle.
These machines without country, without color, without religion, without political affiliation, are the ultimate fulfillment of our tool and the New World Order. They are the “Cornerstone”!
The organization of these machines in a vast “World Network” the superior levers of which we shall control, will serve us to immobilize the populations. How?
As you know, the basic structure of our New World Order consists, in its essence, of a multitude of diverse “Networks” each covering all the spheres of the human activity on the whole of the planet.
Until this day, all these “Networks” were interconnected by a common ideological base: that of the Man as being the “Center” and the “Ultimate Fulfillment” of the Universe.
So, thanks to all these “Networks” united by the link of the “New Religion of Man for Man”, we were easily able to infiltrate all the human sectors in all the Western countries, and to modify the “Judeo - Christian” base.
The result is that today, this Man, that it is a part of Politics, of the Economic, the Social, the Education, of the Scientific or of the Religous, already has, since our last La Réunion of the end of June, 67, abandoned his past inheritance to replacing it by our ideal of a World religion based only on the Man.
Cut off than he is from now on from his historical roots, this Man does not wait any more, in the end, as he is proposed a new ideology. This, properly understood, is ours, that of the “Global Village Community”, which will be the “Centre”.
And that is precisely what we will give him, encouraging him to take part, “Body and Soul”, in this “Global Electronic Network” where the borders of nation-states have been forever abolished, wiped out up to their deepest roots.
While this misled man will be absorbed by his blind enthusiasm to be a part of its new “World Community” by being a part of this vast “Network of Computers”, for our account, we shall see, from the superior levers which will be hidden from him, to file, to identify , to record, and to make profitable according to our own objectives.
Because inside this “New Global Society”, no individual having a potential of “Profitability” for us, cannot escape us. The constant contribution of the “Electronic Technology” will have to assure us all the means to file, identify, and control all the individuals of the populations of the West.
For those who do not represent “Exploitable Profitability” by ourselves, we will ensure they are eliminated through all the local civil wars that we have taken care to break out here and there through: the work of our servants; and the “Fall of the Economy” of the Nation-States; and the:
“Oppositions and Claims” of Various Groups Within Those States
Here is thus the detailed manner by which we shall proceed before 1998 to pave the road to the birth of our “World Government”.
1. To multiply tenfold the “Society of the Leisure activities” which we have been so profitiable to date. By serving to us as the invention of “Video” that we financed, and games which are connected with it, end up corrupting the morality of the youth.
Let us offer him the possibility of satisfying now all his instincts. A being possessed by his senses and a slave of these, we know it, has neither ideal, nor internal strength to defend whatever it is. He is a “Individualist” by nature, and represents a perfect candidate whom we can model easily according to our desires and our priorities.
Moreover, remember yourselves with which ease our predecessors were able to direct all the German youth at the beginning of the century by means of the disenchantment of the latter!
2. Encourage the “Student Contesting” for all the causes connected with the “Ecology”. The compulsory protection of the latter will be a main advantage when we shall have urged Nation States to exchange their “Internal Debt” for the loss of 33 % of all their territories been left to the wild state.
3. Filling in the interior vacum of this youth by initiating him, from very young sound age, to the universe of Computers. Using that for the educational system. A slave in the service of another slave than we control.
4. On another plan, establishing “International Free Trade” as being a priority absolved for the economic survival of Nation States.This new economic conception will help us to accelerate the decline of the “Nationalists” of all the Nations; to isolate them in diverse factions, and at the deliberate moment, to set them wildly some to the others in civil wars which will finish ruining these Nations.
5. To assure us at all costs of the success of such an enterprise making sure that our Agents already infiltrated in the Ministries of Intergovernmental Affairs and Immigration of Nation States make indepth modifications to the Laws of these Ministries.These modifications will essentially aim at opening the doors of the western countries to a more and more massive immigration inside their borders (immigrations which we shall moreover have provoked by having taking care of touching off, here and there, new local conflicts).
By well orchestrated press campaigns in the public opinion of Nation States targeted, we shall provoke among them a significant refugees’ influx which will have the effect, to destabilize their internal economy, and to make increase the racial tensions inside their territory. We shall see to make so that groups of foreign extremists made part of these immigrants’ influxes; That will facilitate the destabilization.
6. This “Free Trade” which, in reality, is not because it is already controlled by us all at the top of the economic hierarchy, infiltrating it by the “Tri-Lateral Commission”: [that of Asia, America and Europe]. It will bring us the discord inside Nation States by the increase of the unemployment connected with the restructurings of our Multinationals.
7. Shifting slowly, but certainly, our multinationals acquired in new countries to the idea of “the Market economy”, such as the Eastern European countries, in Russia and in China for example. We do not care much, at the moment, if their population represents or not a vast pool of new consumers.
What interests us, is to have access, first of all, to a “Workforce-Slave” (cheap and non-union) which these countries and those of the Third World are offering us. Moreover, are not their governments set up by us? Do they not rely on foreign aid, and in the loans from our “International Monetary Fund” and our “World Bank”?
These transfers offer several advantages for us. They contribute to maintain these new populations in the illusion of a “Economic Liberation”, a “Political Freedom” while in reality, we shall dominate them by the appetite of the earnings and a debt which they can never settle.
As for the Western populations, they shall be maintained in the dream of [Economic Well Being] because the products imported from these countries do not suffer any price increase. By contrast, without them being aware at first, more and more industries will be obliged to close their doors because of the transfers that we will have conducted outside of the Western countries.
These closures will increase unemployment, and will bring major losses in revenue for the Nation States.
8. So we shall set up a “Global Economy” at the world level which will escape totally the control of Nation States. This new economy will be over everything; no political or labor-union pressure can have power over it. It will dictate its own “Global Politics”, and will force a political reorganization, but according to our priorities at the world level.
9. By this ” Independent Economy ” having only Laws as our Laws, we shall establish a “World Mass Culture”.By the international control of the Television, Media, we shall establish a “New Culture”, but levelled, uniform for all, without any future “Creation” avoiding us.
The future artists will be in our image or will not survive. Finished therefore the times when “Independent Cultural Creations ” put at any time in danger our globalist projects, like that was so often the case in past.
10. We will find it then possible to make use of the military forces of the Nation Syates (such as those of the United States) in humanitarian goals. In reality, these “Forces” will be used to submit our control to recalcitrant countries. Thus the Third World countries, and others like them will not be able to escape our desire to use their people as slave labor.
11. To control the world market, we shall have to divert the productivity of its first goal (free the man from the hardness of the work). We shall direct it to turn it against the man by enslaving the latter in our economic system where he will have only the choice to become our slave, and even a future criminal.
12. All these transfers abroad of our Multinationals, and the world reorganization of the economy will, among others, aim at making climb the unemployment in the western countries. This situation will be all the more practicable because at first, we shall have favoured the massive import of basic products inside the Nation States and, at the same moment, we shall have overloaded these States by the exaggerated employment of their population in the production of services which they cannot pay any more.
These extreme conditions will multiply by millions the masses of welfare recipients of all kinds, of illiterates, of homeless persons.
13. By the loss of millions of jobs in the primary sector, from covert evasions of foreign capital out of the Nation States, thus we will find it possible to set in danger of death the social harmony by the specter of civil war.
14. These international manipulations of the governments and the populations of Nation States will supply us the pretext to use our I.M.F to urge the western governments to set up “Budgets of Austerity” under the lid of the imaginary reduction of their “National Debt”; of the hypothetical preservation of their “International Credit rating”; of the impossible conservation of the “Social Peace”.
15. By these “Emergency Budgetary Measures”, we shall so break the financing of Nation States for all their “Mega-Projects” which represent a direct threat to our world control of the economy.
16. Moreover all these austerity measures will allow us to break the national wills of modern structures in the domains of the Energy, the Agriculture, the Transport and the new Technologies.
17. These same measures will offer us the ideal opportunity to establish our “Ideology of Economic Competition”. This will be translated, with the Nation States, by the voluntary reduction of salaries, voluntary departures with [Presentation of Medals for Services rendered]; which will open to us doors to the establishment everywhere of our “Technology of Control”. In this perspective, all these departures will be replaced by “Computers” in our service.
18. These social transformations will help us to change in depth the “Police and Military” workforce of the Nation States. Under the pretext of the necessities of the moment, and without arousing of suspicions, we shall get rid once and for all, all the individuals having a “Judeo-Christian Consciousness”.
This “Restructuring of the Police and Military Bodies” will allow us to dismiss without contesting, the old staff, as well as all the elements not conveying our internationalist principles.
These will be replaced by young recruits devoid of “Consciousness and Morality”, and already quite entrained, and favorable to the mindless use of our “Technology of Electronic Networks”.
19. In the same time, and always under the pretext of “Budgetary Cuts”, we shall ensure the transfer of the military bases of the Nation States towards the United Nations organization.
20. In this perspective, we shall work on the reorganization of the “International Mandate of the United Nations”. From “Peacekeeping Force” without decision-making power, we shall bring it to become a “Rapid Deployment Force” where will be merged, in a unified whole, the armed forces of the Nation states.
This will effectively permit us, without combat, the demilitarization of all these States in a way that none of them, in the future, are not sufficiently powerful (independents) to question our “World Power”.
21. To accelerate this process of transfer, we shall imply the current force of the United Nations in conflicts impossible to sort out. In this way, and by means of the Media which we control, we shall show to the populations the impotence and the uselessness of this “Force” in its current shape.
The helping frustrations, and pushed to its ckimax at the appropriate moment, will push the populations of Nation States to beg the international authorities to form such a “Multinational Force” as soon as possible to protect at all costs the “Peace”.
22. The next appearance of this global willpower of a “Multinational Military Force” will keep pace with the establishment inside the Nation States, a “Multi-Jurisdictional Task force”. This combination of the “Police and Military Staff”, created straight from the pretext of the increase of the growing political and social instability inside these States collapsing under the burden of the economic problems, will allow us to control better the western populations.
Here, the excessive use of the identification and the electronic recording information on the individuals will supply us a complete surveillance of all the intended populations.
23. This interior and exterior police and military reorganization of Nation States will allow the convergence towards the obligation of the implementation of a “Judicial World Center”. This “Center” will allow the various “Police Bodies of Nation States” to have quick access to “Data Banks” on all the potentially dangerous individuals for us on the planet.
The image of a better judicial efficiency, and the more and more narrow links created and maintained with the “Military”, will help us to emphasize the necessity of a “International Court” doubled by a “World Judicial System”; the one for the civil affairs and criminal individuals, and the other one for the Nations.
24. During the growth accepted by all of these new necessities, it will be imperiative for us to complete as soon as possible the world control of firearms inside the territories of Nation States. To do it, we shall accelerate the “ALPHA PLAN” implemented during the 60’s by some of our predecessors.
This “Plan” originally aimed at two objectives which remained the same even today: by the intervention of “Crazy Shooters”, create a climate of insecurity in the populations to bring to a tighter control of firearms. Direct acts of violence so as to make it appear the responsibility of religious extremists, or persons affiliated to religious allegiances of “Traditional” tendency, or still, persons claiming to have priviledged communications with God.
Today, to accelerate the “Control of Firearms”, we can use the “Fall of the Economic Conditions” of the Nation States which will entail with it, a complete Social destabilization; thus increase of the violence. I do not need to remind you, nor to demonstrate to you, Brothers, the foundations of this “Control” of firearms.
Without this one, it would become almost impossible for us to put on their knees the populations of the targeted States. Remember yourselves with which success our predecessors were able to control Germany of 1930 with the new “Laws” applied in the time; laws moreover on which are based the current Laws of Nation States for the same control.
25. The last “Stages” relate in the “OMEGA PHASE” experimented from the experiments made at the beginning of the 70’s. They contain the application, at the world level, “Electro-Magnetic Weapons”.
The “Changes of Climate” entailing the destruction of the harvests; the bankruptcy in these conditions, farmlands; the denaturation, by artificial means of foodstuffs of regular consumption; the poisoning of the nature by an exaggerated and mindless exploitation, and the massive use of chemicals in the agriculture. All this, Brothers, will lead to the ruin assured by the food industries of Nation States.
The future of the “Control of the Populations” of these States passes necessarily by the absolute control, by us, of the food production at the world level, and by the takeover of the main “Food Roads” of the planet.
To do it, it is necessary to use Electro-Magnetics, among others, to destabilize the climates of the most productive States on the agricultural plan. As for the poisoning of the nature, it will be accelerated all the more as the increase of the populations will push it without restriction there.
26. The use of Electro-Magnetic cause “Earthquakes” in the most important industrial areas of the Nation States will contribute to accelerate the “Economic Fall” of the most threatening States for us; as well as to amplify the obligation of the implementation of our New World Order.
27. Who can suspect us? Who can suspect used means? Those who will dare to raise themselves up against us by broadcasting of the information as for the existence and for the contents of our “Plot”, will become suspicious in the eyes of the authorities of their Nation and their population. Thanks to the disinformation, to the lie, to the hypocrisy and to the individualism which we created within the peoples of Nation States, the Man became an Enemy for the Man.
So these “Independent Individuals” who are of the most dangerous for us exactly because of their “Freedom”, will be considered by their fellow men as being enemies and not liberators.
The slavery of the children, the plunder of the wealth of the Third World, the unemployment, the propaganda for the liberation of the drug, the exhaustion of the youth of the Nations, the ideology of the “Respect for the Personal freedom” broadcasted within the Judeo-Christian Churches and inside the Nation States, obscurantism considered as a basis for the pride, the inter-ethnic conflicts, and our last realization:
“Budgetary restrictions”; all this allows us finally to see the ancestral fulfillment of our “Dream”: that of the institution of our “NEW WORLD ORDER”].
The Inherent Problem With Mainstream Education And How It Keeps The World Stuck February 15 2020 | From: CollectiveEvolution
The Oxford dictionary defines education as “the process of receiving or giving systematic instruction, especially at a school or university”, but is it only in academic institutions that we are given systematic instruction on what to believe?
In the news, for example, we are systematically taught all about the world’s problems.
We are of course also told that governments are working to fix them; yet climate change, war, poverty and environmental destruction keep increasing.
Meanwhile, the advertisements in newspapers, on TV, online, and billboards across the world, constantly teach us that we are here to keep buying and consuming.
Consumerism, the message goes, will make us happy and create a healthy economy at the same time; yet mental and physical illness is at epidemic proportions, while the world’s economies are in ever-increasing debt.
The mainstream media, then, also fits this description of education, and we are being educated all the time that our purpose is to earn money, consume, and let those in charge sort out our future. Then we share that message with the people around us, and pass on that information to our children.
Meanwhile, scientists have now set the doomsday clock at 2 minutes to midnight with the growing nuclear threat, climate change, and a lack of trust in political institutions are three main reasons for this decision.
All this leaves us feeling anxious, helpless, even depressed – like there is nothing much we can do.
According to Harvard Medical School, “With headlines warning us of international terrorism, global warming, and economic uncertainty, we’re all likely to be a little more anxious these days.
As an everyday emotion, anxiety - the ‘fight or flight’ response - can be a good thing, prompting us to take extra precautions. But when anxiety persists in the absence of a need to fight or flee, it can not only interfere with our daily lives but also undermine our physical health.”
Studies, they explain, show that prolonged anxiety is linked to the development of chronic respiratory disorders (such as asthma), gastrointestinal disorders (such as IBS), migraines, and even heart disease.
In his 2013 Tedx talk, clinical psychologist Dr. Stephen Llardi presents his findings that by the time today’s youngest Americans are in their mid-twenties, 25% will be depressed, explaining:
"For many Americans, Europeans and people throughout the Western world, the stress response goes on for weeks and months and even years at a time, and when it does that, it’s incredibly toxic. The result: an epidemic of depressive illness.”
More recently, in 2016, The Rotman Research Institute (RRI) discovered that being subjected to chronic stress and anxiety increases the risk of “structural degeneration and impaired functioning of the hippocampus and the prefrontal cortex (PFC), which may account for the increased risk of developing neuropsychiatric disorders, including depression and dementia.”
The mainstream narrative of fear and problems, studies show, is a story that prolongs the activation of the physiological stress response, causing a chronic pathological state that is wreaking havoc on our metabolic, neurological, cardiovascular and immune systems.
Mainstream Education in Schools
During the years I have spent teaching The Art of Critical Thinking (and developing WUWE), I have come to realize two things: critical thinking is not always a skill that is actively encouraged in mainstream academic institutions – often because “it is too political” – and when it is taught, people are often taught to “have an open mind” and “think out of the box” within the confines of the current mainstream narrative.
First, almost every important topic today is political: poverty, food security, climate change, sweat shops, social benefits, privatisation, refugees, war, Donald Trump – we all have opinions about these topics – but if we do not look at the facts surrounding these topics, we cannot formulate and act on informed opinions based on truth.
Second, in order to think out of the box, we need to look at that other side of the argument which is not the mainstream narrative, not our conditioning, or as R. Buckminster Fuller said: “
You never change things by fighting the existing reality. To change something, build a new model that makes the existing model obsolete.”
Schools, after all, are supposed to be places where we prepare new generations for a positive future in today’s world. The problem is that despite all we know about the world we live in, the mainstream narrative is still that a positive future, or ‘success’, just means fitting into the current story by getting a well-paid job.
Consequently, teachers usually have no choice but to teach an academic curriculum that covers some problems we face in the world, such as the consequences of climate change, but covers very little about howthe current industrial growth society we live in today is causing these problems and even less about what we can do, and what is happening now, to change it.
This is the case in academic institutions the world over, and it is not surprising. Academics agree that the conventional (mainstream) curriculum is outdated and designed to prepare us to go into the workforce and contribute to a failing system which, we all know, is rapidly destroying the planet and us.
My experience teaching in the primary, secondary and higher education sectors worldwide for almost 20 years tells me teachers and students are interested in an alternative, positive way of looking at the world to this fear-based, problems-focused narrative we are presented with, but mainstream education simply does not allow for it.
"The people have the power, all we have to do is awaken that power in the people.
The people are unaware. They're not educated to realize that they have power.
The system is so geared that everyone believes the government will fix everything. We are the government."
- John Lennon
The Other Narrative
The mainstream narrative is just that – a story we are all educated to accept as truth.
Author, scholar and environmental activist Joanna Macy states in the film Planetary: “There are three stories actually.”
“The first story,” she says “is business as usual. All we need to do is grow our economy,” and then “there’s another story, which is seen and accepted as the reality by the scientists, the activists: when I lift back the carpet, look under the rug of the business as usual and see what it’s costing us. It’s costing us the world.”
She goes on to say “That’s not the end of the story though because there’s another narrative” and that is “that a revolution is taking place. A transition.” She calls this story “The great turning.”
So is it possible that we are in the midst of a solutions revolution right now, and the only problem is that we learn next to nothing about this alternative, exciting solutions-focused reality in the institutions that provide our education?
In the following Trews-style presentation I begin answering this question by looking at the first two narratives – “business as usual” and “what it’s costing us” – and demonstrate that no matter what the conclusion, when we follow the reality given to us in the mainstream narrative, the outcome ends up with increased doom and gloom.
The solution, then, is to shift our focus away from the mainstream narrative towards the third story, the solutions-focused narrative, and participate in that story instead.
The Trap Of Romantic Love February 14 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
The Search for Romantic Love: Most people - especially those brought up in the West - have been conditioned to believe that so-called romantic love is the most important pursuit in life and that only the ones who’ve found it are fulfilled.
From the tender age of one or two, we are told of fairy tales that end with two people of the opposite sex living “happily ever after”. As we age, novels, magazines, pop songs, television, Hollywood scripts, and self-help workshops reinforce the idea that romantic love is the ideal form of love.
We are led to believe that our happiness heavily depends on romantic love, and that our personal worth is reflected in how good we are with our romantic relationships. Not surprisingly, when we’re single or we don’t experience love as it’s usually portrayed, we wonder if there’s something wrong with us.
We think that we’re missing out on true love and are anxiously praying for that moment when the fair maiden or prince will save us from our desperate situation.
As we are, we feel emotionally empty - something is lacking within our psyche that needs to be filled, yet we can’t do that on our own. Only another person can do it, and unless we are lucky enough to connect with him or her, we won’t ever discover pure joy and lasting contentment.
The belief that we’re not complete as we are and that we need someone else to fill in our sense of existential emptiness isn’t a modern one. In fact, it’s ancient.
In Plato’s ~2,500 year-old philosophical text Symposium, the comic playwright Aristophanes describes the origins of humanity. As he points out, the original form of man was a four-legged, four-armed, double-sexed entity.
Zeus, however, was afraid that humans might steal the power of the gods, so he decided to take away their power by having them sliced in half. According to Aristophanes, their heads turned “towards the wound, so that each person would see that he’d been cut and keep better order.”
This, he explains, is why each human being is craving for a significant other to complete them. In his own words: “Now, since their natural form had been cut in two, each one longed for its own other half, and so they would throw their arms about each other, weaving themselves together, wanting to grow together.”
If taken literally, Aristophanes’ recount is total nonsense, yet metaphorically it shows the central role that romantic love plays in our lives: We are in an endless search for that “special someone” - the soulmate - the universe created just for us, and we are willing to give up anything to “lose ourselves” in his or her embrace.
Romantic Love as Addiction
The moment we fall in love, the world turns into a magical place. Suddenly, life becomes more beautiful, adventurous, meaningful… in short, life becomes worth-living again.
The only problem is that, having experienced the emotional high of romantic love, we want more of it, yet no matter how much of it we get, our thirst for it is never quenched.
In other words, romantic love is addictive. In fact, research has shown that falling in love can have a similar impact on the brain as cocaine. To study the brain function of people engaged in romantic love relationships, biological anthropologist Helen Fisher put a group of participants through MRI brain scans.
Interestingly, what she found was that they behaved just like addicts: They had obsessive thoughts, participated in risk-taking activities and found it hard to deal with withdrawals.
The brain of people in love secretes an ample amount of hormones like dopamine, norepinephrine and serotonin — hormones that boost their pleasure and confidence levels. Feeling the exhilarating psychological effects of this hormonal boost, everything seems perfect to the romantic love addict.
The promises of fairy tales have come true. At last, life is as it’s supposed to be. Yet, once the initial high fades, everything changes. Life becomes mundane, ordinary, boring once again.
This return to “normal” reality is usually enough to bring a relationship to an end. Once that happens, the romantic love addict will soon come face-to-face with that sense of inner emptiness which has forever been torturing his/her psyche. Then, to deal with his/her withdrawal symptoms, the romantic love addict will go off in search of a new hit, and the story will repeat itself one more time.
Romantic Love: A Dangerous Self-Delusion
As you can understand, romantic love is temporary - it comes quickly and goes away just as fast. No matter how strong the feelings of lust and passion in new relationships might be, they are soon bound to disappear into thin air, as the power of romantic love loses grip over our emotional world.
But while we’re possessed by romantic love, it’s so overwhelming that it distorts our perception and often leads us into making choices that we will later regret.
For example, projecting their long-yearned fantasies upon their “other half”, it’s a common phenomenon for people in fresh romantic love relationships to exaggerate the positive traits of their partner and reduce or deny the negative ones.
This illusion makes them believe they’ve found their one and only perfect match. Feeling a sense of total acceptance and adoration for their partner, they are under the impression that their love is going to last forever. As a result, they tend to make quick, immature choices, such as hurrying to marry, only to find years later that they resent their partner for failing to meet their expectations.
Romantic love is a blind self-delusion - it only exists in the realm of fantasy, an imaginary world that we’ve cultivated with the help of the romantic tradition, mainly through media programming. Just like pornography fools us into believing that perfect sex exists, the romantic tradition fools us into believing that perfect relationships exist.
Yet, romantic love isn’t just delusional - it can also be dangerous once we’ve fallen into its trap. Not just because of the wrong choices it can urge us to make, as mentioned earlier, but first and foremost because it creates an ideal out of love that nobody can possibly reach (because it doesn’t exist in the first place - in fact, that’s the very reason why it’s called ideal).
Hence, no matter how nice, compatible people we date, the yearning for the perfect romantic relationship with the fairy tale Dream Lover will always lead us to disappointment. Obsessed with a fantasy world, we can’t enjoy reality.
Escaping the Trap of Romantic Love
To escape the trap of romantic love is quite difficult, considering that we have a billion-dollar industry that is day in and day out promoting a misrepresentation of actual love relationships, in effect making a profit from the exploitation of our deep-rooted emotional need to love and be loved.
You see, capitalism doesn’t give a damn about love. In fact, the less we love one another, the better it is for capitalism. From the market’s standpoint, it’s good that we’re unhappy with our relationships, because then happiness can be sold to us through products and services that promise to substitute for the loss of connection that we long for.
Unfortunately, we’re so desperate that we’ve bought into those promises. This is reflected in our efforts to show our partners love through the act of buying stuff. Take, for example, Valentine’s day, when couples have been persuaded to blindly consume things, thinking that this will elevate their relationship.
But how can an expensive ring substitute for a tight, filled-with-loving-warmth hug? And how can a ready-made meal in a high-class gourmet restaurant substitute for a sincere, intimate look into the beloved’s eye?
What we need isn’t more stuff, just like we don’t need more romantic movies. Neither, of course, do we need the Ideal Lover from the dreamworld. All of these offer us nothing of what we need, and only mess up with our hearts.
What we actually need is more understanding.
We need to understand that there’s no person out there who will complete us.
If we feel a sense of emptiness within, we’re going to keep on experiencing it no matter how many romantic love partners we spend our time with. That’s because our inner emptiness is nothing but a lack of self-love.
Therefore, unless we’re able to love and accept ourselves, we’ll always feel incomplete, regardless of how much love is shown to us.
We need to understand that we can’t love another unless we first love ourselves.
Healthy love relationships can only exist between two already complete, fulfilled people who decide to enrich their lives by sharing their overflowing-with-love hearts.
Unfortunately, most of us are emotional beggars seeking for completion in another person, only to find that our emptiness is actually deepening once we wake up to the fact that our partner is just as empty as we are.
We need to understand that love relationships are based on freedom.
Normally, partners are trying to fit each other into their fantasy image of how the Ideal Lover should look and behave like, not realizing that by doing so they’re depriving them of their freedom to be themselves.
This inevitably results in a constant state of conflict that ultimately turns relationships into prisons of emotional torture.
Just like birds need freedom of space so that they can soar into the skies, partners in an intimate relationship need the freedom to be themselves so they can spread their wings of love and fly to the peaks of consciousness.
We need to understand that healthy relationships require a lot of work.
There’s no great relationship without a lot of work behind it. In other words, great relationships don’t happen to be - they are slowly built with care and effort.
No matter how special a relationship might be, hardships to one degree or another are going to be a natural of part it, and the important question is how you deal with them: Is it through discussion and understanding or through fighting and judging?
Lastly, we need to understand that the Perfect Relationship doesn’t exist.
Contrary to what the romantic tradition has made us believe, the Perfect Relationship doesn’t exist other than in our imagination.
No actual living person is without flaws, we need to stop projecting our fairy tale fantasies on our partners, if we actually want to build genuine love relationships on the foundation of honesty, understanding and acceptance.
In addition, love relationships aren’t all passionate sex and romantic walks on sandy beaches under the filled-with-stars night sky. They’re not forever-lasting, either. In fact, they’re usually quite ephemeral. So let’s not make promises of perfect and eternal love.
Let’s be honest to one another, and keep our love real. I know, this is not the stuff movies and books are made of, but the reality nonetheless, and we better accept it before we’re slapped by it hard in the face.
Love relationships can’t be perfect, but they can still be amazingly beautiful. So let’s make the most of them, by celebrating what we do have, instead of worrying about what we don’t.
How Science Arrived At The Doorstep Of Spirituality February 13 2020 | From: UpliftConnect / Various
Science Validates Collective Intention: Can thought, intention, and emotion influence the physical world? Many people believe that they can, but scientific models for testing and quantifying this idea often fall short.
Classical physics has been very successful at understanding the physical nature of the universe, yet this world-view assumes that reality is limited to matter.
This leaves classical physics ill-equipped to measure or quantify non-physical phenomena. This has led to a movement towards post-material science.
If you experience intuition and other non-physical phenomena, you will be excited to learn that science is beginning to validate this realm. You will be inspired to explore the quantum ways that you are connected with the entire universe.
In Brief:
The Facts: Quantum science today is showing us that our collective thoughts and intentions can have an impact on our physical world and environment.
Reflect On: What does this mean when exploring the reality of ourselves? Or exploring the reality of how we can create change on our planet?
Spiritual practices like meditation, qigong, and yoga were considered forms of science long before Newton inspired classical physics. Quantum Physics flirts with realms of mystery that were traditionally reserved for mystics.
There is no need to be on the sidelines as an observer because there are a few very interesting research projects happening in the interstices between science and spirituality which we will explore below.
Today we have an unprecedented opportunity to participate in this historic process that integrates physics, consciousness, and group meditation.
Spiritual practices like meditation, qigong, and yoga were considered forms of science
Classical Newtonian Physics is primarily focused on the material world, yet consciousness studies are one of the cutting edges of scientific research.
This calls for a new paradigm that allows mind, consciousness, and non-material phenomena to be accepted into the equation of reality, while finding adequate means to study and quantify them.
A leading group of well-respected scientists have come together and presented a Manifesto for Post-Materialistic Science as a solution to the limitations of classical physics.
As with any new field of inquiry, it is not without controversy, and is upsetting to some members of the scientific status quo.
“Major advances in science - revolutions, even - follow the collapse of outworn paradigms, whose overthrow is forced by the accumulation of empirical evidence that violates the paradigm.”
- Dave Pruett, Former NASA researcher; Emeritus Professor of Mathematics, James Madison University
How Science Arrived at the Doorstep of Spirituality
The first echoes of the need for a new paradigm that addresses the non-physical realty came from Einstein in the early 1930’s.
In his research, he observed something so bizarre that he could barely believe what he was seeing. He called it “spooky action at a distance”, which later became two of the main concepts studied in the quantum information sciences, known as entanglement and non locality.
Entanglement occurs when two particles are so deeply linked (by a quantum field) that one particle can instantaneously (meaning faster than the speed of light!) influence the other even at great distances non-locally.
This implies that the physical distance between the particles is irrelevant, thus a quantum leap in our idea of what is possible.
“Major advances in science - revolutions, even - follow the collapse of outworn paradigms, whose overthrow is fThe shift from materialistic science to post-materialistic science may be of vital importance to the evolution of human civilization.
It may be even more pivotal than the transition from geocentrism to heliocentrism.”
Though this phenomena is not fully understood, it is accepted in quantum mechanics. Maybe you have experienced a moment where you randomly thought of a loved one that you hadn’t thought about in a long time, then the phone rings and you pick it up to hear their voice?
These sorts of “synchronicities” happen often for many people, yet may be hard to prove exactly why or how they happen. Quantum physics is at the very beginning of exploring this phenomena that is has usually been called coincidence…until now.
“Without the spiritual world the material world is a disheartening enigma.”
– Joseph Joubert
Have you had a moment where you randomly thought of a loved one, then the phone rings?
Research Science Meets Meditation, Human Intention, and Consciousness
Bill Tiller, Fellow to the American Academy for the Advancement of Science and Chairman Emeritus of Stanford University’s Department of Materials Science, spent 34 years in academia after 9 years as an advisory physicist with the Westinghouse Research Laboratories.
He has published over 250 conventional scientific papers, 3 books and several patents.
As a renowned scientist, he is also a strong advocate for meditation, non-physical science, and spirituality.
He has coined the term Psychoenergetic Science to describe his work that combines consciousness and science.
“For the last four hundred years, an unstated assumption of science is that human intention cannot affect what we call ‘physical reality.’
Our experimental research of the past decade shows that, for today’s world and under the right conditions, this assumption is no longer correct.
We humans are much more than we think we are and Psychoenergetic Science continues to expand the proof of it.”
- Dr. Bill Tiller
Tiller is convinced that intention can influence physical substances and he has developed a crystalline-based silicon technology that can capture and store an intention directed by a group of meditators.
This energetic intention resonates at a frequency that can be recorded or broadcast to achieve a designated effect in people.
Early research with this technology in his lab at Stanford, as well as labs in London and Berlin, indicates the ability of directed human intention to increase or lower the pH of water by 1 point, the growing of larvae at a 30% increased rate, and the killing of bacteria at a 30% increased rate.
This implies some sort of non-physical, non-local connection between intention and these physical substances.
Addressing Skepticism
As with any new field of study there will be successes and failures. Scientists are vulnerable to the weaknesses that we all experience.
Denial of facts, confirmation bias, resistance to new ideas, etc. are issues that scientists from the old and the emerging paradigm will need to address.
Vigorous research can be expensive and funding can be hard to find for theories that are unconventional. So yes, there will be skeptics and there will also be new discoveries that topple long-held beliefs about humans, the universe, and what is possible.
Just as Einstein was baffled and skeptical of his own observations of entanglement, we are all liable to have our preconceived notions challenged and overturned by this emerging field of non-material science.
Yes you can! The best thing about consciousness research on a global scale is that it requires participation from lots of people.
Since we face unprecedented challenges with climate instability, wars, and economic disparity, there has never been a more potent time on the planet for humans to collectively access higher realms of potential.
We are ready for a quantum shift and we really need one.
Global Coherence Initiative
Globally Synchronized for a Quantum Leap
Currently, leading minds in science, spirituality, and technology are learning to collaborate in ways that are certain to make some waves.
Unify organizes globally synchronized meditations through their online network of over one million fans, as well as a network of over 2,000 local organizers in countries around the world.
Combined with United Nations Millennial Goals, like International Day of Peace during the September equinox, or World Water Day during the March equinox, the Unify Team is able to facilitate hundreds of thousands of meditators around the world to focus their intention on important global issues.
These global meditations are free and open to anyone who wants to be involved, or organize their own local event. Learn more here.
The Merraki Institute has partnered with Bill Tiller and is conducting vigorous scientific research in another participatory global experiment.
Merraki is a Greek word meaning, “Doing something with soul, creativity, or love” and it is refreshing to see this ethic being central to a scientific research project.
If you are interested in participating with Tiller’s exciting new technology that uses crystalline-based silicon to store and emit an energy transmission of intention, you can learn more or get involved here.
We all exist within a larger field of energy, a quantum field. Perhaps love, intention, and emotion are entwined within this mysterious field? We have the ability to access various internal states of consciousness through meditation and mindfulness, we can alter our social relationships, and potentially we can shift things on a global scale.
This process begins within, is deepened with personal practice, and is celebrated in the larger community that is engaging in these ancient practices.
We may finally start to see scientific validation for the unseen realms that many of us feel intuitively. Hopefully we will also begin to experience quantum shifts in the world around us as we deepen our understanding.
We are not alone, and the boundaries where we begin or end as physical, emotional, and electrical beings is constantly being redefined by science. Unity consciousness may be a scientific law waiting to be discovered…
The Eradication Of Natural Alternatives: Big Pharma Wants To Eliminate The Competition February 12 2020 | From: Sott / Various
Everyone has the simple desire to find happiness within themselves - to find a state of well-being that can be carried throughout their lives. Sara is no different. Sara is a teacher who struggles with mental conditions for which she has been prescribed a bevy of medications.
Over the years she has struggled, as most in her situation have, with addiction and the unbearable side-effects of her FDA-approved "safe" medications.
Her absolute passion in this life is for the children whom she molds and develops with an unrivaled dedication. As she began to grapple further with the unexpected effects and growing addiction to her medications, she began to see it affecting her ability to be present in her responsibilities, while also stealing her creativity that she so greatly treasured.
So when she discovered kratom, which successfully replaced not one, but all of her medications, with zero side-effects, she thanked God for providing this miracle and natural alternative.
In a time when much of what Westerners thought they knew about themselves and their health has begun to prove unfounded, the ever-present natural and homeopathic alternatives are once again gathering attention.
Due largely in part to the continual effort of the pharmaceutical industry, many are unaware that the majority of natural alternatives to the overwhelming amount of different pharmaceutical medications are not only very effective, but in many cases, a far better option.
Big Pharma has been caught in kickback schemes, exposed for bribery, fraud, and price-fixing, and has made it quite clear to the American people that their primary concern is not the health of the nation, but their own bottom line. Yet the pharmaceutical giants march on, increasing their profit with every passing year.
To think that this or any other company would not attempt to stomp out competition that threatened to rival their products is just naïve. This is seen in business every day.
Yet people seem to cast Big Pharma in a light of righteousness, as if they are some benevolent caregiver providing the country with loving healthcare; as if they are somehow exempt from the cutthroat nature of big business simply because their efforts are incorrectly seen as a public service, even though Big Pharma is not concerned with anything above and beyond its own profits.
What is being witnessed is an all-out assault on any possible natural alternative to Big Pharma medications; and currently in their crosshairs, being heralded as a miracle drug, is the natural root extract kratom.
Just as the nation is witnessing with cannabis, the pharmaceutical industry is beginning to wage war against this natural substance because it threatens to expose the simple fact that natural remedies actually work; and work well.
Kratom has shown to work wonders for pain relief, anxiety, insomnia, and much more. In addition to its list of uses, it has a long and respected history; kratom has been used in Southeast Asia for centuries and is perfectly safe, especially when compared to the obvious dangers known to exist with opiate use.
Opiates are an epidemic in this county, causing more 16,000 deaths a year, and according to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, an estimated 36 million people abuse opioids worldwide, with an estimated 2.1 million Americans suffering from opiate addiction.
The number of unintentional overdose deaths from prescription pain relievers has soared in the United States, more than quadrupling since 1999.
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report that more Americans now die from painkillers than from heroin and cocaine combined. This is due in large part to the industry's efforts to over-prescribe opiate based medications; and this is not a hypothetical.
Americans now consume more than 84 percent of the world's supply of oxycodone and almost 100 percent of hydrocodone opioids.
These "painkillers," which most doctors will tell you do a poor job of living up to that title, are currently listed as a Schedule II controlled substance.
Currently cannabis, the plant being shown to have more health benefits than all of Big Pharma's medications combined, is listed as a Schedule I controlled substance, implying that the plant has zero medical value and is highly addictive - both of which are categorically untrue.
To add insult to injury, the Federal government has a patent on the medical use of cannabis, all while arresting those who use cannabis for its medical value. It's laughably absurd.
To the resounding cheers of the American people, Big Pharma has been losing the battle to keep cannabis in the dark shadowy recesses of the illegal drug world and out of the hands of those in desperate need of its healing properties.
That in itself is a perfect example of how the industry is not focused on the needs and desires of the people they claim to help, but rather on telling them what they need and creating a situation in which that need becomes a reality; and their profits soar at the expense of real cures as opposed to prolonged treatments.
As kratom continues to rise and its value begins to be clearly demonstrated, Big Pharma has now made it their number one enemy.
It may seem illogical and unnecessary to label a natural root extract that has been used for thousands of years as dangerous while this country's number one prescribed medication is killing people in the millions, yet that is exactly what's happening.
It's clear that opiates are the real problem; so all should be asking themselves why law enforcement chooses to focus on the natural substances alone: It always comes back to money.
There are billions of dollars in profit that the government stands to lose with the rise of natural substances such as cannabis, kratom, or kava, on both a medical and an industrial level. This is why Americans are exposed to fast-tracked drugs with countless known (as well as unknown) side-effects that fly through the FDA, only to be pulled years later due to terrible and often terminal results.
This has almost become an accepted practice. Yet there are drugs with the potential to cure and not just treat that get shelved at the FDA for decades, shrugged off as just the backlogged efforts of the FDA. They can only do so much, right?
The FDA just approved a new super-Vicodin type drug called Zohydro. This drug contains up to five times the amount of hydrocodone and does not have time-release protection, so it can be easily crushed up and snorted or injected by those who would abuse it.
This drug was approved after only one twelve-week trial in which five of the people involved died as a result.
Yet kratom, which has been used for centuries and is widely accepted as extremely safe, is dangerous and unlawful in the eyes of the Feds.
“When you talk to pain specialists in our field, they will all tell you one indisputable fact: opiates are lousy drugs to treat chronic pain" said one FDA committee member who voted against Zohydro approval.
The hypocrisy within this country's medical field, as well as many others, has become something of an established American business model. Lie long enough, with enough confidence and with enough force, and the Truth no longer matters.
This is becoming business as usual, and it is at the expense of the nation's health. They are bogging down drugs that can cure while fast-tracking highly addictive treatments, producing the perfect return customer.
With Alabama's new law deeming kratom illegal and with other states soon to follow, Sara is left falling back into her old rut of addiction and mental fog brought on by the prescribed "healthcare" that so often left her feeling lost in a world full of potential.
So many fall victim to the pacification and addiction almost certain to rear its ugly head when being subjected to daily and prolonged pharmaceutical drug use. Kratom was the one natural substance that gave her zero side-effects and completely relieved her of her anxiety while rendering her other drugs unnecessary.
It is not hard to see why Big Pharma saw this substance as a threat to its ongoing domination of the drug trade in the United States.
Western Propaganda - So Simple But So Effective February 11 2020 | From: JournalNeo
When some time ago Noam Chomsky and I met at MIT, in order to write a book “On Western Terrorism: From Hiroshima to Drone Warfare” and to produce a film with the same title together, the topic we mainly aimed at discussing was that of the countless genocides the West has committed all over the world since the end of the WWII. The second topic was impunity.
But no matter what atrocities we re-visited, our conversation kept slipping towards one crucial theme: the propaganda that has been manufactured in media centers like New York, Paris, London and other North American and European cities; the propaganda created in order to twist both the past and the present.
Without such brainwashing and the almost total indoctrination of the Western general public and the ‘elites’ in all of the ‘client’ states, no imperialist and neo-colonialist policies would have become truly successful.
We spoke about US commercial advertising and its influence on German Nazi propaganda, and about Nazi propaganda influencing by return both the US and European propaganda-makers.
Noam kept asking me about my childhood in socialist Czechoslovakia, and I explained to him, honestly, how indoctrinated I was as a teenager: not by the Communist dogmas, but by the BBC, the Voice of America and the Radio Free Europe – all of them relentlessly spreading the Western political and market gospel to all corners of the socialist world.
Both Noam and I have created dozens of essays on the topic, as well as several books. My latest one, basically written about all the corners of the world where the Empire is spreading destruction and followed by indoctrination, has more than 800 pages, and is called “Exposing Lies of the Empire”.
And I always feel that even this massive book just touches the tip of the iceberg, that it is only a beginning!
Western propaganda is actually a perfect apparatus! It is effective and it is almost fully ‘bulletproof’. It ‘works’! European empires have been refining it for many long centuries, and the European offspring – the United States – has elevated it to almost total perfection.
One precondition for its success is, of course, that the Western political and economic regime owns almost all the major media channels and distribution outlets of the world. Diversity can never be tolerated. It could smash the idiocy! Once this prerequisite is completed, things get relatively relaxed and cozy for the demagogues in Washington, London and Paris.
Here is just an example of how easy it is to smear a world leader who resists the imperialist designs of the Empire:
Imagine that one sunny morning, some 10 major newspapers and television stations declare that various anonymous but highly reliable sources in Moscow have informed them that the Russian President Vladimir Putin is a vampire!
This ‘news’ would fly all over the world. Many readers and viewers would at first roll around on the floor laughing, but some would not. And even several of those who found the information thoroughly bizarre and unbelievable would at some point realize that seeds of doubt were beginning to grow inside their brains: “OK, it is absurd, of course, but what if? What if? How awful that would be!”
But how can one really prove that he or she is not a vampire? Or how can one prove that he or she has not been visited by some evil extra-terrestrial flying saucers on several occasions?
At some point, the Russian President would feel that he had enough of the charade. He’d go to the best university clinic in Moscow, and ask for a certificate that clearly stated that he is not a vampire. Several leading academics and doctors would get involved and produce a complex and thorough scientific conclusion, resolutely stating that President Putin is not a vampire.
Shocked by and reacting to the vulgarity demonstrated by the Western propaganda tsars, most of the Russian media outlets would offer some commonsense and logic:
"Can’t we all see clearly that he cannot be a vampire? All his teeth are of approximately equal length, he socialized during the day, he does not sleep in a coffin, he eats garlic and he is not scared of crosses; be they Orthodox, Protestant or Catholic ones!”
Others would argue that there are actually no real vampires inhabiting our Planet.
This is when the Western mass media would go into overdrive. Sarcastically it would declare that the Russian academia, Russian doctors and Russian media cannot be trusted – they are all under the heel of the state, and on top of it they have been infiltrated by nation’s secret services and former KGB agents.
"And doesn’t ‘Vlad’ sound somehow similar to ‘Bran’, which is the castle in Romania, which in turn used to be the home base of the commander-in-chief of all militant vampires - Count Dracula?”
There would still be some rational resistance: “No, ‘Vlad’ does not really sound like ‘Bran’, and anyway, nobody in Russia calls Mr. Putin ‘Vlad’ – only the Western media does.” But such voices of reason would never reach the general public all over the world! And on it goes.
In the end, a few billions of human brains would register and subconsciously store the ‘vampire theory’, and they would never again look at the President of Russia, or at his country, with the same eyes!
Of course the Russian leadership is not the only one that the West is targeting. There is a relentless flow of ‘shocking’ rumors and derogatory remarks made by the mainstream media against the President of China, of Byelorussia, against the leadership of Iran, South Africa, Eritrea, Zimbabwe, Syria, and North Korea as well as against all the left-wing governments of Latin America.
After being repeated hundreds of times, the rumors, at least for many people, get confused with facts, and get accepted as facts.
When still leading Cuba, Fidel Castro was constantly ‘dying’ or ‘disappearing’. The North Korean government has been relentlessly portrayed as a desperate gang of bloodthirsty sexual maniacs, executing and raping all that moves.
The ANC and especially President Zuma have done ‘nothing to close that staggering social divide in South Africa’. In South America, the pro-Western media outlets invented and then perfected a new lucrative industry: manufacturing corruption scandals and implicating in them virtually all of the popular socialist leaders.
Nihilism, darkest ‘news’, and scenarios have been force-fed to the public, in order to eradicate all zeal and optimism that comes when one is building a great independent and egalitarian nation.
"I never forget that day,” an Eritrean cameraman exclaimed, during my visit to his country. “I had just finished an assignment inside the Presidential Palace. Then I met my friends and we were having coffee in front of the main gate. Suddenly the Western networks began broadcasting that ‘there is a coup in Asmara’.
Social media went bananas. It was the “Breaking News” story everywhere. And here we were, right there, on a lazy sunny afternoon, in front of the Palace… I had just seen the President…. All was quiet!
They just invented it, in order to get people out onto the streets! They were trying to manufacture a coup via their media outlets.”
It is mainly fear, implanted into the brains of its subjects and slaves; fear that allows the Empire to control almost the entire Planet. Often it is subconscious fear, but it is fear nevertheless. Fear can be that of the Empire as a whole, or of its might and brutality, or even of the alternatives, portrayed in the most unsavory and frightening colors by the propaganda.
In order to rule unopposed, one has to be feared! And one has to smear the alternatives. The task to spread fear, slander diversity and dissent, was given to the official media, academia and ‘artists’.
Of course the biggest ‘threat’ to the Empire has been the two sisters who were born under the same star, from the same mother called Humanism. Their names are Communism and Socialism. And I am not only talking about the Western Marxist concept. There are many great concepts that put life and the well-being of the people first, all over the world!
In fact, a few decades ago, it was becoming crystal clear that Western colonialism, imperialism and capitalism were finished. Their time was up! Socialism was the natural and logical way forward for most of humanity.
But then the West and its Empire fought back. They employed extreme violence and brutality, as well as cunning ‘divide and rule’ tactics. Tens of millions died, and progress was stopped, although hopefully, only for a limited period of time. And not everywhere!
One of many reasons why Russia is perceived as a great ‘threat’ is because it inherited the humanist and internationalist foreign policy of the Soviet Union. But, also because it itself is actually becoming socialist again (although it is moving in that direction by taking extremely short steps). Russia is recovering irreversibly from those dark days of the free marketer and West’s lackey, Boris Yeltsin.
Russia is also hated because it is setting the ‘wrong example’; proving to the world that one can develop and prosper without taking orders from the West, without serving its governments and corporations. Or more precisely: it can do it exactly because it broke itself free!
The demonization of Russia is relentless. Every little negative detail is multiplied and magnified by the mainstream media and film industry. The world’s public is being nourished by bizarre stereotypes and fabrications. And so one of the most compassionate, deep, artistic and passionate nations on Earth, Russia, is depicted as being cold, robotic, heartless and inherently evil.
Massive NATO military forces are now dispatched along Russia’s western border, and they include German troops. Periodically there are maneuvers and exercises, not far from the borderline.
It is clearly a provocation, and it all brings back the horrific memories of the years right before World War II, the war in which the Russian nation lost between 25 and 30 million lives. A few hundred kilometers south, an old ally, in fact a Slavic sister, Ukraine, is being forced to confront Russia by its Western handlers, something that is being done against the will of the great majority of the Ukrainian people.
The US is heavily involved in the destabilizing of Central Asia, including a group of nations that used to form part of the Soviet Union. But thanks to Machiavellian Western propaganda, it is actually Russia that is being portrayed as the aggressor and a danger to world peace!
And it is China, which is being depicted as some kind of a ruthless and unpredictable monster that is now ready to swallow the world! In fact China is an extremely predictable country, and any unbiased student of world history would clearly see how peacefully it has been behaving, for centuries!
But to ‘prove’ that China is not a Communist country, anymore, and at the same time that it is one of the greatest threats to world peace and ‘stability’ (read: to Western control of the World), is one of the most important tasks given to the Western media, academia and propaganda tsars by the Empire.
And they are succeeding! Indoctrination tactics are working flawlessly. The Western pubic is by now thoroughly brainwashed (at worst) or confused (at best) when it comes to China.
In recent years I engaged hundreds of French, Italian, Spanish, German, British and Czech people in discussions about China, just to receive (with extremely few exceptions) a barrage of standardized, patronizing, mass-produced ‘opinions’.
It often felt like talking to the people who were forced to live for decades under the Taliban or under the ‘spiritual guidance’ of some fundamentalist evangelical Protestant sect.
In fact, China is both Communist (Communism or Socialism, but with Chinese characteristics) as it is breathtakingly successful! Analyzing this marvelous country, together with my China-based colleagues and comrades, I am coming to the conclusion that Beijing often uses “capitalist means in order to achieve socialist goals” (to borrow a quote from Jeff J Brown, which is actually the sub-title’ of his latest book).
And an enormous, independent, successful Communist or Socialist country – that is absolutely the worst nightmare for the Empire! It is something that has to be stopped, derailed, destroyed, isolated and demonized by all means! China’s Communist success…
You would never hear about that on CNN, BBC or Fox TV! Just as you would never hear that Indonesia, India, Rwanda and any of the other Empire’s allies and client nations, are in fact the most brutal fascist ‘failed’ states, and that the genocides in Papua, Kashmir and the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) are the bloodiest extermination campaigns anywhere in the world.
I have worked in all these countries, intensively, I can testify. As this is being written, the people of Kashmir are being murdered and tortured. Right at this moment! I am wondering how many of my readers are aware of it?
Perhaps I’m obsessed with “exposing lies of the Empire”. A second volume will soon follow my 820-page long book. I cannot stop travelling, investigating and amassing the evidence. Because I am shocked; because I am outraged and because there are so few, so desperately few people that are actually working in the most desperate parts of the world!
Virtually all stereotypes about the world that have been domesticated in the West are wrong, terribly wrong.
The story of the Russian Revolution is told in the most twisted way, and so is the story of the Ukrainian famine and of the gulags. Not everything is wrong, of course, but the facts and numbers are twisted. I will soon resume my work in the Russian Far East, to write on this subject.
The story of China is grotesquely wrong, from the Great March to the present day!
The story of Cambodia’s “Commie slaughter” under the Khmer Rouge is a thoroughly idiotic manipulation! The slaughter was there, but more people died from the US carpet-bombing, and then from being displaced from their farms by US mines and cluster ‘bombies’, than from Pol Pot’s atrocities.
The great majority of Khmer Rouge men and women had nothing to do with Communism. They were just settling scores with the capital, which they saw as responsible for selling the country to the US, and for the bombing of the countryside. In the jungle, I recently met Pol Pot’s personal guard.
He told me frankly that he was simply pissed off (the bombing killed his relatives), and had no clue what Communism was:
“Pol Pot came and said ‘Communism! Let’s fight the traitors!’ And we did. How could someone call us a Communist country if we did not even know what Communism was?”
What we hardly ever hear is the most important story of mankind: the story of Western colonial plunders, of imposed slavery, genocides that lasted for centuries, of British-triggered famines that killed tens of millions in the Sub-Continent, of virtually the entire Europe and Christianity systematically committing global holocaust.
We are not told that it actually happened, and that it is still going on and on and on! In order to ‘shelter’ the Western public from the horrendous truth about the past and the present of their countries and culture, new and newer stories about those “evil others” are being invented and circulated.
Perhaps, soon, we will be really told that Mr. Putin is a vampire, or that Kim Jong Un is eating Korean virgins for breakfast. We may not be far from such a new wave of propaganda zeal. It all makes sense: the more evil the Empire becomes; the more it has to smear its adversaries.
The mass media and Hollywood are asked to perform. And they do! Reality and fiction are now being systematically mixed, and everything gets blurred and finally the great confusion and intellectual chaos are managing to overwhelm both reason and logic.
The Empire is killing millions and destroying countries and continents. But California is falling off a cliff, and clouds of huge insects are invading the entire North America. While millions of alien terrorists are now engulfing the ‘tolerant’ and ‘democratic’ Europe! So what is more terrible?
Plus there are those sinister monsters like Count Vlad and Comrade Kim, waiting with their daggers behind a corner! Therefore, The Empire and its people have to ‘protect’ themselves. They have to be tough, even tougher than before! And to put their interests first! America (North America) first! Germany first! France first!
Primitive? Does it all sound primitive? Yes, certainly. But it works! At least for the Europeans and North Americans it does. And the rulers don’t give a damn what works or doesn’t for the rest of the Planet.
Core Edicts Of The Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Command (Part III) February 10 2020 | From: VeteransToday
A core edict of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Command is to transform the masses into self-hating, self-defeating, mind-kontrolled dupes who can never understand what is being done to them by the Khazarian Zionist Mafia.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia (KM) has an age-old inter-generational agenda, and it us necessary for the KM to maintain abject secrecy otherwise the masses will revolt with pitchforks:
We now know for certain there is a method and an age-old inter-generational agenda behind the seeming madness and unimaginable evil of the KM’s Top Chieftains, the soulless criminal psychopaths that control the Khazarian Mafia and set USG policy.
"Yet the individual is handicapped by coming face to face with a conspiracy so monstrous he cannot believe it exists. The American mind simply has not come to a realization of the evil which has been introduced into our midst.
It rejects even the assumption that human creatures could espouse a philosophy which must ultimately destroy all that is good and decent.”
-
FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover, The Elks Magazine, August 1956.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia agenda is specific:
It is now known that the KM has a specific Agenda. That agenda is to establish the KM’s desired end state, a One-world Global NWO system governed by Lucifer. These Top KM Chieftains believe they will be regenerated to immortality upon the arrival of their descended master Lucifer.
And the Khazarian Zionist Mafia has a select set of methodologies deployed to attain this evil agenda:
And it is now known that the KM has a set of select methodologies used over the last 1,000 years to attain their agenda which is now close to attainment.
And these methodologies include sophisticated mind-kontrol, deployment of synthetic terror and manufactured wars, induced drug addiction slavery, Fiat debt slavery, and a general strategy of “divide and conquer” to create ongoing chaos.
They would perhaps already have attained their unimaginably evil agenda but for recent blockages due to the alternative news of the Internet and a spontaneously emerging populism inside America and Europe because of it.
In their quest to always improve their ability to spy on the masses, the Secret Shadow Government (SSG) which is a KM creation, set up the Internet, believing it would be the greatest spy tool yet devised.
That turned out to be true, but there was a serious side-effect that the Top Chieftains of the KM never expected. That was the quick emergence of the alternative media on the Internet and the steady increase in its users who left their Controlled Major Mass Media (CMMM) to habitually use it to get the news and to start researching current events as well as historical events of the past.
The KM countered this by setting up hundreds of misinformation websites. However, in order to gain any following at all they had to play the “limited hangout” game. They had to include a fair proportion of truth in their stories or no one would use their sites or be subject to any of their propaganda as “bad payloads”.
A lot of these misinformation websites supported by KM Cutouts and proprietaries would put out about 70-80% good info with a periodic very bad misinforming payload. Glenn Beck has been fingered by some as a typical example, others identify Alex Jones too, but there are likely many others. It is known that both periodically do carry some good stories too.
Top of the Pyramid kissing their god of the black sun Satan
What ended up happening with many users was that they became so sophisticated in their processing and understanding of how the world really works that they were not fooled by this”limited hangout” strategy.
Many of these alternative news website users have been able to ignore the bad payloads and select the truth nuggets and connect these dots from many different websites in their heads, and come up with composites of what is really happening that are fairly accurate.
Plus, there are some alternative media websites like Veterans Today or Rense.com which are often the first to dump serious hidden facts and Intel out there for all to use as they wish.
What is the specific end game for the Top Chieftains of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia?
These Select Few KM criminal psychopaths believe that as they seat Lucifer in their NWO temple in Jerusalem to be their ruling world master, they will personally be transformed into eternal gods, and will rule the universe forever with their master Lucifer.
The sad fact is that this Khazarian Mafia is just the current expression of this secret sect of Luciferians, going back all the way to ancient Babylonia and beyond. It is the Order of the Snake, but has many other names and is ancient Baal worship driven by a set of root beliefs called Babylonian Talmudism, but it is also known as Luciferianism, Satanism, High Freemasonry, OTO, and many more.
The big problem the KM’s top Chieftains now face is the fact that slowly but surely the masses are finding out about who they are specifically and what their evil agenda is.
Should these KM Top Chieftains be surprised when Goyim find out about this and want them indicted, arrested, jailed and executed for a whole laundry list of unimaginably evil capital crimes including mass-murder, war crimes, terrorism and crimes against humanity, and before the KM can complete its notoriously anti-human, anti-Goyim Globalist NWO Agenda?
More Actual Core Belief Patterns of the KM Top Chieftains
The actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains are based on their deep Babylonian Talmudic (Luciferian/Satanic) values which they use to determine their Core Edicts by which they establish policies while sitting at the top of their pyramidal Establishment Hierarchy.
The actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains is an age old secret of these inbred “bloodline” families that form the nexus of the Khazarians and old black nobility. It is allegedly all based on their common secret occult network which insiders call the “Order of the Snake”.
Others have called it the Black Sun, the Reich of the Black Sun, the Great Dragon (the alien ET beast, Draco), the Serpent”, but they all represent the Order of the Snake and ancient Babylonian Talmudism, aka secret Baal worship.
It has been reported that this occult network which covers most of the world, is nothing more than the deep secret of the worldwide Satanic Cult network that is centered in the USA, the UK and Europe that serves up little kids to pedophiles to abuse and more than rarely tortures and sacrifices them.
Here is a secretly recorded, later leaked video clip from a High Freemason ritual in which the first part involved hired women to provide “special” entertainment. You can only guess what is not included in this video clip, former High Freemasons who have attended such special meetings have suggested that these events ended up getting pretty spicy with top floors of expensive hotels rented and prepaid high class hookers for all.
The UK is run by High Freemasonry top to bottom, the police, the courts, the government and this is a poorly kept secret.
In America a lot of these institutions are run by smaller numbers of High Freemasons and OTO members, but this is a closely guarded secret. Some are openly members of the Satanic / Pedophile network that traffics in child sex victims over the whole western world and much of the rest of the world too.
Hitler and his top Nazi command were deeply involved in the Reich of the Black Sun, believed by some researchers to be covert Satanism. Some researchers believe human sacrifice rituals were done in the basement pit of Wewelsberg Castle. And during a short time, it was reported that 17,000 political prisoners were sacrificed in a special building that had hydraulically operated guillotines.
"The only reference I could find was a UK story that documented 16,500 executions by guillotine, but no mention of the hydraulic guillotines."
The Core Edicts of the KM Top Chieftains are oriented to managing Western institutions and culture in such a way to mind-kontrol and manipulate the masses and We The People become dirtied up with drugs and alcohol and self-defeating, shameful behaviors.
But these destructive behaviors also appear to cause individuals to self-hate, self-abuse further, and can lead also individuals to become self-defeating enemies of themselves, their families and society. This of course makes the KM’s attainment of their evil Globalist NWO Agenda so much easier.
In order for the Khazarian Zionist Mafia to attain it Globalist NWO Agenda, the KM must attain its goals:
Destruction of normal male female sex roles;
Diversity, perversity and political correctness as the “new normal”;
Loss of American borders, culture and language;
Out of control medical costs and costs of living due to inflation built created and mandated by the private Federal Reserve System;
No more living wages for employment;
The destruction of the family unit;
No more interest on saving and investments that will match the inflation caused by FRS FIAT “fake money”;
Massive unemployment and no more job security;
The end of unions;
And massive taxation, massive debt slavery and usurious credit card loans;
Corruption of the Judiciary and discarding of the US Constitution by the USG and the Judiciary at all levels;
Proliferation of weird occult networks and sometimes secret promotion of strange blood practices to extend the life of the rich super-elites;
Massive weapons and drug trafficking into American Urban centers by the CIA and the promotion of gangs and use of terror entrapment ops to gain more central power and taxpayer financing;
Socially engineered massive addiction to legal and illegal drugs and alcohol to promote gangs, foment massive chaos, and to destroy the general morality and character of the American Masses;
A generally poor and completely irrelevant public education system secretly designed inside the beltway to dumb kids down and make them good KM mind-kontrolled debt-slaves;
To poison the food and water with GMOs and endocrine disruptors;
To over-vaccinate with toxic vaccines that often cause mini-strokes and autism spectrum disorders in alarmingly high rates in innocent children unable to give adequate consent for themselves with parents too dumbed-down to know better; and
To entrain the masses through super high tech psychotronic induction means, including orbital based Helium 3 powered scalar transmitters, use of cell phone systems and WI-FI, mass-mind-kontrol through TV “programming”, as well as certain secretly deployed ELF ground wave systems and the little understood Lilly waves which can be transmitted through the power grid.
But all these KM curses being deployed against the American Masses have only been able to be deployed because they first got control of almost every single institution, including those of the Federal and State governments, the Judiciary, the Congress, private business, the NGOs and private foundations and think-tanks, the Administration, the High Military Command, American Intel and a now largely militarized LE system absorbed by the new KM-created and -run Homeland Security (DHS).
"Unless people wake up soon and start standing against these KM monsters en masse at every level inside and outside the governments and even within the KM itself, the West will be soon destroyed, depopulated by 90% and there will be no future for our young children at all."
Your mind is always the main target of the Top Command of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia, then your assets and then your very life...
Without the Earth shattering disclosures made by Gordon Duff at the International Counterterrorism Conference in 2014, you would never be reading about the Khazarian Mafia by name anywhere on the Internet, even here.
It was VT Chairman Gordon Duff that first disclosed that the root cause of so-called “world terrorism” was actually the world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
Gordon Duff did not specifically name this world’s largest organized crime syndicate in the first part of his speech which was unclassified and made public. Within minutes of its delivery, this historical ground-breaking speech was scrutinized by every major government and Intel agency, and sent shock-waves around the world.
A short time later it was VT’s Financial Editor and Talk Show host Mike Harris that named this world’s largest organized crime syndicate publicly for the first time ever, and referred to it specifically by its proper name as the Khazarian Mafia.
Without these bold first-time disclosures of Gordon Duff and Mike Harris, VT readers would not have been able to connect the dots and begin to understand what the Khazarian Mafia (KM) is or how it has parasitized America and most of the world.
Comment: Some of these statements are a bit blow-hard, as many have been aware of the 'New World Order' agenda for some time now. All these people really have done is to identify the Khazarian / Zionist element.
Nor would they be able to understand what the KM has done to rise to such world power and where it is within striking distance to take down the whole world and complete its evil Globalist NWO one-world agenda.
And without these bold disclosures you would continue seeing and feeling the negative effects of this world’s largest organized crime syndicate the KM everywhere in your daily life, but you would not know its name, its history, its composition, what empowers it.
Nor would you understand what the overall agenda of this world’s largest organized crime syndicate is. And this syndicate’s agenda just happens to be asset stripping, induced death, war and destruction for profit, power, and world domination, all intended to produce Globalist NWO one-world government end-state run by this world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
And it is now pretty clear that without the emergence of some very high level, very informed and very disgusted Intel Cowboys from all over the world, there would be no major leaks of the secret evil that the Khazarian Mafia (KM) has been perpetrating all over the world and in America, their home economic and military base.
The KM has always known that if various renegade Intel disclosed their secret evil this could be a serious threat to their syndicate’s power.
"That is why they set up so many advanced procedures to compartmentalize all areas of Intel - the higher you go, the more narrow the scope."
This has all been done in an effort to keep high ranking Intel from connecting the dots and understanding that they are working as part of system to destroy their own nation, their own families and humankind itself.
Because when some Intel gain too much information about the KM crimes committed under the cover of invoked “national security” a certain percentage will secretly rebel. That secret rebellion can take the form of sandbagging (working hard but producing little) or leaking damaging information through various complex means.
In recent years Intel Cowboys from all over the world have rebelled because they could not accept the big picture they discovered in their jobs. Some have organized into groups which have become such powerful factions that are able to openly speak out and resist the evils of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia.
It is now known beyond any shadow of a doubt that the KM Top Chieftains who sit at the top of the pyramidal Establishment Hierarchy are the top policy-makers and maintain a set of Core Edicts upon which they base their policy mandates on. These are reflected in USG Laws and most large corporate policies.
This series of articles has disclosed many of their Core Edicts. It’s a fact that the Top Chieftains of the KM control the CIA and other Intel agencies and use so-called “National Security” as cover for their crimes.
The KM cannot continue to exist without their ability to maintain abject secrecy and everyday the Internet, the world’s New Gutenberg Press is eroding that secrecy.
Use of National Security as cover for these serious RICO and International crimes by the KM is itself a most serious crime against the USA, We The People and the World.
The KM is the biggest RICO crime syndicate in America and commits the most serious US and International crimes ever.
Some of these crimes are so serious that they are almost unimaginable such as engineered staged wars with millions of dead and wounded with many are innocent civilians, women and children.
Right now the main Intel agency used by the KM inside America is the Central Intelligence Agency. The CIA is bifurcated and employs many innocent analysts and agents who collect Intel by various means but do not engage in evil, anti-human covert operations.
But there is an evil covert part of the CIA which engages in frequent wetwork, abroad and inside the USA, massive mind-kontrol operations against We The People using super high tech Psychotronics, working with the US Military to traffick in trillions of dollars of illegal narcotics and weapons to raise “off the books” black ops money.
Limitless off-the-books Black Ops money underwrites synthetic terror and advances fascistic agendas
"But the most important function that the CIA and the other Intel agencies that are completely controlled by the KM are the covert operations deployed to create synthetic terror, fake enemies, which are needed to start wars and justify huge military deployments. Mercenaries are hired for this, but there are even more sinister methods used."
Saudi Arabia has always provided a great deal of funding to pick up young orphans off the street and place them in special schools to raise them and mind-kontrol them to function as crazed, suicidal terrorist bombers, painted as Islamic extremists.
These mind-kontrolled subjects can then be triggered anytime they are needed to sacrifice themselves and produce the mass terror needed to start wars and justify more and more centralization of KM power exhibited as invisible Secret Shadow Government (SSG) power and visible USG power.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Chieftains love to consolidate institutions, and industries in order centralize power and make it much easier for themselves to exert control over the USG and We The People.
That is why they used their Gladio-style, inside-job false-flag attack on America on 9-11-01 as an excuse to consolidate all American Alphabets and Law Enforcement into one centralized hierarchy they labelled Homeland Security (DHS). The name “Homeland Security” itself a mockery of the US Constitution and everything our Founding Fathers fought for in the Revolutionary War.
This new Centralized hierarchical control of all such agencies by the KM’s Top Chieftains makes it easy for the KM to implement their Core Edicts as USG policies (many remaining secret, some made public).
These Top Chieftains of course installed perverted, deeply compromised doofuses at the head of DHS to run it, soulless dupes who will do whatever the KM Top Chieftains mandate, no matter the US Constitution and common decency.
Anyone who crosses them significantly gets whacked by their soulless wetboy teams, usually “arkencided”, a term that arose because of all the Dixie Mafia murders for the CIA surrounding the Mena operation and the Clintons.
The term “arkencide” is when the CIA wetboys murder a whistle-blower or someone deemed as a potential threat for knowing too much that they could become an unnecessary risk later on, or someone who has stepped outside allowed parameters.
In the typical arkencide, it is customary for local police to stand-down at the request of Intel and for a crooked coroner and mortuary to be used. Absurd circumstances are knowingly created to serve as a warning message to anyone else who might be tempted to step outside of allowed parameters.
Here is the bottom line of the Core Edicts of the KM Top Chieftains: To foment large criminal operations to make vast fortunes by which they plan to buy up the whole world and run it themselves, step by step.
These operations include: massive counterfeiting (their own private Fiat Currency rented out to the American users); massive illegal drug trafficking; massive illegal and legal arms trafficking; massive money laundering; bust out schemes against the American People using color of law like the S&L scam, the Enron Scam, the Mortgage Bubble/MERS scam, and the “Bailouts”; Wall Street Plunge Protection Street scam where the USG has acquired about 1/2 of all US stocks through proprietaries, thus driving the stock prices up synthetically; sophisticated eugenics programs to promote obesity, disease and mass death in order to thin the herd by 90%; a secret space war program and secret alliances with certain Alien ET groups; electronic weather control and warfare; and last but the most important operation, large scale psychotronic mind-kontrol.
This Jesse Ventura interview with Dr. Robert Duncan can not be embedded in this article, but for the time being can be watched here.
Conclusion
The bottom line is that the KM is driven by an unimaginably evil inter-generational Globalist NWO Agenda to create a one-world government run by them alone.
Their power is gained and exercised through their counterfeit FIAT Money Power. They have been able to capture most of the world in their spider web of fake money which is nothing but printed and issued debt notes.
And the rest of the world is now catching on, especially the Russian Federation and China. Khadafy caught on, and the KM murdered him and plundered his nation through US Dept. of State doofus Cutouts.
Assad and Syria have caught on and the KM is working overtime trying to depose Assad and destroy Syria’s infrastructure and Putin and the Russian Federation have now completely checkmated the KM in Syria and have decimated the KM/Israeli/USG created ISIS mercenaries.
Iran has caught on and you can bet that the Russian Federation will also protect this ally from KM destruction like they have Syria. The whole world is now closing in on the KM, and it’s going to be a battle to the end; the KM is going to go down hard, but it will go down.
The KM’s game has always been to take over the whole world and rule it themselves as kings running a feudal kingdom, with everyone else their serfs and slaves – at least those remaining 10% who have not all been mass murdered by the time they plan to exercise complete world control.
To complete their evil Globalist NWO one-world Agenda, the KM must continue creating massive wars and running large scale international organized crime scams. They must control the lives and hearts and minds of We The People and convince us that our serfdom is desirable, or at least we are powerless to do anything about it.
Every day the KM’s control is waning, as more and more of their Colossal lies are revealed. We are now all in a race to the finish point, there is only room for one victor, We the People or the Top Chieftains of the Khazarian Mafia. You can be sure of this one thing however.
"If the KM were to have won and complete their agenda they would whack all their doofus Cutouts because they would no longer need them. None of these folks would ever expect such a result, but it’s a given if the KM would have won this battle for Planet earth."
Looking at you John - you are just "the help" - no matter what your higher-up psychopaths have sold you in on
Yes, it’s now a major race between the KM’s efforts to control the people and the people’s public activism to expose these large scale KM crimes anstop them before they mass-murder most of us.
If We The People lose this battle, darkness will ded scend completely over America and the rest of the world.
Putin and the Russian Federation and the Chinese are now hip to this KM evil Agenda and have created a major financial firewall against the KM consisting of the BRICS Nations, the AIIB and new Chinese money wire system and the coming silk road railway and commerce lanes.
In time, this will likely produce an end to the US Petro Dollar as the world’s exchange currency, and may push America over a financial cliff. That alone could mean the end of the KM hegemony.
How much better it would be if We The People rose up at every level and organized to take control of our government before that happens.
The Top 10 Most Evil, Demonic But True Events Of 2019 That Indicate The Rise Of Satanism February 9 2020 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Many Westerners are still in perpetual denial about it, but there’s no doubt that Satanism is rapidly infecting every crevice of our lands.
Here are 10 of the most disturbing examples of what happens when a nation patently rejects God and embraces the god of this world instead:
There’s a whole lot of cash to be made from harvesting people’s healthy organs and selling them to wealthy transplant patients, and this is exactly what’s happening at hospitals from coast to coast – even while the “donor” patients are still alive and conscious!
Some American public schools are now instructing children to recite Satanic “poems” like Allen Ginsberg’s “Howl,” which contains language so vulgar that we won’t repeat it here.
Along with reading filthy language, these same children are also being told to pretend as though they’re being raped or sodomized as part of their “sexual education.”
The year 2019 was a big year for the spread of “Drag Queen Story Hour,” an LGBT perversion event that’s being held not only at public libraries, but also at Whole Foods Market stores.
Drag Queen Story Hour, in case you’re unfamiliar, typically involves a biological man dressed as a very slutty woman reading books to children, and possibly even dancing or prowling around on the floor while growling like a demon.
Just like the infamous Georgia Guidestones instruct them to do, the globalists (aka Satanists) are actively trying to reduce the world’s population by a whopping 90 percent.
This mass depopulation agenda, which is being pushed by the likes of Microsoft’s Bill Gates, is what these people’s god, Satan, requires of them in order to maintain the power, influence, and wealth they’ve come to expect.
It’s starting to creep out of the woodwork that many prominent politicians, mostly on the Left, are pedophiles who traffic innocent children and sell them into sex slavery – and in many cases, these demonic individuals sexually abuse children themselves!
Some of the bigger names that a whistleblower recently outed for their involvement in these Satanic practices include failed presidential candidate Hillary Clinton, Chuck Schumer and Kirsten Gillibrand.
Speaking of evil politicians, failed Texas politician Robert “Beto” O’Rourke is another such Satanist who was caught this year dressed up in a “Devil goat” costume.
Similar to the Baphomet concept, Beto’s costume and mask were a tribute to his god, the devil himself.
There’s also failed California Senator Kamala Harris, another Satanist who came out this year as an anti-Christian bigot who wants to see God extinguished not just from California but from the entire country.
It’s a good thing she dropped out of the 2020 presidential race, not that she ever stood a chance of actually winning.
The West isn’t the only place where Satanism abounds. In Brazil, a spiritual guru by the name of Joao Teixeira de Faria, or “John of God,’ was outed for running a sex slave camp disguised as a “retreat center.”
According to reports, Faria was raping women, selling their babies, and committing all sorts of other human rights atrocities, all while claiming to be a man of “God.”
Satanism isn’t just being mainstreamed throughout the Western world; it’s also being corporatized. In addition to Whole Foods’ adoption of Drag Queen Story Hour, Amazon is also selling demonic children’s books that teach little ones how to summon demons.
And who could forget Monsanto, the world’s most evil chemical company that’s been genetically modifying human beings into lobotomized zombies with its Roundup (glyphosate) herbicide.
Since the U.S. was originally founded upon Christian principles, this surge of Satanism requires that all remaining traces of America’s true spiritual heritage be removed, including crosses and other emblems and symbols of Christianity that “trigger” Leftists.
The only form of religion that’s accepted by the Left would seem to be Islam, as well as atheism, the “god” of their beloved communist and socialist ideas that, God forbid they win the White House in 2020, will drive the final nail into our country’s coffin.
Donald Trump Acquitted In Senate Impeachment Trial February 8 2020 | From: Zerohedge
President Trump has been acquitted by the Senate on both articles of impeachment, ensuring that he will not be removed from office after he was impeached by House Democrats.
Trump was acquitted on the charge of abuse of power by a vote of 52-48.
We can't wait to see if the House rolls out a third article, after House Judiciary Chairman Jerry Nadler said "I think it's likely" that former National Security Adviser John Bolton will be subpoenaed for testimony in the Ukraine saga.
But, as Politico eloquently and ominously pointed out, Trump’s acquittal marked the end of a remarkable chapter of presidential scandal that only accelerated and accentuated Trump’s grip on a Republican Party establishment he once scorned.
Earlier Wednesday, Sen. Mitt Romney (R-UT) broke ranks with his party and said he would vote to convict President Trump on one impeachment charge of abuse of power, calling Trump's conduct with Ukraine an "appalling abuse of public trust."
Romney's decision reportedly surprised colleagues, many of whom expected him to vote to acquit after two other fence-sitting Republicans (Collins and Murkowski) announced they would oppose the articles of impeachment.
Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe February 7 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
Every single day we are bombarded with thousands of advertisements, whether we realize it or not.
Being accustomed to their constant presence, we don’t consciously pay attention to them and can’t realize the tremendous negative impact they have on us and the world.
Below are five quite damaging lies that advertisements want you to believe and which you should be aware of so as to avoid falling into their trap.
1. You are incomplete. Advertisements do their best to convince you that you are not enough as you are. Once they achieve to make you feel bad about yourself, they provide you with a solution to make you feel well again: that of buying the products they sell.
2. Everything you need is on sale. Advertisements want to persuade you to think that anything you desire can be bought. Do you want to feel confident? Then buy this shiny car! Do you feel you’re not attractive to the opposite sex? Then get yourselves some hip shoes! Are you stressed? Then consume these magic pills!
3. Material possessions are all that matters in life. Another damaging lie promoted through advertising is that acquiring material things is the key to living well. You needn’t search anywhere else for happiness and fulfillment, such as in pursuing your passions or building healthy relationships with people - there’s always a product that can substitute for all those things.
4. Success is measured by the stuff you own. Advertisements try to fool you into believing that if you have less and worse stuff than those around you, then you are a person to be looked down upon, and that the only way to prove your importance is to get more and better stuff than others.
5. Consuming without end is normal. Lastly yet perhaps most importantly, advertisements are trying to convince you that your purpose in life is to consume, and that only by doing so will you fit in society.
As a result, they can immensely complicate your life by stressing you to constantly hunt for the next best thing, regardless of how wasteful that behavior is and the negative consequences it has on the planet.
As you can understand, the sole purpose of advertisements is to sell you stuff so that companies and corporations can make an economic gain, and the tactics they use to achieve that are hideous and deceptive.
The quicker you realize this fact and stop buying into their lies, the more you’ll be able to live free, without feeling the constant pressure to mindlessly waste your time, energy, and the earth’s finite resources to satisfy your artificial needs.
Dr. Francis Boyle Creator Of BioWeapons Act Says Coronavirus Is Biological Warfare Weapon February 6 2020 | From: GreatGameIndia / Various In an explosive interview Dr. Francis Boyle, who drafted the Biological Weapons Act has given a detailed statement admitting that the 2019 Wuhan Coronavirus is an offensive Biological Warfare Weapon and that the World Health Organization (WHO) already knows about it.
Francis Boyle is a professor of international law at the University of Illinois College of Law.
He drafted the U.S. domestic implementing legislation for the Biological Weapons Convention, known as the Biological Weapons Anti-Terrorism Act of 1989, that was approved unanimously by both Houses of the U.S. Congress and signed into law by President George H.W. Bush.
In an exclusive interview given to Geopolitics and Empire, Dr. Boyle discusses the coronavirus outbreak in Wuhan, China and the Biosafety Level 4 laboratory (BSL-4) from which he believes the infectious disease escaped.
He believes the virus is potentially lethal and an offensive biological warfare weapon or dual-use biowarfare weapons agent genetically modified with gain of function properties, which is why the Chinese government originally tried to cover it up and is now taking drastic measures to contain it.
The Wuhan BSL-4 lab is also a specially designated World Health Organization (WHO) research lab and Dr. Boyle contends that the WHO knows full well what is occurring.
Dr. Boyle also touches upon GreatGameIndia‘s exclusive report Coronavirus Bioweapon – where we reported in detail how Chinese Biowarfare agents working at the Canadian lab in Winnipeg were involved in the smuggling of Coronavirus to Wuhan’s lab from where it is believed to have been leaked.
Watch Dr. Francis Boyle’s interview with Geopolitics and Empire below:
Francis Boyle: Wuhan Coronavirus is an Offensive Biological Warfare Weapon
Dr. Francis Boyle discusses the coronavirus outbreak in Wuhan, China and the Biosafety Level 4 laboratory (BSL-4) from which he believes the infectious disease escaped.
Dr. Boyle’s position is in stark contrast to the mainstream media’s narrative of the virus being originated from the seafood market, which is increasingly being questioned by many experts.
In a video accompanying his post, Cotton explained that the Wuhan wet market (which Cotton incorrectly referred to as a seafood market) has been shown by experts to not be the source of the deadly contagion.
Cotton referenced a Lancet study which showed that many of the first cases of the novel coronavirus, including patient zero, had no connection to the wet market - devastatingly undermining mainstream media’s claim.
“As one epidemiologist said: ‘That virus went into the seafood market before it came out of the seafood market.’ We still don’t know where it originated,” Cotton said.
"I would note that Wuhan also has China’s only bio-safety level four super laboratory that works with the world’s most deadly pathogens to include, yes, coronavirus."
Such concerns have also been raised by J.R. Nyquist, the well known author of the books “Origins of the Fourth World War” and “The Fool and His Enemy,” as well as co-author of “The New Tactics of Global War”.
In his insightful article he published secret speechs given to high-level Communist Party cadres by Chinese Defense Minister Gen. Chi Haotian explaining a long-range plan for ensuring a Chinese national renaissance – the catalyst for which would be China’s secret plan to weaponize viruses.
Nyquist gave three different data points for making his case in analyzing Coronavirus. He writes:
"The third data point worth considering: the journal GreatGameIndia has published a piece titled “Coronavirus Bioweapon – How China Stole Coronavirus From Canada And Weaponized It."
It is not GreatGameIndia alone which is being viciously attacked. Zero Hedge, a popular alternate media blog was suspended by Twitter for publishing a story related to a study by Indian scientists finding 2019 Wuhan Coronavirus to be not naturally evolved, raising the possibility of it being created in a lab.
The study came under the scanner as two of the 12 researchers belonged to the Wuhan Institute of Virology’s Department of Emerging Infectious Diseases, and it was funded by the United States Department of Defense’s Defense Threat Reduction Agency (DTRA).
The study, conducted by scientists of the Tata Institute of Fundamental Research, the National Centre for Biological Sciences (NCBS), the Wuhan Institute of Virology, the Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences in the U.S. and the Duke-National University in Singapore, is now being investigated for how the scientists were allowed to access live samples of bats and bat hunters (humans) without due permissions.
The results of the study were published in October last year in the PLOS Neglected Tropical Diseases journal, originally established by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.
As the author J.R. Nyquist puts it:
"We must have an investigation of the outbreak in Wuhan. The Chinese must grant the world total transparency. The truth must come out.
If Chinese officials are innocent, they have nothing to hide. If they are guilty, they will refuse to cooperate.
The real concern here is whether the rest of the world has the courage to demand a real and thorough investigation.
We need to be fearless in this demand and not allow “economic interests” to play a coy and dishonest game of denial. We need an honest inquiry. We need it now."
Prince Harry: “I Will Not Be Bullied Into Playing A Game That Killed My Mum” February 5 2020 | From: CollectiveEvolution
Recently Prince Harry and Meaghan Markle announced that they would be stepping down from their royal duties, and ultimately their life as royals.
This is pretty huge news. In regards to what prompted this decision there is certainly a lot we could speculate over, perhaps they want to distance themselves from the royal family because of the recent scandal involving Uncle Prince Andrew and the allegations against him being involved in child sex trafficking, maybe they simply want to get out of the public eye, or perhaps they see how the monarchy has already started to crumble and want to get out while they can.
Whatever the reason may be, it certainly seems to validate the massive shift in consciousness that is currently taking place on our planet and perhaps throughout the entire Universe.
Some people have already been calling for the abolishment of the British monarchy after the Queen passes away, as many feel this system is very archaic in this day and age.
In Brief:
The Facts: Recently Prince Harry and Meaghan Markle announced that they would be stepping down from their royal duties, and ultimately their life as royals.
Reflect On: Why do so many view powerful figures like the Royal's as gods? Is it time to end this type of perception?
On The Surface
It was reported that the Queen had no idea of Harry and Meaghan’s decision before it was announced, and inside sources have told reporters that the “monarchy has never been seen in such a bad state.” (Source)
Longtime friend of Prince Harry, JJ Chalmers, made an insightful comment during an interview on BBC’s The One on January 10th, stating that he feels Harry likely made this decision in order to “protect his family” and was simply attempting to put his family first and do what was right for them.
The details regarding what Harry might be wanting to “protect his family” from weren’t disclosed.
A video that has gained a lot of popularity on social media over the past week or so, being retweeted over 70,000 times since being posted on January 8th, is an interview of Harry himself discussing the need to protect his family.
On January 13th a meeting took place to address Harry’s decision. According to CNN.com,
The highly unusual meeting was called after the couple’s bombshell announcement last week that they wished to step back from their roles as senior members of the royal family. The Queen was joined at the summit by Prince Charles, Prince William and Prince Harry, while Meghan was due to have dialed in from Canada.
After a crisis meeting of senior royals at the Queen’s Sandringham estate north of London, the Queen said she had agreed that Prince Harry and Meghan could split their time between the UK and Canada but that “complex matters” would have to be resolved. The monarch said she had ordered final plans to be drawn up in the next few days.
In a statement after the meeting, the Queen said the family would have preferred the couple to “remain full-time working members of the royal family,” but that they “respect and understand” Prince Harry and Meghan’s “wish to live a more independent life.”
The Queen said the family had “very constructive discussions on the future of my grandson and his family” during the meeting, adding that they are “entirely supportive of Harry and Meghan’s desire to create a new life as a young family.”
There were “complex matters for my family to resolve,” and no final agreement had been reached, particularly over Harry and Meghan’s desire to become “financially independent.”
“There is some more work to be done, but I have asked for final decisions to be reached in the coming days,” the Queen said in the statement.
Going A Bit Deeper
When we look at what happened to “the game that killed William and Harry’s mum,” she was harassed relentlessly by the media, and ultimately ended in a fatal car crash.
However, there is a lot of controversy behind this official story.
Many believe that Princess Diana was against the monarchy in some ways and was attempting to break free from it’s clutches and even potentially expose some of their secrets, and thus believe that her death was no accident, but rather that she was silenced by being taken out by the Royal family.
Are Harry and Meaghan stepping away because they refuse to continue to be harassed by paparazzi, or are they making a bold statement and declaring their values by taking a stance that shows that they no longer wish to be affiliated with or support the Royal family?
Could this signify the beginning of the end for the British monarchy? Only time will tell.
How To Reprogram Your Mind To Take An Active Role In Your Personal Evolution February 4 2020 | From: WakingTImes
For a long time we’ve been taught that evolution is a process that is happening to us. Thankfully we’re living in times where the human race is finally getting a grasp on the fact that we’re actually actively involved in how we evolve as a species.
The enzymes in our digestive system change in response to the foods we choose to eat. Our endocrine system is in a constant feedback loop with our emotions which can change dramatically according to what’s happening in the world around us.
As Dr Bruce Lipton put it, “the cell is a carbon-based ‘computer chip’ that reads the environment”, and the field of epigenetics teaches us that our DNA changes in quality – again, according to our environment.
When science talks about ‘environmental influence’ it seems to imply ‘all that which is outside ourselves’.
It’s easy to overlook the fact that that our conscious choices about which environmental factors we engage with are part of what shapes the way our bodies restructure.
We are part of the environment that influences our own development; our free will lets us choose and change the environment.
We participate in our own evolution during our lifetime and what we do in our own lives can also affect future generations.
In this way, personal evolution is collective evolution, and nowhere is personal evolution more apparent than how we are capable of rewiring our own brain.
Humans work really well with routines. We repeat the same pattern over and over, and through neuroplasticity our brain wires itself so that it doesn’t have to think too much about that task anymore, it just runs that established electrical pathway.
To riff off Noel Burch, it’s like when we learn to drive a car: we move from unconscious incompetence ‘I don’t know how bad at this I’m going to be’; to conscious competence ‘I now know how bad I am at this’; to conscious competence ‘OK, I can do this but I have to keep my mind on the job’; to unconscious competence ‘I can wind the window down, change the radio, turn a corner and change gears all at the same time, without even thinking about it’.
We program ourselves all the time with repetition, so we don’t have to waste energy engaging isolated focus on every task. The question is whether these are routines we are choosing for ourselves or that have been imposed on us? If they are imposed, are they helpful to us both personally and as a species?
When Are We Most Easily Able To Wire And Re-Wire Our Mind?
During early childhood our brains are wiring themselves for the first time. While this process slows after the intense surge of development in first few years, our brains are still establishing the wiring we will largely use for the rest of our life throughout childhood.
When we hit our teenage years we experience the second surge of new wiring and there is an opportunity for patterns to be created during this time that can setup behaviours for years to come. After this period, neuroplasticity still occurs but it just isn’t as fluid as it was before.
So you can teach an old dog new tricks, it’s just a slower process.
The problem here is that our subconscious is overhearing everything our conscious mind is hearing, and is therefore to a being programmed by whatever influence we’re being exposed to. The Jesuits knew this 400 years ago. They would boast:
"Give me a child until it’s seven, it will belong to the church for the rest of its life.’”
- Dr Bruce Lipton, paraphrasing Jesuit priests.
We Are Always Programming Ourselves
I like to imagine the subconscious mind is like an autopilot system. It is overhearing everything we ever think or say, and it’s mission (in the background and whenever possible) is to guide us towards whatever we want… or at least whatever it thinks we want according to what it overhears.
An extra level of challenge is introduced when we imagine that the conscious mind has the capacity for judgment its higher expression – discernment. The subconscious, however, doesn’t have that ability. When it is overhearing everything you think and every word you say it simply hears the topic, not the context.
‘I don’t want to be fat’ with the judgment of ‘I don’t want’ removed becomes the topic only: ‘be fat’. The subconscious ‘overhears’ the topic of what is active in your conscious mind and it is listening for repetition. This is how it figures out for how ready we need to be for that particular thought process.
Repetition Is The Key. Repetition Is The Key
If we lift weights we are using repetition to say to the muscles, ‘be ready for this, we may need to do this at any moment, so restructure yourself’.
Scientists have found the fastest way to get fit is to do interval sprints, which is basically a physical way of saying to the body through repetition ‘you need to restructure yourself so we can sprint at top speed at any time, at the drop of a hat’.
Rest, get your breath back and sprint again, over and over.
This repetition tells the body that it’s a high priority to restructure and be ready for this at all times. My observation is that the same appears to be true for our brain. When our subconscious overhears our thoughts and words and there is repetition, there is an increased likelihood of neural rewiring. After all – neurons that fire together wire together.
The Path of Least Resistance
When attempting to re-wire an old habit or behaviour pattern, it is useful to remember the old adage from high school science: electricity follows the path of least resistance. Imagine the old pattern as a well-established electrical pathway in your brain.
As you put conscious focus into creating a new electrical pathway to replace the old pattern, you make that new electrical pathway fatter.
As soon as you stop putting conscious focus into running the new behaviour pattern the electricity will revert to the old cable for as long as it is the fatter of the two cables, as that is the path of least resistance.
As soon as the day comes when the new electrical pathway is thicker than the old one you have a new program in your autopilot system, that will now run on it’s own without you needing to focus conscious intention on it.
You have reached a level of conscious competence. According to Dan Coyle a key to making the consciously chosen wiring stick is holding the intention that ‘I want to know this for the rest of my life’.
Coyle suggests this causes the brain to coat the new electrical pathway in the brain with myelin insulation, making it much more permanent.
Taking Care With the Programs We Allow OurSubconscious to Overhear
As stated earlier, our autopilot system is taking direction from everything you’re experiencing – which includes the media we watch, the people we surround ourselves with and more.
For this reason, one of the most powerful things we can do is exercise discernment around the kind of experiences we expose ourselves to, and their level of intensity and repetition.
"It is easier to build strong children than to repair broken men.”
-
Frederick Douglass
More importantly is the need for extra care in exercising this discernment on behalf of the children in our care and teaching this discernment to teenagers as, in both cases they are in a heightened state of neuroplasticity and are more susceptible to influence.
To be clear, I am by no means advocating prudishness or avoidance of the truth, just a higher level of awareness of how we are either consciously or inadvertently being programmed all the time.
In the video below Bruce Lipton speaks passionately on this very subject, citing this discernment on behalf of our children as a clear solution to war and conflict.
New Study Reveals Surprising Truths About Conspiracy Theories February 3 2020 | From: CollectiveEvolution
The largest study of conspiracy theories has revealed some interesting and telling facts about how people feel about authority, who really runs the government, and even what demographics are most likely to believe in alternative truths.
The study polled people from 9 different countries over a six-year period and was performed by researchers at the University of Cambridge and YouGov, funded by the Leverhulme Trust.
This study is the deepest ever conducted on the subject and marks the first time academics have explored questions of conspiracy beliefs, social trust, and news consumption habits across different countries.
The Facts:
A new study from YouGov and Cambridge University reveals some telling facts about people who believe in conspiracy theories. For example, 44% of people believe only a small group of people control government regardless of who's elected.
Reflect On:
Are we waking up to the truths in our world, even though media, education and pop culture tells us we're crazy to think differently? Are we seeing a grand awakening?
The timing of this study is interesting as many people are turning away from mainstream ‘facts’ and instead are exploring information from independent sources that often provide a completely different narrative than that of controlled mainstream media outlets.
In this day and age, as more narrative-breaking truths come forward, some have been suggesting that those who believe in conspiracy theories are unstable and often suffering from some sort of mental illness.
It’s not all that surprising when you consider the goal is to keep people uninformed, but the game is becoming more obvious.
Before we continue, yes, some conspiracy theories are false and way out there, but many aren’t. Time and time again we continue to see ‘conspiracy theories’ turn out to be true.
Yet we continue to judge alternative information harshly as collectively we aren’t learning our lessons.
Think of Snowden for example. People had claimed ‘Big Brother’ was watching and tracking everything we did for years, but it wasn’t until Snowden came forward and proved it that people actually started to realize it was true all along.
Instead of viewing all of those who believe in ‘conspiracies’ as unstable, if you took a more honest and neutral look at it, you might realize most are stable, well educated and intelligent individuals who happened to figure out they were being deceived and thus have performed their own research.
Interestingly, pop culture, education, and even government sneer at these people and instead focus on those who are ‘educated’ and who, quite frankly, vote a specific way, as the stable ones.
Classic conditioning of the masses to avoid people from learning truths that would deeply shake those in power.
The Results of The Study
More than 11,500 people were surveyed online by YouGov across nine countries: France, Germany, the UK, Hungary, Italy, Poland, Portugal, Sweden, and the USA. Results were weighted to be representative of each country.
I cover some of my favorite and most telling results, as well as add my commentary in the video below. Beneath the video, you can follow along by text. Some of the results are quite telling in my opinion. Be sure to subscribe to our YouTube channel for more videos too.
15% of Brexit leave voters and 11% of remain voters in Britain believed that, regardless of who was officially in charge in government, the world was run by a secret global cabal of people who control events together.
44% of people in the UK believe that “even though we live in what’s called a democracy, a few people will always run things in this country anyway”.
Mistrust of authority was high in the UK, with 77% of people trusting journalists “not much” or “not at all”; 76% distrusting British government ministers; and 74% distrusting company bosses.
Friends and family, by contrast, were trusted by 87% and 89% of respondents respectively, potentially adding credence to news sources shared by social media contacts.
Remain voters were more likely (50%) to use social media regularly for news than leave voters (34%), and more likely to read a newspaper website (by 41% to 18%). Of those who got their news from social media, Facebook was used frequently by more leave voters than remainers (74% leave, 65% remain), while the opposite was true of Twitter (39% remain, 28% leave).
Sweden gave the least amount credit to conspiracy theories, with 52% believing one or more of the theories polled by the researchers, as opposed to 85% for Hungary. In the US that figure was 64% and in France 76%. Sweden also happens to have a giant problem with free speech… they regularly prosecute and jail people for having unpopular opinions.
We live in a fast-changing world. Not just in our evolution of technology and landscape, but in our collective consciousness.
People are figuring out, on a mass scale, that things aren’t what they seem in this world and our evolution in individual consciousness is driving deep questioning into what is actually going on in our world.
It may appear like a chaotic time, but it’s a necessary step in breaking down old beliefs and paradigms that allow us to give our power away to a small group of elite individuals who rule our entire world.
Now is the time for individual empowerment to create a strong collective.
We do not rise under one country, government or belief system, but under an understanding and state of consciousness within that allows us to see we must take responsibility for our own lives and live from our hearts.
As we practice this and let go of the way of the old, we will continue to see an incredible dismantling of a power structure that does not have our best interest at heart.
Each of us holds the key to changing within. If we focus there, things will continue to shift.
The Mayor Who Has Had To Run His Own Media Campaign Shares Some Insights Into The Current State Of Local Government In New Zealand February 2 2020 | From: EnviroWatchRangitikei / Various
These videos are from the Mayor of Horowhenua, Michael Feyen.
This is a ‘people’s Mayor’ who, like his former deputy Cr Ross Campbell, seems as much at home digging a haangi or drying dishes as he is wearing his mayoral chains.
Just into his first term as Mayor however he had most of the councilors go public with a statement saying they supported not him but the CEO.
For background to this situation read this article. His selected Deputy Mayor was unseated just hours into his term for speaking on social media about what looked like insider trading (and that hasn’t gone away, see Ross Campbell’s recent updates).
This is all not surprising in light of the fact that these two have blown the whistle on quite a lot of things they saw as ‘not right’ in the course of their work in Council.
Council pollution was another issue they highlighted. And so come this campaign the Mayor has had next to no coverage by media.
Stone walled & neutered as he puts it himself, he has had a difficult uphill battle with a council that seems more intent on the business of property development than the interests both he & his former deputy would have liked to focus on.
A keen supporter of retaining the Horowhenua community housing for instance, Mayor Feyen was removed from the housing committee because he had a conflict of interest! (ie he wanted to retain the housing...
He had seen among other things opportunities for employment therein for the young people of the town, the same as his aspirations to pursue trapping of pests in lieu of the use of 1080 poison and of investing in the hemp growing industry).
The list goes on, not a list shared largely by his colleagues.
The housing sold for a song incidentally, to a property developer who then partnered with an established housing provider with promises to maintain the then status quo, however the contract ends in 2029 or thereabouts & just 18 months in they rents have already been raised.
“Effective growth is a partnership between council, central government and private enterprise... away from the unsettling glare of public commentary…”explains one HDC councilor regarding all of the public excluded meetings by which the assets are being sold.
Developers are also exempt from paying development contributions to Council. And nowhere else in the country besides Horowhenua does a District Council have a CE and a Deputy Mayor who are both registered property developers.
Listen further to the Mayor’s latest update, expanding further on local government in NZ:
A highlighted issue with this election has been the difficulty involved in voting (see Veronica Harrod’s info). This was the same last election when many folk did not receive their voting papers and the voting info office was frequently either unmanned or closed. Curious isn’t it?
So amidst the local government so called ‘sustainable’ councils up and down our clean green land (not) we have a raft of property developers busy with their public private partnerships selling up all of the public assets for a song.
Then there has been the ongoing escalating debts of Councils. That has been an issue in the Horowhenua as well... it’s ‘good debt’ we’re frequently told. Currently, right on election time, the Horowhenua CEO is away on holiday and has been for several weeks.
This is the CE who was intercepting the emails of his staff for ‘safety reasons’ it was touted. Who paid a secret payment to a local iwi without the Mayor’s knowledge.
Mayor Feyen is himself a staunch supporter of true partnership with Tangata Whenua & honouring the principles of the Treaty. Currently the Council’s real commitment appears to be mainly lipservice.
Please have a listen to his videos anyway & peruse the info on our Local Government Watch Horowhenua page.
That has not been updated of late unfortunately, there is much more than is documented there. For more recent & all info see HDC in ‘categories.
See also Cr Ross Campbell’s page on FB, the Mayor’s page (Michael Feyen) and Veronica Harrod’s also.
Veronica is an investigative journalist who has researched quite extensively the activities of this Council.
Being “Crazy” In A Sick Society Is Actually Healthy February 1 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
Krishnamurti once said that “it is no measure of health to be well adjusted to a profoundly sick society.”
However, being born and brought up in such a society, most people don’t realize that it is sick, let alone that they are part of this sickness, just like fish, which, living in water, don’t realize that they are in it and part of the sea life.
What does it mean to live a normal life? In today’s world, it means to be brainwashed at a very young age for over a decade by what we call schooling, to later on work as a wage slave and compete with others for almost the rest of your life so as to merely be able to pay bills and survive, to consume products without end because manipulative advertising convinced you to while you unconsciously harm the planet you inhabit and that sustains you.
Brainwashed to slowly poison your body with disease-causing foods, to obey the rules and blindly follow the dogmas that were forced upon you by authority figures, to be passive and uncreative, suppressing yourself in countless ways, living in suffering yet doing nothing to overcome it.
If you stop for a moment and think, you might realize that this kind of living is absolutely sick, yet it is accepted by nearly everyone as healthy, and it’s even rewarded by society.
In fact, those of us who are better at living this way, are considered to be more successful, whereas those who desire to create a different, more meaningful and fulfilling path in life, are ridiculed and looked down upon, being considered as stupid, weird, or even crazy.
But what is the point of living this way? Life can be lived so much better - we can live playfully, filled with laughter, love, and creativity, at peace with ourselves and others, savoring the gifts of existence.
Unfortunately, only a few people manage to escape from the matrix they’ve been unconsciously living in since the day they were born.
Those are the rebellious ones who at some point in their lives dared to think outside the mental box that society has provided them with and break the shackles of social conditioning.
Rebelling Against Normalcy
To rebel against the normalcy of society is the most difficult thing you can do because you need the guts to be honest with yourself and others.
To voice the truth in a world filled with deception is tremendously risky because it means going against the current of tradition, which in turn means confronting the crowd mentality and going through immense hardship because of that.
There have been many people who had the courage to rebel against the normalcy of our sick society, but most of them couldn’t deal with the negative consequences their actions had on themselves.
When nobody embraces your uniqueness and is able to understand you, and when everybody is trying to suppress you and make you fit back into society, it is easy to lose courage, and not uncommon to experience immense psychological anguish.
That’s why some of the greatest minds to have ever walked the earth suffered from serious psychological disorders. And although now, a long time since passing away, they are recognized as geniuses, when alive they were considered weirdos or lunatics by the majority.
Once you realize how sick the way most of us are living is, and openly go against it, trying to reclaim your freedom and create your own path in life, you are bound to get in trouble.
People, including family members and friends, will do everything to put obstacles on your path with the intention to “help” you become “normal” again, exactly like they are.
Instead of helping you to grow your wings of consciousness and leave behind what is burdening your psyche, they do their best to cut them off, so as to make you crawl by their side and suffer together.
And although that might be the most difficult thing to achieve, it is the only thing worth working for, because, again, what is the point of living otherwise?
What is the point of wasting your entire life, just because others told you that’s how you are supposed to live?
If you wish to live in your own way, and not the way others expect you to live, you need to gather some courage in your heart to be a little “crazy”.
You need to distance yourself from the comfort of the herd and follow your calling, without caring much about what others think of you.
You need to be willing to go through tremendous hardship, without giving up trying to turn your dreams into reality.
Remember: No matter how much suffering you might experience from walking the path of non-conformity, the advantages of doing so far outweigh the disadvantages.
Just like a mother experiences tremendous pain while giving birth, you are experiencing immense pain birthing a new kind of life.
A life of beauty, of joy, of celebration. Pain goes hand in hand with change, so embrace it, allow it to guide you and let it be a catalyst for your inner metamorphosis.
An Introduction To 'Q' January 31 2020 | From: Zerohedge / Various Who is Q? What is Q? And, perhaps most importantly, why is Q?
Q and the ever-growing worldwide movement it’s inspired have been the objects of fascination, mockery and hatred, but of surprisingly little serious analysis.
Q first appeared in October 2017 on an anonymous online forum called 4Chan, posting messages that implied top - clearance knowledge of upcoming events. More than 3,000 messages later, Q has created a disturbing, multi-faceted portrait of a global crime syndicate that operates with impunity. Q’s followers in the QAnon community faithfully analyze every detail of Q’s drops, which are compiled here and here.
The mainstream media has published hundreds of articles attacking Q as an insanerightwingconspiracy, particularly after President Trump seemed to publicly confirm his connection to it. At a North Carolina rally in 2019, Trump made a point of drawing attention to a baby wearing a onesie with a big Q.
In recent weeks, the tempo of Trump’s spotlighting of Q has accelerated, with the President retweeting Q followers twenty times in one day. Trump has featured Q fans in his ads and deployed one of Q’s signature phrases (“These people are sick”) at his rallies. The President’s lawyer, Rudy Giuliani, has also retweeted Q followers.
Q has noted that the media never asks Trump the obvious question: What do you think of Q? To Q followers, the reason they don’t ask is obvious. They’re afraid of the answer.
In the meantime, Q’s influence continues to spread.
Protestors in Hong Kong, Iran, and France have held up Q signs and chanted Q quotes. Q’s revelations are uniting people all over the world who want freedom.
If you’re unfamiliar with Q or only know it through the media’s attacks, I’d like to provide a brief introduction to this extraordinary phenomenon. I’ve followed Q since the first drop, and I’ve grown increasingly impressed by the accuracy, breadth and depth of Q’s messages.
Q followers were prepared long in advance for the easing of hostilities with North Korea, the deflation of the mullahs of Iran, and the discovery of Ukraine as a hotbed of corruption for American politicians.
They knew a great deal about Jeffrey Epstein’s activities before the public did and anticipate even more shocking revelations to come. As Q likes to say, “Future proves past.” As Q’s predictions come true, they lend retroactive credibility to the entire enterprise.
Q’s followers believe that Q is a military intelligence operation, the first of its kind, whose goal is to provide the public with secret information. Many Q followers think the Q team was founded by Admiral Michael Rogers, the former Director of the National Security Agency and former Commander of US Cyber Command.
Some suspect that Dan Scavino, White House Director of Social Media, is part of the team, because the high quality of Q’s writing has the luster of a communications expert.
Q is a new weapon in the game of information warfare, bypassing a hostile media and corrupt government to communicate directly with the public.
Think of Q as a companion to Trump’s twitter. Whereas Trump communicates bluntly and directly, Q is cryptic, sly and subtle, offering only clues that beg for context and connection.
QAnon - "You Are Watching A Movie"
Are you following the ongoing story of QAnon? This video serves as a primer. An introduction to QAnon as it's being reported by the media. And as encouragement to research for yourself.
Here’s the way it works: Q posts messages (also known as “drops” or “crumbs”) on an anonymous online forum, which are discussed, analyzed, and critiqued by the board’s inhabitants. (The forum has changed a few times after massive online attacks.) Hundreds of social media accounts then spread Q’s latest posting to worldwide followers who share their research, analysis, and interpretations of Q’s latest information.
I’ve compiled a list of Q’s most famous catch phrases and tried to put them into context:
The Great Awakening: We’re living in a unique time in which ordinary citizens around the world are collaborating to understand and expose the corrupt system that rules us.
The system thrives on deception, and the overwhelming task of The Great Awakening is to penetrate its lies and reveal the truth:
The first phase of The Great Awakening is heightened awareness of the Deep State – the interlocking governmental entities that operate outside the law to expand their own power. Elections and popular opinion don’t impact the ability of the Deep State to enforce its agenda.
The second phase of The Great Awakening investigates the Deep State’s alliance with other powerful sectors: the media, Hollywood, charities and non-profits, public schools and universities, religious organizations, medical, scientific and financial institutions, and multinational corporations. This phase can be painful, as you discover that “those you trust the most” (in Q’s phrase) are deceiving you. Beloved celebrities, religious leaders, doctors, educators, innovators, and do-gooders are all in on the hoax.
The third phase of The Great Awakening is perhaps the most painful of all. The people who rule us are not merely amoral creatures who view us as collateral damage in their drive for money and power. It’s scarier than that. The potentates we serve are actively trying to harm us. That’s their goal. We’re under coordinated attack.
Dark To Light: Q tells us that what our rulers fear the most is exposure. Bringing their crimes out of protected darkness into the light of public scrutiny destroys their power to deceive. And as their power fades, the darkness of our divided, violent world will yield to the light of freedom, cooperation, and peace.
Where We Go One We Go All (WWG1WGA):Q’s most famous phrase expresses the worldwide egalitarian nature of the movement. Every country is suffering from the system’s oppression, and the whole world will benefit from a rebirth of freedom.
In this unique movement, anonymous citizens work in collaboration with the highest-ranking military leaders and the president, and everyone’s contributions are valued.
When commenters on the board have thanked Q for his service, Q has replied that no one is above and no one is below. “We work for you.”
These people are sick. Perhaps the most difficult aspect of The Great Awakening is coming to terms with the depravity of our rulers, whom Q has called The Cult. Jeffrey Epstein’s story has helped to awaken people to some of the elite’s crimes.
The mysterious temple on Epstein’s island hints at possible future revelations that are frightening in their scope. Q followers believe that The Cult engages in ritual practices that enshrine the shedding of blood and which prey on the innocence of children.
The sickness in their souls thrives on brutality, war, and terror. These disclosures will be tough for the public to take.
Trust the plan. The presumed military leaders who created Q and who protected Trump throughout the election and presidency have created a precise path to victory. Despite the seeming chaos of daily events, a steady progression of victories is taking place.
The plan includes offensive maneuvers against the Cult’s financial power, legal standing, human supply chains, and military capacity. And, of crucial importance, the plan attacks the Cult’s ability to control the narrative that shapes what the public believes.
In this high-stakes game of information warfare, Q plays a vital role by empowering ordinary citizens (like me) to spread the truth.
They want you divided. The hatred that’s growing between races, classes, age groups, religions, and political parties is purposely fomented by the Cult. The more we’re divided and focused on attacking each other, the weaker we become.
Q urges us to stay together and to fight the Cult, not each other.
They think you’re sheep. The Cult believes, as Q says, “you’ll follow the stars” – the celebrities in media, Hollywood, and academia who tell you, in coordinated fashion, what you’re supposed to think.
Their contempt for you makes them confident they can control you and ensure your surrender to any agenda. Q, on the other hand, offers only clues and can only be understood by high-grade critical thinking, spurred by constant crowd-sourced criticism and reassessment. The essence of the Q movement is to think for yourself.
Bigger than you can imagine. Expand your thinking. Q encourages us to reevaluate everything we think we know. The Cult may date back to ancient times, and through its powerful families, it might have manipulated historical events in ways that we haven’t suspected.
The Cult may also possess advanced technology and medical cures that have not been released to the public. One aspect that may be “bigger than you can imagine” is the unfathomable scale of theft from our national coffers, as funds for foreign aid and wars wind up in the Cult’s pockets.
Track resignations. Beneath the surface, a broad and deep cleansing of corrupt players is taking place. Q asked us to track resignations to understand the scope of activity. (Here’s a website that took him up on his request: www.resignation.info)
Resignations, retirements, and unexpected deaths from major players in politics, media, charities, and corporations all point to possible deals being made quietly without the public fanfare of arrests.
For me, a notable resignation is Eric Schmidt’s abrupt exit from Google, which received little media attention. Schmidt resigned on December 21st, 2017, the same day that President Trump signed an executive order declaring a national emergency related to “serious human rights abuse and corruption around the world.”
Battle for Disclosure: The Ultimate QAnon Brief
This is a presentation about QAnon and the current climate of "Disclosure" that I gave at Joan Ocean's Cosmic Waves event in April 2019 on the Big Island of Hawaii.
[Jordan Sathers' Youtube Channel was cut by Youtube, along with many others who were speaking about Qanon. Until the video below is available again, please see the video following it
as it is also relevant.]
Further context for Schmidt’s resignation may be inferred from this photo of him in North Korea, apparently in an advisory role. Standing next to him is Bill Richardson, former Governor of New Mexico, the state in which Epstein had a secret ranch. Richardson has been accused by one of Epstein’s victims.
Their need for symbols will be their downfall. The Cult uses certain symbols over and over again, which may serve some ritualistic need, but makes them vulnerable to detection.
Q followers are familiar with Y-shaped horns that mimic those of the goat deity Baphomet, owls, pyramids, one eye encased within a pyramid, red shoes, bandaged fingers, and other repeating symbols, including the mysterious black eye that afflicts so many famous people.
The Q Army also knows the coded pedophile symbols listed by the FBI. When Q drew attention to the design of Epstein’s temple, alert Q followers noticed how similar it is to the set design of a famous talk show.
And the red ring on the hand of dead terrorist Qassam Soleimani prompted Q followers to compile images of similar rings on the hands of powerful people.
An excellent source for understanding how these symbols are incorporated into pop culture targeting the young through music videos, TV shows and movies can be found at vigilantcitizen.com.
Nothing can stop what is coming. Nothing. Now comes the pain. The headlines on any given day may sound discouraging for those who want justice to prevail. But these setbacks are temporary, as a juggernaut of justice heads our way.
As Q likes to say: We have it all. Massive amounts of irrefutable evidence await the criminals who try to evade their reckoning in court. For those who worry about Trump’s ability to overcome impeachment, election fraud, and assassination attempts, Q assures us: Patriots in control.
And no legal tricks can help the criminals escape the ultimate judgment of public disgust. Q promises us that the day is coming when they can’t walk down the street.
You are the news now.The “fake news” decried by President Trump is losing credibility and audience by the day. Q has exposed the 4 A.M. drops that provide the daily talking points to media personnel, so they can all parrot the same propaganda.
Q has also named various journalists whom he says take bribes. The media is concentrated within six powerful companies; on the other hand, the Q army is vast, voluntary, and anonymous.
Q assures us that our efforts to disseminate the truth through social media and conversations with family and friends are having a huge impact. We are the news now.
We know what happens in the end. God wins.Many times, Q has asked us to pray. He’s quoted the famous Biblical lines of Ephesians 6:12, “For we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against the rulers of darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places.”
We’re living through monumental times. It’s comforting that Q believes that if we work together, God wins.
Trump - Existential Threat To New World Order January 30 2020 | From: BigValleyNews / Various The ongoing attacks by the political establishment on President Donald Trump - which began even before he was elected – are without parallel in history.
The savagery, frenzy, and outright hysteria displayed by the President’s enemies within the Democrat Party, the media, and the various power centers of the globalist elites have no prior precedent.
This President has been spied on, lied about, made the subject of phony foreign dossiers, insulted, ridiculed, scorned, mocked and threatened.
We have witnessed Hollyweird celebrities advocate for blowing up the White House, demand the President be beaten, jailed or even assassinated, and his children tortured and sexually abused.
We have seen politicians in Washington try to convict the President of non-existent crimes, investigate him and his family members for everything from tax returns to guests at his hotels, project on to him crimes that they themselves have committed, and seed his Administration with leakers and double-agents.
No other President in American history has been treated in such a shameful manner. Not Lincoln. Not FDR. Not Nixon. Not Reagan.
What is it about this President that has roused such demons in his political foes? What is it about this President that drives his opponents to the brink of insanity?
What is it about this President that so terrifies and terrorizes the Pelosis, Schiffs, Schumers and the George Soroses?
Is it simply that he is not part of the club, a brash outsider with a different style? Is it merely because he’s outspoken and tramples on political correctness? Is it because he’s sometimes unpresidential in his demeanor ( at least in their minds )?
Not at all. After all, aren’t these the same folks who loved Bill Clinton whose extracurricular activities involved cigars and staining blue dresses in the Oval Office?
Of course, Clinton was beloved by the globalist elites who pull the strings on world governments. He gave them NAFTA, after all. He gave them the WTO. He made tens of billions of dollars for them and their stockholders through these unfair trade deals that cost America five million manufacturing jobs and closed 70,000 factories.
He also gave the military-industrial complex plenty of profit-making military interventions, from Haiti to Bosnia to Serbia and Iraq. Bill Clinton, for all his corruption, delivered the goods for the New World Order.
Donald Trump, of course, never played ball with these globalists. He was elected explicitly on an anti-globalist platform that put America first.
From day one, he started to implement that America-first agenda, earning him the undying enmity of all those whose profits are secured by selling out American workers, American jobs, and America’s national sovereignty.
President Trump pulled us out of the TPP. Billions in lost profits for the globalists.
President Trump pulled us out of the job-destroying Paris Climate Accords. Billions in lost profits for foreign nations like Communist China, at our expense.
President Trump began the process of securing the U.S. border. Billions in lost cheap illegal immigrant labor for the Business Roundtable.
President Trump imposed tariffs on China, becoming the first President ever to address Beijing’s annual $500 billion rape of our economy. Billions in lost profits for corporations who ship our jobs to one of the worst tyrannies on the planet.
President Trump renegotiated NAFTA. Again, billions in lost profits for the cheap labor crowd.
President Trump launched the process of extricating the U.S. from endless foreign wars and avoiding new wars with nations like Iran and North Korea. Billions - perhaps trillions – in lost profits for the globalist war machine.
Is the picture becoming a little clearer?
In each instance, the President’s policies have represented a dramatic upending of the globalist agenda of both parties, the Clinton-Bush-Obama agenda of continuous war and the continuous looting of America’s wealth and hollowing out of the American middle class.
Trump Impeachment Destroyed in One Video
President Donald Trump was just "impeached", no it wasn't because of the supposed Russia collusion which is all we heard about over the last two years from the sold out media, which by the way was proven to be false.
It was because of misconduct or a ‘quid pro quo’ as the media put it, which allegedly occurred during a phone call between president trump and the president of Ukraine.
You know the same Ukraine that was the victim of a bloody coup, carried out under the Obama Administration that ousted the democratically elected government, which then installed a puppet regime and just so happen to airlift all of Ukraine’s gold reserves out of the country?
Right that Ukraine. Most Americans would be shocked if they knew that their country was responsible for and had caused the deaths of 20 to 30 million people since World War Two, a level of carnage approaching that inflicted on Europe by Adolf Hitler himself. In comparison to the millions of innocent lives lost by illegal wars cloaked in the name of democracy, will this current trump impeachment withstand the test of time?
Lets examine a few examples of actual impeachable offenses committed by U.S. Presidents and the perfect example of what they are trying to impeach President Trump for right now.
With both parties and their representatives in Congress beholden to campaign donors whose profits are threatened by Trump’s America-first initiatives, is it no wonder that both Democrats and Never-Trump Republicans are determined to bring this President down?
Most of the mass media is controlled by these same global corporations. After all, doesn’t Amazon’s Jeff Bezos - the richest man in the world – own the Washington Post?
As was said in Watergate, just follow the money. And - while you’re following the money - see if it leads to a $500 million left-wing slush fund run by a shadowy Soros and Clinton-linked group called Arabella Advisors which is funding the anti-Trump political agenda through dozens of high-sounding front groups.
Folks, the New World Order gang is in full retreat all over the globe. From Brexit in the UK to the populist governments of Hungary and Poland to the Yellow Vest movement in France and Salvini in Italy, the middle and working classes are demanding the overthrow of their nation-destroying overlords.
The overlords who have flooded their countries with unassimilable immigrants from North Africa and surrendered their sovereignty to the European Union and its unaccountable bureaucrats in Brussels.
They have lived the unfulfilled promises of the globalists, that giving up national sovereignty and relocating jobs abroadwould usher in a new era of peace and prosperity.
The exact opposite has happened. The globalist vision has resulted in $7 trillion of pointless wars in the Middle East, an immigration crisis, the loss of jobs, and declining standards of living.
In the United States, Donald J. Trump has emerged as the New World Order’s most tenacious and determined foe as he fights the good fight for the American people, our constitutional rights and liberties and the sovereignty of our nation [and The Western world].
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like
Putin?
He is an existential threat to the New World Order. Unlike other Republican presidents of the recent past, he can’t be bought and has no price. Unlike them, he doesn’t give in and he doesn’t give up.
Go ahead, globalists. Try your impeachment games. Try your Senate trials. It won’t work.
In fact, it will backfire on all of you as – after three years of trying to prevent the Electoral College from voting for Trump, stopping the inauguration, unleashing Jim Comey and the FBI, CIA spying, Robert Mueller and his phony Russiagate probe, tax returns, emoluments, Kavanaugh, and all the rest -- the patience of the American public is wearing thin. We aren’t as stupid as you think.
Something you will recognize clearly come November 3, 2020.
Wuhan Coronavirus Pandemic Bioengineered: Who’s Behind It, Why Now And Why China? January 29 2020 | From: StateOfTheNation / Various A Complex Psyop Perpetrated to Distract, Enforce Mandatory Vaccinations and Coerce China to Comply with American Demands.
Everything Points to Biowarfare Being Used Against China by the Western Powers Which Seek to Contain Her Growing Power and Influence in the World.
If there’s one last hit to the economy that China doesn’t need right now, it’s a global pandemic that ‘supposedly’ originated in Wuhan, the sprawling capital of Central China’s Hubei province (see map below with the red marker identifying Wuhan).
See how Wuhan is located right in the center of China’s highly productive southeast region - the economic powerhouse of the nation. This strategic location was selected for the biological attack because of the easily engineered vectors of disease dissemination as depicted by the map above.
Paralyzing China’s economic and financial sectors is, after all, a primary goal of this essentially Anglo-American black operation.
In light of the US-staged Hong Kong protests, U.S. tariff regime against China, threat of economic sanctions against nations working with Huawei, CIA-inflamed Xinjiang conflict involving the Muslim Uyghurs, provocative sailing of US Navy warships through the Taiwan Strait, transparent political prosecution of Huawei’s CFO, ravaging of China’s pig farms by a bioengineered virus, etc., the Chinese government has been under withering attack since 2018.
When so many debilitating assaults are suspiciously happening at once, what can China do except deal with them in a manner so as to expose the true culprits. However, China is not likely to do that in the case of this intensifying bio-war being waged by the West.
The original SARS pandemic that took place in China after the turn of the millennium was also well-known in bio-medical circles as a naked act of biowarfare. Like this year’s coronavirus bio-attack in Wuhan, the bioengineered SARS outbreak also involved a highly coordinated campaign of propaganda and disinformation.
However, the administration of Xi Jinping is much too concerned about the panic that would inevitably result if the populace was informed of a full-blown bioweapon attack. The precipitating chaos would simply overwhelm the government in Beijing which is already on serious overload because of the endless interference by the Anglo-American Axis.
The SARS outbreak that occurred from 2002 to 2003 has already shown that China is not willing to release the hard scientific evidence that proves the premeditated release of a bioengineered coronavirus.
The following excerpt from Wikipedia explains some of the background of SARS - the Severe acute respiratory syndrome epidemic that took place primarily in mainland China and Hong Kong, but also in Canada and other countries.
The rapidly spreading Wuhan coronavirus, also known as Novel coronavirus, that was first reported in 2019 has all the hallmarks of yet another bioengineered virus in a U.S. Military laboratory.
What follows is a short description form Wikipedia of this Novel coronavirus (2019-nCoV).
Time will tell whether this deadly coronavirus was released into the Chinese population with the intent to kill and sicken, scare and intimidate.
The intimidation phase of such an ongoing black operation is certainly aimed at the government in Beijing which refuses to be coerced and threatened by the Trump administration.
Because the highly disruptive, Western-backed Hong Kong protests have yet to yield the result desired by the U.S. State Department, it was only a matter of time before the C.I.A. implemented Plan B…or is this Plan C or D?
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Key Point: The replication process (see diagram above) of this particular coronavirus, and how quickly it mutates and / or adapts to various pharmaceutical treatment regimens, will reveal exactly how this pathogenic microorganism was bioengineered.
The $64,000 question here is:Why is China always the epicenter for so many strains and variations of coronaviruses, influenzas, pneumonia viruses and other highly contagious infection agents that strike the major commercial centers on southeastern mainland.
What’s particularly suspicious about all of these outbreaks in China is that they are each described by the Mainstream Media (MSM) as quite dangerous to human health.
The mortality rate in the beginning of these eventual pandemics is especially high, as if by purposeful design of the bioengineers. In this way, the whole world is eventually drawn into a pandemic melodrama that’s certainly designed to fear-monger.
Hence, more of these endless distractions serve the specific purpose of taking the attention away from real problems caused by governments everywhere.
But it’s the numerous criminal conspiracies at work and shocking scandals that the" elites" seek to cover up by any means possible.
There are relatively few military bioweaponry labs in the world that have the capability to create such a contagious and fatal virus. Thus, when the truth is confirmed about the Wuhan flu, there will be only a few culprits who are behind these assaults against the Chinese people.
In reality, should this Wuhan coronavirus outbreak become a full-blown epidemic in China it could represent an attempt to commit genocide. Likewise, if it becomes a bona fide pandemic, it could ultimately be labeled a crime against humanity, perhaps even genocide.
There are several main pillars of this New World Order agenda, one of which is being stealthily put into place by the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. Likewise, Mark Zuckerberg and Sheryl Sandberg are slowly erecting one of the primary social media pillars as is Tony Dorsey at Twitter and Susan Wojcicki at YouTube.
Bill and Hillary Clinton are using the Clinton Foundation to take advantage of poor countries around the world while surreptitiously laying the foundation for future exploitation on a mass scale just as George Soros & Sons are deceitfully creating new societies via geoengineered climate change, multiculturalism and cultural marxism.
The crucial point is that all of these high-paid globalists are intimately connected to each other and covertly working to advance the same nation-destroying U.N. agendas.
Fabricating global crises is at the very core of these various NWO sub-agendas. Two of the ‘scariest’ manufactured catastrophes are those that severely impact the biosphere (e.g. global warming) and undermine human health (e.g. deadly pandemics).
In this way, false pretexts are being cunningly constructed to justify the establishment of an all-powerful One World Government. Toward that end, the NWO globalist cabal knows that they must first sufficiently manufacture consent so that the people demand a totalitarian form of global governance to manage these public health disasters and environmental catastrophes.
Multi-billionaires such as Bill Gates, Warren Buffet, Mark Zuckerberg and George Soros were all given their fortunes mostly through exorbitant corporate compensation plans, insider trading, currency manipulations, off-shore tax evasion schemes, and other forms of criminal unconscionable enrichment. Once they received those ill-gotten gains, they were completely own by the International Banking Cartel (IBC).
The IBC then directs the expenditures of every single dollar given to these made tycoons, most of which are allocated toward carrying out the NWO implementation plan.
The pet projects listed on the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation website are examples of that nefarious plan.
Of course, the whole world now knows that their pet project is their worldwide Super-Vaccination Agenda, where every single person is vaccinated every year, on time, and micro-chipped accordingly. What better way to completely control the global population?
There is no better way to enforce a mandatory global vaccination schedule than to engineer a frightening pandemic with an exceedingly high mortality rate.
Billions of people will then demand the newly formulated vaccine necessary to protect them from such a fatal infection and/or debilitating disease.
Hence, before anyone receives such a vaccine, it’s important to know that the process REQUIRED to produce such an effective immunization is literally years from the making, if one is possible at all because of how intricately this coronavirus was bio-engineered to elude proper analysis and the necessary experimentation.
“It’s really quite easy for any of the numerous U.S. military bioweapon labs to bioengineer a deadly super-virus and then release it in a city as large as Wuhan, China.
Acts of bioterrorism like this are carried out all the time. As a matter of historical fact, the Spanish flu pandemic of 1918 actually originated at Fort Riley, Kansas where soldiers reported to the Army’s largest training facility during World War I.
The soldiers who were [DELIBERATELY] infected with the H1N1 influenza virus then served as countless vectors of dissemination for the pandemic that ultimately killed as many as 100 million people worldwide.
That single US-executed biowarfare operation against humanity was arguably the deadliest depopulation event in human history.” (
There’s no better way to compel a populace to comply with draconian vaccination regimens than to scare them with the prospect of a deadly pandemic. Governments around the world are constantly under pressure from the New World Order globalist cabal to implement the Super-Vaccination Agenda.
Toward that end, the world community of nations has been repeatedly victimized by manufactured measles outbreaks and ever-worsening flu seasons, so they tell us.
However, there really is much more to this story than meets the eye. Not only was the Wuhan coronavirus surreptitiously disseminated to serve as a major distraction from a rapidly collapsing Global Economic & Financial System, this state-sponsored black operation also represents the worst of predatory capitalism conducted as a means of generating revenue.
Much more significantly, this staged pandemic will be furtively used to exert oppressive international controls on travel as well as impose draconian medical measures which greatly advance the Super-Vaccination Agenda.
Lastly, the timing of the deadly virus that ravaged China’s pig farms last year quite predictably triggered a call for the development of a preventative vaccine.
What the following news report neglected to state was that the mass slaughter of pigs, in a society that demands LOTS of pork, was cynically planned to manufacture the urgent need for yet another vaccine.
Special Note: People, everything points to this bio-terror attack being the BIG ONE (also known as the global depopulation scheme we’ve all been waiting for).
This coronavirus is moving around the globe so fast, and being hyped by the Mainstream Media with such a vengeance, it’s as though this will be their primary tool for total global lockdown.
If the infection rate continues to proliferate into a full-blown pandemic, like The Powers That Be did with the Spanish flu, then this really is the depopulation event many of us have warned about.
This highly misguided and naked act of bio-terrorism could even evolve into an ELE, God forbid. There’s no question that 2020 promises to be a year of pervasive and profound transformation.
The current state of affairs throughout the world cannot continue; it’s far too unstable and explosive. Hence, it’s quite likely that there will be a series of global catalysts that will prompt the necessary changes.
While some of these apocalyptic calamities may seem terrifying at first, ultimately they will serve to contribute to the ongoing planetary catharsis.
Whereas many folks will see all of these End-time crises as being intentionally manufactured by the power elite to save their own skins, REMEMBER, even the Dark Side can only act as the Highest Power permits.
Also remember that, ultimately, “all things work together toward good”.
Nikola Tesla's Technology Has Been Revived January 28 2020 | From: ForbiddenKnowledgeTV / Various
Aaron and Melissa Dykes of TruthstreamMedia were driving outside of Dallas near the small farming town of Milford, Texas, when a strange tower in the middle of a field caught their eye.
It almost seemed like a joke because the shape was unmistakable.
It looked just like Nikola Tesla’s Wardenclyffe Tower, the legendary experimental wireless transmission station he built in 1901 in Shoreham, New York to transmit phone calls, fax images and electrical power but which was demolished 16 years later due to bankruptcy.
A little bit of research revealed that the tower’s owners are Viziv Technologies and that the structure is, in fact a Tesla wireless transmission tower! Viziv is currently reviving the technologies of Nikola Tesla, having;
“Developed a system of patent-pending processes and equipment to efficiently launch the Zenneck surface wave…[which is ] an electromagnetic wave that uses the surface of the earth as a waveguide enabling it to carry communications signals or electrical power efficiently over long distances…”
This discovery leads the Dykes on an investigative journey through FOIA documents into the story of Nikola Tesla, Wardenclyffe Tower, the Philadelphia Experiment and the Montauk Project – and to the military and Big Oil people (and their lawyers) behind Viziv Technologies.
Viziv’s website acknowledges that their technology “has the potential to impact numerous sectors of the economy.”
Indeed, the current planetary financial and energy infrastructure and its millions of jobs and the petrodollar is what has kept the dinosaur fossil fuel model in place for the better part of a century – and all of the horrible things associated with it, from petrochemical toxins in the environment to the psychopathic wars in the Middle East.
As explained by Tesla himself, the Earth is “…like a charged metal ball moving through space”, which creates the enormous, rapidly varying electrostatic forces which diminish in intensity with the square of the distance from Earth, just like gravity. Since the direction of propagation radiates from the earth, the so-called force of gravity is toward earth.
We all know that Nikola Tesla was a man far ahead of his time. Tesla envisioned a future on planet Earth where free energy was available for everyone, but his ideas and inventions went far beyond electricity, and energy.
If it wasn’t for Tesla, we’d probably still have no idea about Radio, Television, AC electricity, Tesla coil, Fluorescent lighting, Neon lighting, Radio control devices, Robotics, X-rays, Radar, Microwaves and dozens of other amazing inventions.
William R. Lyne, a Tesla ‘scholar’ and author of the book “Occult Ether Physics”, states that among the manuscripts found in the scientist’s house were numerous notes on antigravity. In his book, Lyne says that Tesla spent the last years of his life collecting information on a revolutionary propulsion system that would use the ether’s force to mobilize objects.
The writer based his theory on the last lectures given by Tesla, in which he spoke of his latest discoveries, capable of changing all the conceptions related to physics known by man.
Curiously, Tesla’s latest patent, filed in 1928, (#6,555,114) was that for a flying machine that resembled both a helicopter and an airplane.
This vehicle used a revolutionary propulsion system that would have changed everything we knew about flight. Lyne details in his book that during a lecture for the Institute of Immigrant Welfare, Tesla mentioned his Dynamic Theory of Gravity, and that this was: “One of two far-reaching discoveries, which I worked out in all details in the years 1893 and 1894.”
The Dynamic Theory of Gravity - assumed a field of force which accounts for the motions of bodies in space; assumption of this field of force dispenses with the concept of space curvature (ala Einstein); the ether has an indispensable function in the phenomena (of universal gravity, inertia, momentum, and movement of heavenly bodies, as well as all atomic and molecular matter).
A high-level investor friend tells me of rumors that Elon Musk’s Tesla also has its hands on similar technology, which they’re getting ready to release.
Is a new technological era is about to explode publicly?
Are we looking at some good investments that might give us a comfortable retirement?
This technology also looks like how the Internet of Things may eventually be transmitted and Aaron raises the appropriate concerns about the psychoactive, brainwave entrainment and mind control dimensions of this technology, as part of how it can be weaponized.
Aaron says, “In the next 10 or 20 years, it may change the way that we live. What do you think about that?”
The details in this video are better than this write-up! Aaron and Melissa do such consistently vital and compelling work and this piece is a great example.
George Soros In Davos: 2020 Election Will Determine 'Fate Of The World' + Trump At Davos: “The Great American Comeback” January 27 2020 | From: Breitbart / OneWorld / Various
Left-wing billionaire George Soros on Thursday reportedly warned that the 2020 election will determine the “fate of the world” and lashed out at President Donald Trump during a private dinner event at the World Economic Forum in Davos, Switzerland.
“When his fantasy of becoming president became a reality,” his ego swelled, Soros said, adding: “This has turned his narcissism into a malignant disease.”
Soros, who has yet to endorse a 2020 Democrat candidate, then said that this year’s election will decide the “fate of the world,” CNBC reports. In October, the billionaire argued White House contender Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) is the “most qualified to be president,” but stopped short of formally throwing his support behind her.
This, of course, is not the first time the hedge fund manager has taken aim at President Trump at the World Economic Forum.
Last year, Soros criticized the president’s negotiating style against China, which culminated in the signing of a phase one trade agreement last Wednesday.
“Regrettably, President Trump seems to be following a different course: Make concessions to China and declare victory while renewing his attacks on U.S. allies,” Soros said at the time. “This is liable to undermine the U.S. policy objective of curbing China’s abuses and excesses.”
At this year’s event, Soros also lambasted Chinese Communist Party leader Xi Jinping for his government’s use of a totalitarian social credit scoring system on Chinese citizens. Xi is using “artificial intelligence to have total control of his people,” Soros warned. He also mused that China’s president is “trying to exploit” President Trump on trade.
These remarks follow President Trump’s speech before the World Economic Forum, in which he touted his America First economic policies as a model for global prosperity.
“A nation’s highest duty is to its own citizens,”the president told attendees.
“Honoring this truth is the only way to build faith and confidence in the market system. Only when governments put their own people first will people be fully invested in their national futures.”
“A pro-worker, pro-citizen, pro-family agenda demonstrates how a nation can thrive when its communities, its companies, its government work together for the good of the whole nation,” he added.
President Trump also used the speech to reject climate alarmism, which loomed large over this year’s event, partly due to teen climate activist Greta Thunberg’s attendance.
“These alarmists always demand the same thing – absolute power to dominate, transform, and control every aspect of our lives,” the president stated.
“We’re committed to conserving the majesty of God’s creation and the natural beauty of our world.”
The theme of Trump's second Davos speech during his presidency was what he described at the beginning of his talk as "The Great American Comeback", a point that he returned to time and again to emphasize the fact that he fulfilled his promise to "Make America Great Again".
The American President rattled off a dizzying array of statistics for the majority of his speech to hammer home the point that the US economy has never been better.
Whether it's the record-high stock market or record-low minority unemployment, the end effect is what he proudly trumpeted as a "blue-collar boom" that he insists has been nothing but beneficial for his people.
The reader can skim through his speech for additional details such as the fact that 25% of all foreign direct investment in the first half of last year went to the US if they're interested in learning about all of his accomplishments thus far, but the point of this article is to analyze the larger theme of his speech so the author doesn't believe that there's any reason to needlessly take up space by republishing each and every statistic when they're easily accessible in the previous hyperlink.
The essence of "The Great American Comeback" is embodied in the parts of the speech where Trump implicitly touches on his ideology.
The key components thereof are his belief that "a nation's highest duty is to its citizens", ergo why he's focused on pursuing what he described as a "pro-worker, pro-citizen, pro-family agenda (which) demonstrates how a nation can thrive when its communities, its companies, its government, and its people work together for the good of the whole nation."
He's advanced his vision through several key policies. In his own words, "I knew that if we unleashed the potential of our people, if we cut taxes, slashed regulations - and we did that at a level that’s never been done before in the history of our country, in a short period of time - fixed broken trade deals and fully tapped American energy, that prosperity would come thundering back at a record speed."
This contrasts with his fear of "radical socialists" [Cabal] who he says are plotting to "destroy our economy, wreck our country, or eradicate our liberty", especially under the cover of the climate issue which he regards as a scam for seizing "absolute power to dominate, transform, and control every aspect of our lives."
Elaborating on his four main policy pillars, he told the audience how he "passed the largest package of tax cuts and reforms in American history."
As for slashing regulations, he bragged that "for every new regulation adopted, we are removing eight old regulations".
His global trade negotiations are well known, but Trump reminded everyone about his achievements with China, the USMCA that was formerly known as NAFTA, Japan, and South Korea, as well as his plans to reach a similar deal with the post-Brexit UK.
On the topic of fully tapping American energy, Trump told the world that his country "is now, by far, the number-one producer of oil and natural gas anywhere in the world", which has correspondingly freed up its foreign policy from its former dependence on the Mideast and hence why he encouraged the Europeans to follow suit by purchasing American resources in order to do the same vis-a-vis that region as well as Russia by innuendo.
Altogether, these four interconnected policies are most responsible for "The Great American Comeback".
In terms of the bigger picture, it can be said that the US' domestic and foreign policy gains have been greatly advanced through the economic means that were described.
Even if one disagrees with them for reasons of ideology, there's no denying that they've been extremely effective in promoting America's interests.
In fact, it can even be said that Trump himself doesn't even regard any of this through an ideological prism except for example his opposition to socialism since this billionaire businessmen understands it all as simply being the most pragmatic policies to implement.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
Of course, the argument can be made that he's such a "capitalist ideologue" that he takes his ideology for granted and doesn't even recognize that he has one, but in any case, it's the ultimate outcome more so than the intent that counts.
The US is truly experiencing "The Great American Comeback" even if everything obviously isn't perfect nor likely ever will be by virtue of the system in which it's operating, but the country's recent gains in aggregate are comparatively better than anyone else's.
After all, the American marketplace is so important for the rest of the global economy that Trump has been able to easily leverage access to it through primary and secondary sanctions/tariffs in order to achieve serious foreign policy objectives vis-a-vis his rivals.
None of those states on the receiving end of this strategy have been able to successfully replicate it against others of a similar size, except perhaps China to an extent through its reciprocal tariffs that eventually resulted in restarting the "trade war" negotiations that have thus far led to "phase one" of a more comprehensive trade deal between the two.
Even so, China hasn't weaponized its economy against others without provocation because of the fear that this would reduce confidence in its Belt & Road Initiative (BRI) which aims to establish a Community of Common Destiny with time.
The US, meanwhile, only aims to retain its hegemonic role in the global system as opposed to completely revolutionizing its structural foundations like the rising underdog of China aspires to do, which therefore enables it to be much more "flexible" with is strategies since it doesn't depend on soft power anywhere near as much as its rival.
All told, "The Great American Comeback" has both domestic and international implications, each of which are connected to this game-changing development that's entirely attributable to Trump's economic policy ("ideology").
By unleashing the full power of the American economy through tax cuts, deregulations, renegotiated trade deals, and energy independence, the President has successfully fulfilled his promise to "Make America Great Again" even if the outcome obviously isn't perfect nor ever will be.
The point in emphasizing all of this is simply to draw attention to the fact that he's been extremely effective in implementing his agenda regardless of whether one supports it or not for whatever their reasons may be.
Refusing to recognize this reality, as is regrettably the norm in the Alt-Media Community, is the definition of "Trump Derangement Syndrome".
While his supporters only have to pat themselves on the back, his detractors need to have an objective understanding of what he's accomplished if they seriously attain to challenge it one way or another be it on the domestic and/or foreign policy fronts, yet few have reached that point of political maturity.
ClimateChangeGate: The Hidden Agenda Behind The Huge Hoax And Global Criminal Conspiracy & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures
January 26 2020 | From: StateOfTheNation / ClimateScienceNews / Various Climate Change Hoax Exposed as Massive Money-Making Scam and Global Control Scheme.
The whole world has been suffering tremendously from a highly premeditated and complex hoax initially known asGlobal Warming.
When this carefully packaged fraud did not pan out, the New World Order globalist cabal repackaged the unparalleled scam as Climate Change.
What is critical to understand is that the globalist perps have been stealthily geoegineering climate change for decades so that it will appear to be taking place in a much worse way.
Clearly, there is unprecedented atmospheric flux occurring planet-wide, but the geoengineers are manufacturing it on a regular basis.
A daily look at the sky presents the most obvious evidence as to how they are conducting solar radiation management and water vapor production (H2O is the most abundant greenhouse gas) via chemical engineering techniques.
The planet has been experiencing wild and wacky weather for decades now; however, it’s the geoengineers who are primarily responsible for the unprecedented meteorological chaos. And then, there are solar infulences.
There are other valid reasons for both the unpredictable weather and climate chaos tormenting planet Earth. Most of these scientifically proven factors are well explained in the following extended essay.
Global Warming
The Global Warming narrative actually began quite naturally, but was then quite purposefully hijacked and manipulated by malevolent forces determined to dominate the entire planetary civilization. As follows:
The Back Story:
This is what TPTB did. They saw that the planet had entered a period of natural and very gradual global warming.
This occurred during World War II when they had to track the weather very closely for wartime purposes.
The steady warming of the planet paralleled the same period when the Oil & Gas Industry really began to take off and the global population explosion first began.
At the time when the data really started to pour in, the warming was just a “small campfire” … this was early on, right after World War II. Soon after they first made those observations about the slow warming of the planet, the decision was made to turn the little campfire into a raging wildfire.
They experimented with HAARP and used chemtrails and other advanced geoengineering technologies to ramp up the heat worldwide.
Eventually the wildfire of global warming was stoked sufficiently so that full-blown forest fires, brush fires and grass fires were jumping off anywhere and everywhere.
In this way, the synthetic component of Global Warming was fabricated on top of a very real phase of planetary heating.
The next part of their plan was to fabricate the patently false narrative known as the human activity CO2-driven climate change scam.
Only with this correct understanding can the true depth and breadth of the furtive NWO plot to take over the world be properly comprehended and responded to.
But, first, it’s important to be aware of the financial and economic, fiscal and commercial drivers of this massive out-of-control Climate Change juggernaut rolling across the 7 continents.
For it is the secret society of banksters known as the International Banking Cartel and their “Global Money-Making Scam”, that is continuously co-opting Fortune 1000 corporations and national governments, which is at the heart of this “Huge Hoax”.
Solar Variability and Climate: Professor Joanna D. Haigh
Joanna D. Haigh on the ‘little ice age’, solar radiation, and global warming.
There is another major component to this geoengineered Climate Change fraud.
Extreme weather events are now routinely geoengineered and weaponized into what are essentially false flag weather attacks. This highly destructive and deadly type of weather warfare is being used for several reasons.
First and foremost among them is the NWO manufactured need to advertise Climate Change as a real threat to humanity.
What better way to do this than to let loose a plague of violent superstorms, debilitating drought and deluges, as well as other devastating weather events around the globe.
This is how Mother Earth is being blamed for the “meteorological mayhem via false flags” that are really manufactured by the globalist-directed geoengineers.
In this way, nations everywhere are being misled in the camp of Climate Change whose fanatics are desperate to stop weather flux, some of which are totally natural, but most of which are manmade.
The following irrefutable and highly perceptive statement was made by Catholic nun and PhD scientist Rosalie Bertell in her ground-breaking book titled “Planet Earth, the Latest Weapon of War”.
It should also be noted that much of the weather warfare is being aimed at locations that have been targeted by the NWO cabal for specific reasons - political and governmental, economic and financial.
For example, two of the most destructive superstorms on to hit North America on record have occurred within the past couple of years. Behind each of these calamitous weather attacks were hidden agendas that are explained in detail in the exposés posted below (See Related Articles section.)
In point of fact, the geoengineers are now systematically taking control of natural storms, or fabricating them from scratch and amping them up into megastorms, just before slamming them into a targeted city, state or region of a country.
In this manner, nations are either compelled to stay on the NWO reservation, or coerced to comply with a cabal dictate that significantly advances their NWO agenda.
There is perhaps nothing more damning in the official record that proves the existence of this immense conspiracy to defraud humanity than the CIA’s memo titled “The Need For A Climate Control Study Program”.
The preceding CIA document from 1960 outlines the plan and ‘need’ for large-scale climate control initiatives with both civil and military applications.
Knowing that weather changes in the last few decades have been planned and then actualized confirms that CO2 itself is not to blame for the now pervasive weather upheavals.
In their own words, we now know that the profound weather disorder was effectuated according to a master plan.
The key element of that NWO conspiracy was to create a new global bogeyman - Climate Change - that would sufficiently unite the world community of nations so that every country would eventually demand a One World Government.
It is surely no coincidence that this top-secret and highly consequential government report first began to take shape in 1963, not long as the aforementioned CIA document was produced.
Clearly, this exceedingly elaborate and far-reaching conspiracy to deceive the Western people was designed by the World Shadow Government as a means of coming out of their closet.
For their ultimate goal is to rule the world via a totalitarian and tyrannical government not too unlike the European Union, where citizens still think they have a voice but in reality they do not.
Toward that end, the primary purpose of a One World Government would be to act as the enforcement arm of the International Banking Cartel that greedily covets all of the natural resources on the planet.
This is my most concise expose of climate fraud. Please pass it around to everyone you know and your elected officials. The video is short, but cuts right to the heart of the matter.
The NWO globalists know that they must also completely control the weather worldwide because of its enormous impacts on the land, sea and air.
Hence, numerous geoengineering experiments are now being covertly conducted on the land masses, in the oceans and throughout the atmosphere as a prelude to their future world domination.
The Carbon Control Matrix, which was fastidiously developed as a reaction to the fake Global Warming narrative, is just one glaring example of how the One World Government will react to these contrived crises.
The clandestine standing armies now supported by the U.N. will be used to police the panoply of new laws and statutes, rules and regulations, taxes and surcharges that are coming down the pike.
This is also why the various “agendas” were deceptively inaugurated by the United Nations.
For instance, Agenda 21, the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development and Vision 2050 were each implemented as a means to prepare (and especially program) governments and citizenries alike for this rapidly unfolding NWO paradigm.
The current trend of Climate Change hysteria will only get worse. The globalists have never been so desperate to foist their warped vision on all of humankind.
2019 saw an extraordinary uptick in meticulously staged events, each designed to over-dramatize the utterly bogus yet thoroughly captivating Global Warming fiction.
Here’s just one example of how far the globalists will go to pull of this “Con of the Millennium”.
What the patriots can do in order to thwart this juvenile attempt to corral every inhabitant of the planet into the Climate Change pen of compliance is to disseminate information like this.
The more aware folks are everywhere of this demonic connivance, the more difficult for the perps at the top of the food chain to succeed.
In other words, shining the light of awareness on their exceedingly misguided project is the best way to terminate it.
The Truth Movement ought to come together in such numbers so that the raw people power poses a massive and monolithic countervailing force to their unending insanity.
“The climate change hoax is the most complex and convoluted criminal conspiracy in world history. The global warming scam is - BY FAR - the biggest boondoggle ever.
There’s not even a close second. What the globalists did, early on, was to entice everyone into some aspect of this fraudulent business venture.
The International Banking Crime Syndicate made sure everyone thought they could get a piece of the action.
Once they did, and it’s still going on, it was just a matter of executing the climate ruse. Then, anyone without a conscience eagerly joined the climate change club."- Intelligence Analyst & Former U.S Military Officer
Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures
The climate change hoax has collapsed. A devastating series of research papers has just been published, revealing that human activity can account for no more than a .01°C rise in global temperatures, meaning that all the human activity targeted by radical climate change alarmists - combustion engines, airplane flights, diesel tractors - has virtually no measurable impact on the temperature of the planet.
The paper explains that IPCC analysis of global temperatures suffers from a glaring error - namely, failure to account for “influences of low cloud cover” and how it impacts global temperatures.
Natural variations in low cloud cover, which are strongly influenced by cosmic radiation’s ability to penetrate Earth’s atmosphere due to variations in the strength of our planet’s magnetosphere, account for nearly all changes in global temperature, the researchers explain.
As this chart reveals, more cloud cover is inversely related to temperature. In other words, clouds shield the surface of the Earth from the sun, providing shade cover cooling, while a lack of clouds results in more warming:
Cloud Cover Accounts for the Real Changes in Global Temperatures
This is further supported by researchers at Kobe University in Japan who published a nearly simultaneous paper that reveals how changes in our planet’s magnetic field govern the intensity of solar radiation that reaches the lower atmosphere, causing cloud formation that alters global temperatures.
"Records of suborbital-scale climate variation during the last glacial and Holocene periods can be used to elucidate the mechanisms of rapid climate changes…
At least one event was associated with a decrease in the strength of the Earth’s magnetic field.
Thus, climate records from the MIS 19 interglacial can be used to elucidate the mechanisms of a variety of climate changes, including testing the effect of changes in geomagnetic dipole field strength on climate through galactic cosmic ray (GCR)-induced cloud formation…"
In effect, cosmic rays which are normally deflected via the magnetosphere are, in times of weak or changing magnetic fields emanating from Earth itself, able to penetrate further into Earth’s atmosphere, causing the formation of low-level clouds which cover the land in a kind of “umbrella effect” that shades the land from the sun, allowing cooling to take place.
But a lack of clouds makes the surface hotter, as would be expected. This natural phenomenon is now documented to be the primary driver of global temperatures and climate, not human activity.
A New Climate Religion for Idiots There is no evidence that CO2 drives climate change, never mind human-generated CO2 which is 3% - 5% of total CO2. The ice-core data that exists demonstrates the opposite; that temperature change drives changes in CO2 levels.
The Climate Crisis is about controlling us not controlling CO2.
Burn all the oil you want, in other words, and it’s still just a drop in the bucket compared to the power of the sun and other cosmic influences. All the fossil fuel consumption in the world barely contributes anything to actual global temperatures, the researchers confirmed.
As they explain, the IPCC’s climate models are wildly overestimating the influence of carbon dioxide on global temperatures:
"…the [IPCC] models fail to derive the influences of low cloud cover fraction on the global temperature.
A too small natural component results in a too large portion for the contribution of the greenhouse gases like carbon dioxide.
That is why J. KAUPPINEN AND P. MALMI IPCC represents the climate sensitivity more than one order of magnitude larger than our sensitivity 0.24°C.
Because the anthropogenic portion in the increased CO2 is less than 10%, we have practically no anthropogenic climate change. The low clouds control mainly the global temperature."
The Entire “Climate Change” Hoax is a Fraud
Carbon dioxide, in other words, isn’t the “pollutant” that climate change alarmists have long claimed it to be.
CO2 won’t destroy the planet and barely has any effect on global temperatures (the IPCC’s estimate of its effect is, according to Finnish researchers, about one order of magnitude too large, or ten times the actual amount).
In fact, NASA was forced to recently admit that carbon dioxide is re-greening the Earth on a massive scale by supporting the growth of rainforests, trees and grasslands. See these maps showing the increase in green plant life, thanks to rising CO2:
Click on the image above to view a largre version in a new window
Importantly, reducing our global consumption of fossil fuels will have virtually no impact on global temperatures.
The far bigger governor of climate and temperatures is the strength and configuration of Earth’s magnetosphere, which has always been in flux since the formation of the planet billions of years ago.
The weaker the magnetosphere, the more cosmic rays penetrate the atmosphere, resulting in the generation of clouds, which shield the planet’s surface from the sun.
Thus, a weaker magnetosphere causes global cooling, while a stronger magnetosphere results in global warming, according to this research. This phenomenon is called the “Svensmark Effect.”
"This suggests that the increase in cosmic rays was accompanied by an increase in low-cloud cover, the umbrella effect of the clouds cooled the continent, and Siberian high atmospheric pressure became stronger.
Added to other phenomena during the geomagnetic reversal - evidence of an annual average temperature drop of 2-3 degrees Celsius, and an increase in annual temperature ranges from the sediment in Osaka Bay - this new discovery about winter monsoons provides further proof that the climate changes are caused by the cloud umbrella effect."
The “War on Carbon” is Derived from Sheer Stupidity, Arrogance and Scientific Illiteracy
The extreme alarmism of climate change lunatics - best personified by Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’ insistence thathumanity will be destroyed in 12 years if we don’t stop burning fossil fuels - is all based on nothing but fearmongering media propaganda and faked science. (The IPCC and NOAA both routinely fudge temperature data to try to create a warming “trend” where none exists.)
It’s all a massive, coordinated fraud, and the mainstream media deliberately lies to the public about climate change to push anti - free market schemes that would destroy the U.S. economy while transferring literally trillions of dollars into the pockets of wealthy globalists as part of a “carbon tax” scheme.
Yet carbon isn’t the problem at all. And the “war on carbon” is a stupid, senseless policy created by idiots, given that humans are carbon-based lifeforms, meaning that any “war on carbon” is a war on humanity.
Why Carbon Dioxide is the "Miracle Molecule of Life" for Greening our Planet
Why People Get Addicted To Drugs (Or Other Things) January 25 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
In most countries around the world, drug addicts are considered to be criminals. As a result, they are usually treated with contempt and, if they're caught using drugs, they're locked behind bars.
But why exactly do people get addicted to drugs or other things, such as food, porn, video games and social media?
Globally, tens of millions of people are addicted to drugs. Because of their addiction, many of them lose all that they have: Τheir health, their wealth, their relationships, and often their lives.
Yet nothing can force them out of their addiction. Although they know that drugs are harmful, they still keep on taking them. So, the question is, why do they do that?
Our society considers drug addicts as irresponsible, stupid and immoral. Psychological research, however, shows something very different: Τhat they are deeply hurt individuals who are trying to find relief from their suffering.
They are people who were abused - sexually, physically or emotionally - usually during their very early childhood. They are mostly men and women who were unloved, neglected or abandoned during their formative years.
As a result of their traumatic experiences, drug addicts feel a sense of inner lack - a lack of love, joy, meaning and purpose - and try to fill it through substance abuse.
Whether by drinking alcohol, sniffing cocaine or injecting heroin into their bodies, all they try to achieve is to experience a sense of comfort, a sense of inner peace, a sense of control over their lives.
The problem is, the exhilarating psychological effects of drugs are always short-lived. While they last, it feels incredibly good, but within minutes or at most hours, they start to fade away. And then the pain returns. In fact, it never returns - it was already there, hidden yet present. And it feels unbearable.
When this happens, drug addicts feel drawn to psychotropic substances again.
But no matter how many of them they take, they’re never enough to satisfy their needs. Hence, they inevitably lead to the exact same result. And the cycle of addiction repeats itself one more time.
The reason why drugs don’t work in the long run is because they don’t address the root cause of addiction: the sense of emptiness inside.
On the contrary, they only offer an external substitute of what the addict is really looking for: to feel worthy and complete.
The Buddhists have a mandala called Wheel of Life, which divides human existence into six different realms - each representing our various ways of being.
One of those realms is the Realm of Hungry Ghosts. The inhabitants of that realm are depicted as creatures with long scrawny necks, tiny mouths, skinny limbs and big, bloated, empty bellies.
“This,” addiction expert Gabor Maté says,“is the domain of addiction, where we constantly seek something outside ourselves to curb an insatiable yearning for relief or fulfillment.
The aching emptiness is perpetual because the substances, objects or pursuits we hope will soothe it are not what we really need.
We don’t know what we need, and so long as we stay in the hungry ghost mode, we’ll never know. We haunt our lives without being fully present.”
A monk prays for a hungry ghost. From the Kyoto National Museum
Now, when we think of addiction, most of us tend to think specifically of drug addiction.
But addiction can be to anything: food, money, possessions, porn, video games, social media and so on. And whether we realize it or not, many of us are addicted to at least one of them - some more, others less.
Food can provide us with a fleeting sense of fulfillment. Money can provide us with a fleeting sense of power. Possessions can provide us with a fleeting sense of security. Porn can provide us with a fleeting sense of intimacy.
Video games can provide us with a fleeting sense of adventure. And social media can provide us with a fleeting sense of connection.
But, again, no matter how many of those things we consume or acquire, in the end they always let us down, because they can’t give us what we truly deep down long for.
Often, we try to deal with addiction by fighting against it. We restrict our caloric intake, we renounce money and possessions, we repress our sexual urges, and so on, not realizing that addiction is merely a symptom of an underlying disease, and not the cause of it.
Hence, we can’t get rid of it. On the contrary, we usually find that we crave even more what we deprive ourselves of. In other words, our addiction becomes stronger, not weaker.
When it comes to drug addiction, we collectively try to deal with it by waging war against drugs and their users. How exactly? By legally punishing those we find to possess them, in an effort to control their circulation and consumption.
But we never ask: Why do people get hooked to drugs in the first place?
If we did, we’d see that drug addicts are mentally ill people who need help, not criminals who should be locked in jail.
We’d also find out that our society is structurally breeding mental illness and addiction through systems that lead to oppression and social alienation.
But those in power don’t want us to know about that, afraid that otherwise we’d kick them out of power, and dismantle the systems that brought them into it.
So they choose to misdirect our attention. By demonizing drugs and drug addicts, they make us forget what truly matters.
It’s no wonder, therefore, that so many people are addicted to drugs, regardless of the harsh drug laws in place in most countries around the world.
To treat drug addiction, or any other form of addiction, we need to stop fighting against it and instead try to understand it.
In addition, we need to stop judging or punishing those who suffer from it, and instead start treating them with respect and compassion.
Then and only then will we be able to figure out where addiction really comes from, as well as το support addicts in their journey to recovery and healing.
The Incredible Hidden Life Of Trees January 24 2020 | From: UpliftConnect
Seven amazing facts you may not know: Trees have captured the human imagination since the beginning of time. Watching their cycles of growth, shedding of leaves, and re-flowering in the spring, people have long perceived trees as powerful symbols of life, death, and renewal.
We look to them for inspiration when we need grounding energy, as their roots descending deep into the Earth remind us of our own connection to and dependence on our planet for stability and life. Trees live for hundreds or even thousands of years, and so we revere them as keepers of past secrets and sentinels of the future.
Related:A Biologist Believes That Trees Speak A Language We Can Learn
Forests cover one-third of the Earth’s landmass. They provide a home to at least 80% of land-based plants, animals, and insects. Trees are one of our main defenses against climate change, as they balance our air by absorbing carbon dioxide from human activities and turning it into oxygen; they also protect watersheds by holding our soil in place.
In honor of the International Day of Forests on March 21, here are seven incredible facts about the hidden life of trees.
Trees have captured the human imagination since the beginning of time.
1. Pando, or the Trembling Giant
Pando is a grove of approximately 47,000 quaking aspen trees in Utah. This remarkable group of trees is considered a single organism, because all the trees share a single root system and each tree is genetically identical. New trees are produced by sprouting from the massive parent root system.
It is estimated that Pando has been alive at least 80,000 years, making it one of the oldest living things on the planet.
Consider that when this tree colony first sprouted from the ground, humans would still not arrive on North America for another 50,000 years. In some parts of the planet, Neanderthal people were still 30,000 years from going extinct.
The 106-acre grove of trees has seen unimaginable changes, living through the ice age and at times being completely burnt down above ground, but surviving and renewing itself below ground.
2. More than 25% of Western Pharmaceuticals Originate in Rainforest Plants
There are 3,000 plants currently recognized by the U.S. National Cancer Institute as active against cancer cells, and 70% of these come from rainforests. Perhaps this is why the shamans of the Amazon believe that for every human ailment, the rainforest holds a cure.
And yet, only 1% of all rainforest plants have actually been studied (by modern science) for medicinal purposes. Imagine how many valuable healing plants are destroyed or even made extinct as the rainforests are cleared at a rate of 1.5 acres per second. Due to rainforest destruction, the Earth loses approximately 137 species of plants, animals, and insects per day.
3. Not All Rainforests are in Tropical Zones
The Pacific Temperate Rainforest is the largest remaining coastal temperate rainforest on Earth. It is situated along the Pacific Coast and stretches from Northern California up to the Prince William Sound in Alaska.
It is characterized by high amounts of rainfall, more than 10 feet per year in some areas; and in many places the forest grows right up to the shoreline. It includes the Great Bear Rainforest in western Canada, home to the Spirit Bear, a rare subspecies of black bear with a white coat.
A National Geographic article about the Great Bear Rainforest states: “Grizzlies, black bears, wolves, wolverines, humpback whales, and orcas thrive along a coast that has been home to First Nations like the Gitga’at for hundreds of generations.
It’s a spooky, wild, mysterious place: There are wolves here that fish. Deer that swim. Western red cedar trees that have stood a thousand years or more. And a black bear that is white.”
Alt text hereSpirit bear in the Great Bear Rainforest
4. In Many Cultures, it is Believed That Hugging a Tree Releases Negative Energy From the Human Body
Many people believe that trees, like humans and all living things, possess an energetic vibration and an aura. Because trees’ vibrations are slower and deeply connected to the Earth through their roots, connecting with trees can help us to feel safe, secure, and stable.
Most would agree that a walk in the forest or even simply gazing at a tree provides a deep feeling of peace and serenity, and can be emotionally and psychologically healing.
5. People in Malaysia Maintain a Very Intimate Relationship With Trees
Among the Sng’oi indigenous people, a person and a tree can belong together, and this relationship is maintained for life. When a person belongs with a tree, they also belong with its offspring: any trees that grow from the seeds of the first tree, no matter how far they become scattered.
Also in Malaysia, trees are planted around houses so closely that the walls of the homes may give way to the growing roots. In the graveyards, the trees are allowed to take root into graves, and it is said that the trees whisper prayers to the creator asking for the forgiveness of sins of those buried in that place.
These practices speak to an ancient knowing that people and trees are intimately interconnected throughout life and forever in history.
Hugging a tree can release negative energy from the bodyHugging a tree can release negative energy from the body
6. Trees are Literally Saving our Lives Every Day
A July 2014 study showed that trees prevent $6.8 billion per year in averted health costs annually, just in the United States. It is estimated that by removing massive amounts of air pollution through their leaves, trees “prevented 850 human deaths and 670,000 cases of acute respiratory symptoms in 2010 alone.”
Studies show that trees in urban areas are removing 4 to 8 times the pollution from the air as their equivalents in rural areas.
This highlights the importance of planting trees everywhere we possibly can, and especially in highly-populated areas where pollution is highest.
Trees are saving our livesTrees are an important part of our lives
7. Trees in a Forest Communicate With One Another Through Underground Networks
Trees are connected below the ground by mycorrhizal fungi, which live symbiotically with the roots of the trees. Both the trees and the fungi need each other to survive. But that’s not all. Because the fungi essentially connect the roots of one tree to another, the trees can use the fungi to pass nutrients to one another.
So, for example, in winter when aspens are weaker, nearby conifers were found to pass additional nutrients to the aspens to keep them healthy. Similarly, older, more-established trees pass nutrients through the fungi to young seedlings which need to grow larger toward the sun’s light in order to survive.
The largest, oldest trees in the forest serve as the hub because they possess and produce large amounts of resources, and their massive roots spread out in all directions.
When one tree is attacked by insects, it distributes pheromonal chemicals through the fungi beneath the soil to warn nearby trees of a possible attack so the other trees can prepare by changing the chemical makeup of their leaves. The fungal networks also strengthen the immune systems of the trees.
So not only do different species of trees help each other out in the forest, but fungi and even other types of plants join the underground network and communicate together to support the health of the entire ecosystem.
There is documented proof that when a tree is dying, it releases its resources into the root networks so that its neighbors can benefit from the nourishment that it will no longer need - it is making the ultimate sacrifice.
Trees communicate with each other below the groundTrees communicate with each other below the ground
In closing, here is a beautiful poem written by Clare Dakin of TreeSisters, which will help you to deepen your connection with trees and with all of nature:
Let the birds take your clothes
Let the waves undo your holding back
Let the vines unravel your tired mind
And the earth savour your sweat and tears.
Let your stories burn off like rising mist,
As your past and the false floors of curbed self love
Dissolve into butterfly wings and fire flies
As your edges blur and your Planetary Self ignites.
Let the trees bathe your breath
Let the meadows embrace you
Let the mountains and the bees remind you
Let the sky flood in and allow the clouds to guide you.
Let your undoing be as total
As your becoming is beautiful –
And when the living world has climbed inside
Enough for you to feel four legs, scales and wings.
May you finally know yourself alive as all things –
Indivisible and responsible
Reborn into wholeness
Natural, Sacred and Wild
~ Clare Dakin
This 1926 Eugenics Exhibit Sums Up What The Elite Think About You And Your Family
January 23 2020 | From: HumansAreFree / Various This is an exhibit about Eugenics, dated 1926.
According to eugenics, “some people are born to be a burden on the rest”.
You see, the eugenics movement - which steadily gained popularity for the first nearly 40 years of the 20th century and is the direct reason for forced sterilization laws implemented across America - sought to “breed out” people the elite that ultimately funded and promoted it (the Carnegie Institute and the Rockefeller Foundation, etc.) determined were genetically defective “riff raff” by way of pseudoscience parading as science.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Victims of eugenics included minorities, the children of Caucasians who interbred with minorities, poor people, people with physical disabilities or who were considered “feeble-minded,” those who were deemed “delinquent,” and really, the list goes on and on (the slope got more and more slippery over time).
Eugenics only disappeared from public view when the PR disaster of World War II forced it to.
Guess it looked pretty bad after the Nazis began so heavily promoting it.
Aside from the Eugenics Record Office set up at Cold Spring Harbor on Long Island, the movement would train and send field workers around the country to take family pedigrees and compile data used to argue who had good breeding or not and who deserved the right to reproduce or not.
They set up exhibits at county fairs for “public education” on eugenic matters.
They would even sponsor contests called “Better Baby” and “Fitter Family” at these fairs to judge “human stock” the way other organizations attending county fairs judged other things like prize pigs and heirloom tomatoes.
The poster shown at the start of this article is from one such eugenics educational exhibit. It featured lights that flashed at specific intervals to demonstrate different “facts” about the types of babies being born in the U.S.
Just consider the gall of that statement for a moment.
These eugenicists - the elite of society who funded this movement - only considered “about 4%” of all Americans to be “high grade”.
And truly, those are the people the elite eugenicists wanted to breed more of while using twisted, fake science to justify getting rid of everyone else.
As far as they were concerned, everyone else not in that 4% should either be sterilized or, at the very least, laws should be passed where they would be forced to apply to the government for permission first before they would be allowed to procreate.
We still have people like Bill Gates pushing his paralyzing polio vaccines in countries were polio is supposedly eradicated anyway and paralyzing African-only meningitis vaccines, while people like Richard Dawkins go around saying all babies who test positive for potentially having Down’s Syndrome in the womb should be automatically aborted because it would be immoral for their mothers not to do so. (That’s just to name a few).
We’re continually bathed in the idea that we’re expendable. Modern society goes like this: we’re just slightly higher animals than other animals floating around on a rock in a vast, empty nothingness with no higher meaning or purpose to any of it. Oh, and there are too many of us, too.
The system has us divided and conquered, fighting with each other all the time over one thing or another while the evil eugenicist elites have positioned themselves at the top to continue raping and killing us through various industrial- complexes (military, prison, medical, agricultural, etc.).
Meanwhile, fighting with each other over silly things like manufactured politics or skin color, they have us running for the “cure” which doesn’t cure anything while we overlook the cause.
It’s a rule-by-experts scientific dictatorship in a time when the government and rich psychopaths own, steer, and weaponize all the meaningful science to begin with. “The game is rigged,” as comedian George Carlin would say.
So why do we even keep playing it? It’s their box, their Matrix, not ours.
The reality is we have been dehumanized so much more by now than we were during the days of open eugenics in the first half of the 20th century.
The elite probably don’t even consider 4% of us “high grade” at this point.
“About 4%.” That one exhibit says it all.
Hidden History: The Eugenics Record Office Is for Sale
Five Historical Vaccine Scandals Suppressed By The Establishment & FDA Admits Vaccines Contaminated With Serious Viruses Including Cancer + Measles Vaccination Is Not Protecting Against Measles
January 20 2020 | From: GlobalFreedomMovement / PrinicipiaScientific / GisbornedHerald / Various “89% of doctors rely on drug company salesmen for their information.” - The Australian Doctor 1989.
Contentions around vaccines - and vaccine fraud - are not a recent development....
1. Frauds of the Founding Father – Basic Truths About Jenner
Here’s number 1 of our 5 historical vaccine scandals.
Edward Jenner (1749 – 1823) has been lauded as a medical pioneer and saver of the lives of millions for supposedly developing the earliest crude forms of vaccination, but is he really all that? Was he even an original thinker? See for yourself.
Jenner set up practice as a “surgeon” in Berkeley in the 1700s but he, in fact, did not earn the title of “doctor” at all. Jenner’s history is actually quite amusing. Dr Walter Hadwen, JP, MD, LRCP, MRCS, LSA., explained during an address in 1896:
“Now this man Jenner had never passed a medical examination in his life. He belonged to the good old times when George III was King - (laughter) - when medical examinations were not compulsory.
Jenner looked upon the whole thing as a superfluity, and he hung up “Surgeon, apothecary,” over his door without any of the qualifications that warranted the assumption.
It was not until twenty years after he was in practice that he thought it advisable to get a few letters after his name. Consequently he then communicated with a Scotch University and obtained the degree of Doctor of Medicine for the sum of £15 and nothing more. (Laughter.)
It is true that a little while before, he had obtained a Fellowship of the Royal Society, but his latest biographer and apologist, Dr. Norman Moore, had to confess that it was obtained by little less than a fraud.
It was obtained by writing a most extraordinary paper about a fabulous cuckoo, for the most part composed of arrant absurdities and imaginative freaks such as no ornithologist of the present day would pay the slightest heed to.
A few years after this, rather dissatisfied with the only medical qualification he had obtained, Jenner communicated with the University of Oxford and asked them to grant him their honorary degree of M.D., and after a good many fruitless attempts he got it.
Then he sent to the Royal College of Physicians in London to get their diploma, and even presented his Oxford degree as an argument in his favour.
But they considered he had had quite enough on the cheap already, and told him distinctly that until he passed the usual examinations they were not going to give him any more.”
– Dr Walter Hadwen, 1896
So, after about 20 years of practicing his special brand of “medicine,” Jenner the professional bullshit artist thought he might benefit from some extra letters after his name.
Thus it was that in 1790 Jenner simply bought a medical degree from St.Andrews University for £15. Welcome to the man who helped create what is now a multi-billion dollar fascist medical empire (disguised as medical “progress”) - a person who was not only a complete fraud and confidence man, but evidently a pathological liar.
1791: Edward Jenner vaccinates his 18 month old son with swine-pox and eight years later in 1798 with cow-pox. His son will die of TB at the age of 21, and Jenner thereafter chooses not to vaccinate his second son. (Yes, he became a “refuser” of sorts, at least where his own family’s health was concerned!)
1796: Edward Jenner in Gloucestershire, England, is falsely credited with the concept of vaccination, which he actually appropriated from the dairy maids. Hadwen in his 1896 address:
“He was not, however, the discoverer. The whole thing was a superstition of the Gloucestershire dairymaids years before Jenner was born - (laughter) - and the very experiment, so-called, that he performed had been performed by an old farmer named Benjamin Jesty twenty years previously.”
He added:
“When he first of all heard the story of the cow-pox legend that the dairymaids talked about, that if you only had cow-pox you can’t have small-pox, he began to mention it at the meetings of the Medico-convivial Society, where the old doctors of the day met together to smoke their pipes, drink their glasses of grog, and talk over their cases.
But he no sooner mentioned it than they laughed at it. The cow doctors could have told him of hundreds of cases where small-pox had followed cow-pox, and Jenner found he would have to drop it.”
Yes, vaccination began with an utterly unscientific superstition unbacked by any evidence at all and propagated by the local English dairymaids to one self-confident crank named Edward Jenner, a medical fraud who bought his credentials for fifteen pounds.
1802: Jenner petitions English parliament (House of Commons) for funding using blatant falsehoods, stating that vaccination can be done with perfect safety (where have we heard that before?).
Government awards Jenner 10,000 pounds (Higgins says 30,000 in his book, perhaps pertaining to Jenner’s 1807 triumphant petition which landed him further funds) for continued “experimentation.”
His arm-to-arm method of vaccination ultimately proves so dangerous that it is abandoned and even prohibited.
His claim of lifelong immunity was quickly exposed to be one of the more brazen pieces of self-promoting mendacity medical “science” has produced.
As vaccinated subjects continued to develop the diseases they were supposedly “immunized” against, this claim was modified to roughly 7 years protection with subsequent re-vaccination deemed “necessary.”
(By 1914 this “immunity” period was shortened yet again to an estimated 6-12 months(!), sharply exposing the lunacy of the vaccine paradigm to anyone paying attention. This is over 200 years ago and nothing much has changed.)
Jenner’s original claims for vaccination were stated in his Petition to Parliament March 17, 1802, asking for a reward for his alleged “discovery” in these words:
“That your petitioner, having discovered[false – he got the idea came from the dairymaids of rural England] that a disease which occasionally exists in a particular form among cattle, known by the name of the cow-pox, admits of being inoculated on the human frame with the most perfect ease and safety [false – it proved time and again to be dangerous and not to prevent smallpox at all], and is attended with the singularly beneficial effect of rendering through life the person so inoculated perfectly secure from the infection of the smallpox [false – he claimed perfect immunity for life based on a mere few years of observation and no evidence at all – people got cowpox AND smallpox!”
Three strikes and you’re out, Ed! Charles M. Higgins in his excellent book The Horrors of Vaccination Exposed referred to Jenner’s statement as a “tissue of falsehoods,” and so it was.
That however did not prevent Jenner from collecting the whopping sum of 30,000 pounds from the British government as a reward for his imaginative fabrications. This translates to over 3 million pounds in 1901 money (a century later)!
In the following years, through to the 1900s, many cases of smallpox in those who had received the smallpox vaccine/s continued to be recorded.
In the early 1820s, while the British government was still funding Jenner’s “experiments,” he continued to do his best to hide the evidence showing his vaccines were causing more carnage than immunity.
Pro-vaccinism became largely a face-saving exercise which has only swelled in scale (and funding) ever since.
A study of Edward Jenner is a study in modern medicine’s roots in charlatanry. (Don’t get me started on the Rockefellers.)
Many people are starting to catch on to the dangers inherent in vaccination, but too few realise at present that there is no shortage of instances where far more harm is done than presumed “good.”
We venture right back to the beginning of the 20th century in England and find that there are similar numbers of vaccine - induced deaths to smallpox deaths, except in the case of children under 5 yrs of age, where the vaccine proved much riskier than smallpox itself.
Vaccine Deaths versus Smallpox Deaths – Data from Reports of the Registrar General of England
1831: there is a smallpox outbreak wherein 995 vaccinated (yes, vaccinated) people developed the disease in Wurtemberg, Germany.
1831: 2,000 people in Marseilles, France, who have received smallpox vaccination develop smallpox.
1854: England legislates for compulsory vaccination; widely opposed by eminent doctors.
1857-59: Vaccination in England is now enforced by fines, much to the disgust of rational medical men around the country who vigorously oppose it. Thus begins the smallpox epidemic of England that lasts until 1859, killing over 14,000 people.
1854-63: Smallpox has claimed over 33,000 by this point, following compulsory vaccine program.
Caught on Camera: W.H.O Scientists Question Safety Of Vaccines
Shocking footage from inside The W.H.O. Global Vaccine Safety Summit on December 2&3, 2019.
1863-65: England’s second major epidemic strikes, claiming 20,059 lives.
1870-72: England’s third major epidemic claims 44,840 lives, the worst of the three which occurred following compulsory vaccination.
1907: Compulsory vaccination is repealed as the grotesque failure is too obvious to disguise or “spin” with methods available at the time.
1910 – 1933: in England and Wales combined, only 109 kids under 5 yrs died of smallpox; 270 died from vaccination. It’s estimated there were around 40 million people in the UK in 1910. Improved living conditions had all but wiped smallpox out despite the vaccine-induced epidemics.
Repeat after me: “Safe and effective, safe and effective…”
“It is pathetic and ludicrous to say we ever vanquished smallpox with vaccines, when only 10% of the population was ever vaccinated."
3. The City of Leicester: Sanitation Trumps Vaccination
A.k.a. Why Won’t Leicester Go Away?
“One of the medical profession’s greatest boasts is that it eradicated smallpox through the use of the smallpox vaccine. I myself believed this claim for many years.
But it simply isn’t true. One of the worst smallpox epidemics of all time took place in England between 1870 and 1872 – nearly two decades after compulsory vaccination was introduced.
After this evidence that smallpox vaccination didn’t work the people of Leicester in the English midlands refused to have the vaccine any more.
When the next smallpox epidemic struck in the early 1890s the people of Leicester relied upon good sanitation and a system of quarantine.
There was only one death from smallpox in Leicester during that epidemic. In contrast the citizens of other towns (who had been vaccinated) died in vast numbers…
Doctors and drug companies may not like it but the truth is that surveillance, quarantine and better living conditions got rid of smallpox – not the smallpox vaccine.”
- Dr. Vernon Coleman, MB
1914: Dr. C. Killick Millard, Medical Officer of Health (Leicester, England) publishes The Vaccination Question and admits that the city of Leicester, with a population of around 300,000 at the time, had for 30 years abandoned infantile vaccination and yet “miraculously” experienced an “enormous decline” in smallpox mortality.
Something is Rotten in the State of Samoa
There's something happening in Samoa that should have every Kiwi's attention. The implications could change New Zealand forever. Are you going to let this happen to you?
We should consider his words carefully, because Millard was a man who at the outset was pro-vaccine (by the 1900s the endless repetition of vaccine propaganda and dogma had definitely made an impression upon the collective mind), and yet, his empirical experience with the city of Leicester caused him to change his views:
“The two crucial and outstanding facts which I wish to lay stress upon, are:
The unexpected and remarkable experience of the town of Leicester, which for thirty years has abandoned infantile vaccination, yet has shown an enormous decline in smallpox mortality.
The fact that, although infantile vaccination is falling more and more into disuse throughout the whole country, yet smallpox, contrary to all pro-vaccinist expectation and prophecy, continues to decline and has almost disappeared.
…The striking facts that in Leicester, without infantile vaccination, the decline has been greater than in most places, and that throughout the country smallpox has continued to decrease in spite of the falling off in vaccination, should surely be sufficient grounds for legitimate doubt.
…If it can be shown that “sanitation”, thoroughly carried out, is alone sufficient for the effective control of smallpox in this country (as in Leicester), why inflict upon the community universal vaccination with all its inseparable drawbacks? Moreover, what justification can there be any longer for compulsion?
It cannot be denied that vaccination causes, in the aggregate, very considerable injury to health, most of it only temporary, but some permanent…
We must never forget that vaccination is an evil… There is not the slightest evidence that vaccination, apart from its [presumed] effect in preventing smallpox, is of the least value or anything but detrimental to the human race…
During the last decade the deaths from vaccinia have several times outnumbered those from smallpox, whilst if we have regard to the amount of ill health caused by the two diseases (and putting aside for the moment the question of the alleged effect of vaccination in lessening smallpox) it looks as if vaccinia [vaccine-induced disease] were becoming, so far as the community is concerned, the more serious disease of the two.”
4. Vaccine Campaigns Were Always Known to Cause Outbreaks
In Compulsory Vaccination in England (1884), William Tebb observed: “Vaccination was made compulsory by an Act of Parliament in the year 1853; again in 1867; and still more stringent in 1871.
Since 1853, we have had three epidemics of small-pox, each being more severe than the one preceding.”
One quite well suppressed historical trend regarding vaccines is that serious outbreaks have a habit of occurring in the most heavily vaccinated areas and dodging less vaccinated areas.
Only the most facile logic presupposes that those areas enduring outbreaks must have not followed vaccine procedure correctly, or had the misfortune of “bad batches,” etc., etc.
The logical conclusion to draw from the evidence is that the vaccine campaigns were actually creating epidemics where none were likely to ever occur. Eminent medical men recognised this in the 1800s but did we listen?
Biggest Medical Scandal In History Breaking! UN Comes Clean, Admits Vaccine Death And Damage Coverup
On Dec 2nd and 3rd the UN funded WHO held a Global Vaccine Safety Summit where scientists admitted that vaccines are killing people, adjuvants in the vaccines are part of the problem, they have not conducted adequate safety studies. This is a bombshell report.
While advocates argue correlation doesn’t equal causation (true enough), no independent investigator is satisfied with ignoring the mountains of evidence indicating causality, and which date back to the very beginnings of vaccination.
Big Pharma prostitutes of course can warn of the post hoc ergo propter hoc fallacy, but some of us extend our efforts end energies beyond mere fancy rhetoric – we also note that the correlation has a bi-directional effect, i.e., disease incidence and mortality regularly increases in the wake of vaccination, and also regularly drops with a corresponding decrease in vaccination rates. It goes both ways. Meaningless coincidence?
Anatomy of 3 epidemics and the smallpox statistics from England for the period 1857-1873, spanning the outbreaks
Notice the disproportionately high increases in smallpox mortality rates above as compared to population growth. Meanwhile, we remember that Leicester abandoned infantile vaccination and eliminated smallpox simply by thoroughly enhancing sanitation methods.
“It’s the environment, stupid!” Our programmed fear of smallpox, flu, and other “dreaded” diseases is out of all proportion with reality and shows that we have forgotten how potent basic natural and common sense measures can be in staying healthy.
Also worth noting: exposure doesn’t equal illness – the internal terrain must conduce to the development of symptoms.
Below is a graph also from Tebb’s book showing that the mandating of smallpox vaccination did not prevent the mortality rate from more than doubling within thirty years, while the population increased by only about one third.
In summarising the origins of vaccine fraud, coverups, and the resultant vaccine religion, Jennifer Craig PhD states:
“The report of Dr. William Farr, (1807 – 1883), Compiler of Statistics of the Registrar General of London and considered to be the first developer of vital statistics, stated:
“Smallpox attained its maximum mortality after vaccination was introduced. The mean annual mortality for 10,000 population from 1850 to 1869 was at the rate of 2.04, whereas after compulsory vaccination, in 1871 the death rate was 10.24.
In 1872 the death rate was 8.33 and this after the most laudable efforts to extend vaccination by legislative enactments.”
The compulsory vaccination law was repealed in 1907. By 1919, England and Wales had become one of the least vaccinated countries and had only 28 deaths from smallpox out of a population of 37.8 million people.
According to official figures of the Registrar General of England, 109 children under five years in England and Wales died of smallpox between 1910 and 1933. In that same period 270 died from vaccination.
Between 1934 and 1961 not one smallpox death was recorded but 115 children under five years died from smallpox vaccination."
5. Statistical Wizardry: When In Doubt White it Out!
One of the lynch pins of the vaccine machine has always been systematic (and often high-level) deception in order to maintain the illusion of efficacy.
Put bluntly, when things don’t pan out as the vaccinists want, they simply tinker with the data and play semantic games to create figures that seem to support a given vaccine program/goal.
Sometimes, the tactic is more straightforward: gather the data and bin it so it never sees the light of day, as William Thompson has recently elucidated for us regarding the MMR scandal whereby the CDC knew of the MMR-autism link and deliberately buried the evidence (for some 14 years!).
Meanwhile, Dr Andrew Wakefield was defamed, ostracized, chased out of England, and left to pick up the pieces of his life without a shred of evidence supporting the vindictive narrative created against him. However, we’re focusing in on pre-WWII material here for a historical perspective that will be easy to digest.
Maurice Beddow Bayly, member of the Royal College of Surgeons, LRCP, wrote in 1934:
“After vaccination was introduced, cases of aseptic meningitis were reported as a separate disease from polio, but such were counted as polio before the vaccine was introduced.
The Ministry of Health admitted that the vaccine status of the individual is a guiding factor in diagnosis…
If a person who is vaccinated contracts the disease, the disease is simply recorded under a different name…Those who contracted polio after the first inoculation were placed on the non-inoculated list…
It’s obvious that this practice of screening statistics, apparently in order to suppress facts unfavourable to immunization, invalidates most of the evidence brought forward by the supporters of immunization."
In short, when the numbers don’t support pro-vax dogma, medical authorities simply change them to suit their purposes.
Considering the embarrassingly large sums of money that governments have invested in vaccine campaigns (and the attendant propaganda/psychological warfare), it is somewhat understandable that in their cowardly bureaucratic state of mind, rather than admit to such monstrous mistakes which have generated such incomprehensible human suffering, said bureaucrats and medical stooges simply try to hide the evidence and save face.
(There is of course the malignant influence of Big Pharma and its greed lurking in the background too, along with the publicly known depopulation program.)
We will elaborate on this statistical fraud theme with more recent examples in our follow up.
After Jenner’s death, when vaccinated people continually contracted smallpox, thus repeatedly proving the fraud of the smallpox vaccine, the medical records were to show they had “pustular eczema” instead.
Instead of admitting the dangerous and ineffectual nature of the earliest vaccines, however, authorities plowed ahead creating more and more vaccines, all on the same superstitious premises that gave birth to the mythology now rammed down our throats.
George Bernard Shaw (1856 – 1950) saw this data-recording fraud firsthand:
“During the last considerable epidemic at the turn of the century, I was a member of the Health Committee of London Borrough Council, and I learned how the credit of vaccination is kept up statistically by diagnosing all the revaccinated cases (of smallpox) as pustular eczema, varioloid or what not – except smallpox."
The fact is that the medical authorities have been lying and covering their tracks all along, just as Edward Jenner, the godfather of the vaccine lie, was right from the start.
So vaccines are safe and effective are they? Is that why after Japan started compulsory smallpox vaccination in 1872 smallpox rates increased thereafter?
After twenty years, their records indicated 165,774 cases with 29,979 deaths – ALL of them vaccinated. Meanwhile, in Australia, where there was no such compulsion, there were only three deaths infifteen years.
Who Needs Antivaxxers? Hear the Truth from IMAC’s Director: Dr Nikki Turners Greatest Quote So Far
Dr Nikki Turner, IMAC Director (New Zealands Immunisation Advisory Council) has just advised the world the flu vaccine WON'T protect you! If your vaccination advisory "experts" are telling you this, then what else do they really want to tell you? It's time you started questioning vaccines.
Clearly we are protecting ourselves from these diseases somehow, and it starts with the basics: sanitation, hygiene, and nutrition.
I could go on and on with the stat’s but hopefully you get the idea.
Those of you inclined to object to my “fixation” on smallpox while I lay out some basic historical context for vaccination must wait for the follow up article for a more “inclusive” exposé based on more recent material. If you love vaccines you probably won’t like it. See below for concluding sentiments.
A Note on Planned Forced Vaccination Tthrough the Biosecurity Act of 2015 (and Equivalent Legislation)
The technocracy thrown up around us and calling itself “civilization” is a dark and brutal beast emanating from the collective unconscious, and unless we collectively awaken and take a stand for truth and the right to self-determination, then this situation will only become more dire (as is planned), particularly with the TTP and its equivalents now brought in, setting the stage for full-blown corporate control of all facets of human life.
With measures such as the Biosecurity Act 2015 (Australia see here), the government will be creating the legal framework to forcibly vaccinate people against their will (including those subjects in the high risk category for severe abreaction) under the pretense of protecting public health.
Consider Dr Hadwen’s 1896 statement (from his aforementioned speech) on the issue of compulsory vaccination:
“As a medical man I look upon vaccination as an insult to common sense, as superstitious in its origin, unscientific in theory and practice, and useless and dangerous in its character; whilst as a father and a citizen I view the Compulsory Vaccination Acts as demoralising in their tendencies, degrading in their character, cruel and unjust in their enactments, and an unwarrantable interference with parental responsibility and liberty such as ought not to be tolerated...."
Nearly forty years later, researcher Anne Riley Hale shared this sentiment on the subject of mandatory vaccination:
“But to put behind it the full force of the Government – the public funds and the police powers of the State – to enforce these destructive and disease-breeding inoculations upon the unwilling and the defenseless, constitutes a form of tyranny in modern times which shames most of the despotisms of the past."
Fear and ignorance are used daily by the Establishment to scare people so silly that the thought of investigating the evidence for and against vaccination never even occurs to them.
Our collective ignorance is the best weapon the Establishment has to coerce and cajole us into a forced vaccination agenda.
If you want to have some idea of what that will look like if it succeeds, just take a look at America where the vaccine schedule is the most intense on the planet, the infant death rate is absolutely atrocious (far worse than various countries using far less vaccines), and autism is now at 1 in 45 and still rising – just as the vaccine schedule is planned to continue to do so.
Fact or Fiction: Aborted Baby DNA in Vaccines
To end the controversial debate on whether aborted fetal fragments are in our most common vaccines, we asked THE expert. Adult stem cell pioneer, Dr. Theresa Deisher, PhD, breaks down the science and provides the facts on this very controversial topic.
Thus far, as we have let our egos get in the way of learning the truth, it is the children primarily who have paid, but if the forced vaccine agenda succeeds, we all will.
Knowledge is power, and vaccine slogans are not knowledge. Propaganda is not wisdom. Groupthink is not a sound basis for epistemology.
Truth is not nearly so well funded as cancerous lies, and the peer review system is broken (just ask any of the scientists we have interviewed!). Remember to ask “who benefits?”
We can change this if we want. What are we choosing to create from here? Have we had enough of the vaccine scandals?
FDA Admits Vaccines Contaminated With Serious Viruses Including Cancer
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published shocking results which found that cells used in the manufacturing of numerous childhood vaccines are often contaminated with serious viruses including cancer.
The FDA study looked at vaccines that are made from living cells, or replicated cell substrates that some manufacturers are investigating to create.
According to research, these cells are oftentimes contaminated with hidden viral fragments which have the potential to cause cancer.
These viruses are dormant, meaning they live “quietly” inside other cells. However, eventually these cells no longer hide and circulate throughout the body in the form of serious disease.
As a result, a person injected with a vaccine containing these cancer-causing micro-organisms may not display signs of health complications until long after they have been jabbed sometimes several years later.
An experiment injecting rodents with vaccines yielded surprising results showing that the rats now had tumor cells.
“In some cases the cell lines that are used might be tumorigenic, that is, they form tumors when injected into rodents,” the FDA paper explains.
“Some of these tumor-forming cell lines may contain cancer-causing viruses that are not actively reproducing. Such viruses are hard to detect using standard methods. These latent, or ‘quiet,’ viruses pose a potential threat, since they might become active under vaccine manufacturing conditions.”
The list of tumorigenic or cells that run the risk of causing cancer include MDCK and CHO cells (for influenza virus vaccines), 293 and PER.C6 cells (for adenovirus-vectored HIV-1 and other vaccines), and tumor-derived cells such as HeLa cells (for HIV-1 vaccines) according to the FDA.
Although this author is against the injection of foreign chemicals into his own body, the FDA proceeded with the study for other reasons.
The FDA writes they want “to ensure the safety of vaccines, our laboratory is investigating ways to activate latent viruses in cell lines and to detect the activated viruses, as well as other unknown viruses, using new technologies.
We will then adapt our findings to detect viruses in the same types of cell substrates that are used to produce vaccines.”
The FDA adds, “These methods will enable FDA scientists to help manufacturers to determine whether their specific cell substrate is safe to use for vaccine production.
The methods our laboratory are developing and testing will help to ensure the production of safe and effective vaccines in two ways:
1. FDA will be able to develop testing guidelines for manufacturers who use new cell substrates for producing vaccines; and
2. FDA will publish the new methods it develops in peer-reviewed scientific journals, thus making them readily accessible to all manufacturers.”
The FDA is also evaluating the risk of retrovirus infections in humans such as Simian foamy virus (SFV) which can be transmitted from monkeys to humans.
Vaxxed 2 Producers Release Devastating Information To The World
Mike Adams interviews the producers of the film Vaxxed 2, the follow up to the explosive film Vaxxed. See more about the upcoming film here.
Although, the FDA says “there is no evidence that SFV causes disease.” However, the FDA cautions that the virus can “remain in a lifelong quiet state in the DNA after infection.”
Despite these claims, we know that polio and smallpox vaccines contain monkey, pig, kidney and other foreign cells that are contaminated with SIV, SFV, and various other cancer-causing viruses.
Most are also well aware that the Polio vaccine SV40 is documented on record by the CDC themselves (on a now - deleted page) to have cost people their lives and caused cancer.
So the claim made by the FDA “there is no evidence that SFV causes disease” is a laughably ill-researched statement.
In other gene sequencing news, recently it has been reported by scientists in a separate study that there are 560 cancer genes in the human gene sequencing for GlaxoSmithKline’s (GSK) combination vaccine for measles, mumps, rubella, and varicella (MMRV).
Cancer genes aren’t the only worry with MMR vaccines or vaccines in general. As Activist Post has previously expressed, mercury and aluminum have long been debated by people like Robert Kennedy Jr. as ingredients (adjuvants) in vaccines that could cause autism.
This is for good reason since we know that both aluminum and mercury are neurotoxins that harm the body at high levels.
RFK, Jr. believes “it’s the preservative Thimerosal in the vaccines that causes autism.”
Kennedy expressed his opinion in a weighty now-deleted piece on the CDC whistleblower entitled “CDC’s Latest Tuskegee Experiment African American Autism and Vaccines.” (archive)
Thiomersal isn’t the only ingredient in vaccines; they have admitted to traces of aluminum, which is classified as a neurotoxin to the body and stated that “despite using it for 90 years medical sciences’ understanding about using aluminum as a vaccine adjuvant is remarkably poor.”
In 2017, Activist Post reported a previous separate study that confirmed aluminum in vaccines may cause Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD), and children who suffer from it have up 10 times more metal in their brains than what is considered a safe amount for adults.
Those researchers discovered that aluminum causes the membrane to separate the brain from blood flowing to it, thus affecting its internal temperature, non-neuronal cells and inflammatory cells.
Another previous study in 2012, from the peer-reviewed medical journal Lupus by Lucija Tomljenovic, PhD and Christopher A. Shaw, PhD of the University of British Columbia corroborates those claims, indicating that aluminum toxicity targets the mitochondria.
Lead Supervisor in Merck Says Vaccines Not Safe
A compelling interview with Jorge Araujo, former lead supervisor in Merck’s vaccine department, on his search for safety data and why he decided not to vaccinate his own children. Trailer is below, full interview is here.
Another case in an Italian court in September, 2014, “ruled mercury and aluminum in vaccines cause autism” and awarded a plaintiff’s family compensation for their young boy who developed autism from a six-in-one hexavalent vaccine manufactured by GlaxoSmithKline.
Merck knowingly falsified its mumps vaccine test results to fabricate a “95% efficacy rate.” In order to do this, Merck “spiked the blood test with animal antibodies to artificially inflate the appearance of immune system antibodies,” as reported by CourthouseNews.com.
In fact, regarding the use of aluminum and other metals in vaccines as an adjuvant, we may all be part of a 90-year-old experiment where we were all the lab rats.
“Aluminum is an experimentally demonstrated neurotoxin and the most commonly used vaccine adjuvant. Despite almost 90 years of widespread use of aluminum adjuvants, medical science’s understanding about their mechanisms of action is still remarkably poor.
There is also a concerning scarcity of data on toxicology and pharmacokinetics of these compounds. In spite of this, the notion that aluminum in vaccines is safe appears to be widely accepted.
Experimental research, however, clearly shows that aluminum adjuvants have a potential to induce serious immunological disorders in humans.
In particular, aluminum in adjuvant form carries a risk for autoimmunity, long-term brain inflammation and associated neurological complications and may thus have profound and widespread adverse health consequences.
In our opinion, the possibility that vaccine benefits may have been overrated and the risk of potential adverse effects underestimated, has not been rigorously evaluated in the medical and scientific community.
We hope that the present paper will provide a framework for a much needed and long overdue assessment of this highly contentious medical issue."
The MMR vaccine isn’t the only vaccine under scrutiny. In 2017, the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) announced there might be a link between miscarriages and vaccinations.
The researchers found that women who had miscarriages between 2010 and 2012 were more likely to have had back-to-back annual flu shots including the Swine flu vaccine that a UK court ruled caused brain damage and Guillain-Barre syndrome (GBS) in multiple kids in 2015, as Natural Blazereported.
At this point, the FDA effectively just inadvertently proved that jabbing yourself with a vaccine is the equivalent to trying Chinese research chemicals.
Except that these deadly chemical combinations are approved by the FDA.
The question on everyone’s minds is, how wasn’t any of this identified long before any of these vaccines were ever approved for use by the masses? Especially, the Polio and Smallpox vaccines which have injured and killed many over the years.
The new issue is vaccines that are made from living cells, or replicated cell substrates that may cause cancer or other serious diseases.
Despite all this evidence, forced vaccinations are occurring in places like BC, Canada where, as Activist Post reported, parents have no choice but to vaccinate children.
As this writer previously wrote, vaccines affect individuals differently and can have adverse side effects; now parents need to worry about deadly cells hidden beneath the vaccines that can cause illnesses.
Is it ever really safe to put a foreign substance into your body when each person’s body functions differently and has a different chemical make up? As RFK, Jr. says when it comes to vaccines: “Let the evidence speak for itself.”
Measles Vaccination Is Not Protecting Against Measles
The two areas with highest measles outbreak have MMR vaccination rates of 97 percent.* Yes, you read it right, more than that 95 percent figure our Ministry of Health advisers keep telling us would ensure “herd immunity"!
The lowest vaccinated regions have the lowest measles rates, or indeed zero cases as is the case in Gisborne.
Next let’s look at the official data for the Canterbury outbreak, which is now officially over. Cumulative total for that outbreak was 49! You may be surprised as we were led to believe it was a big outbreak. This information obtained under the OIA may shed some light:
Dr Shane Reti to the Associated Health Minister (27 Aug 2019): “How many samples tested at the National Measles Laboratory in Christchurch, if any, identified the vaccine strain of the measles virus?”
Hon Julie Anne Genter replied: “61 samples tested between 1 January 2019 and 19 July 2019 detected the vaccine strain of the measles virus and were subsequently identified as not being cases of measles.”
Please do read that statement again and see that based on the official data, the majority of measles cases were due to measles vaccine, not wild measles. I let you draw your own conclusions!
Also, have you noticed that in all announcements those older than 50 are told that they don’t need MMR vaccine? Ever wondered why?
They are immune due to natural exposure to measles in childhood (remember measles parties) and any such immunised-for-life mother was able to pass that immunity to her baby during pregnancy and via breastfeeding.
So, prior to the measles vaccines, measles was a childhood disease which parents knew how to deal with (cod liver oil - VitA - plenty of fluid, sleep in a dark room, rest at home) and other parents would welcome their children’s exposure and thus-acquired life-time immunity. Measles wasn’t even an issue for a healthy breast-fed child.
All problems arose after measles vaccination started and as a result many people started to get measles at an age - inappropriate time.
Also, as mothers no longer had immunity, they couldn’t pass it to their babies. And as we see, based on our own official data, the measles vaccine doesn’t offer protection for our children and there is a mass, hyped panic re measles!
Also, your readers may like to know that if someone is vaccinated with MMR and develops measles in the following two weeks, their status is recorded as “unvaccinated”!
This artificially and misleadingly increases the number of “unvaccinated” cases and reduces the number who have been vaccinated and develop measles.
Any nurse in Auckland hospitals could tell you that more than half of those turning up with measles are vaccinated!
Do Vaccines Cause Autism? Highly Informative Video
Share this video with everyone you know. Why? Because it explains the real story of how the vaccine industry is damaging countless children while getting away with it.
A majority of those categorised as “Unknown” are indeed vaccinated against measles but don’t have their vaccination records, while their parents testify that they had vaccinated their kids according to the NZ schedule.
Pacific Islanders, who have one of the highest vaccination rates in NZ, also have the highest rate of measles. The higher rate of hospitalisation (which is defined as more than three hours in hospital) is partly due to quarantine cases where the patient can’t be sent home for isolation purposes (and not due to the severity of their case).
I find the lack of advice for treatment of this childhood disease from public health officials extremely disconcerting.
And as you see, blaming outbreaks on the unvaccinated is not borne by official data. Indeed, if we are truly concerned by measles outbreaks we would halt MMR vaccine immediately, as data shows those populations with a higher rate of MMR are more likely to develop measles.
Theo Brandt, Communications manager for The Immunisation Advisory Centre, University of Auckland responds. New Zealand is experiencing a serious outbreak of measles, the worst we’ve seen in decades.
Many people, particularly infants too young to be fully immunised, have suffered severe complications requiring intensive hospital treatment. This is not a disease that can always be managed by a healthy lifestyle, cod liver oil or rest.
Misconceptions are being shared across social media in New Zealand about our MMR immunisation coverage, the seriousness of measles and the effectiveness of the MMR vaccine.
1. Some people claim that data from the Ministry of Health and the National Immunisation Register (NIR) show high MMR coverage across the country.
This incorrect claim is based on misuse of data. The data show that of children offered MMR vaccination, 97 percent completed and 3 percent declined. Population coverage cannot be calculated from these two groups alone.
This calculation does not include many other children who were eligible but did not complete or decline vaccination. Omitting this group from the calculation creates a false impression of overinflated coverage. Inferring failure of population protection made from these claims is incorrect.
New Zealand has a measles outbreak because our immunisation coverage is sub-optimal. Historically it was particularly low, leaving many adolescents and midlife adults now at risk, often unaware they are not protected. If all eligible people had two doses of MMR, measles could not spread so easily.
This is well demonstrated in other countries using the same vaccine, where rates of vaccine coverage of 95 percent or greater shows sustained prevention of the spread of measles.
2. An uncommon but known side effect of the MMR vaccine is the occurrence of a mild rash and fever. This is caused by the immune system’s response to the measles or rubella component of the vaccine.
People with this rash have a reaction to the vaccine strain, not transmissible measles. They cannot pass on measles to anyone and are correctly excluded as measles cases.
3. It is true that some people with measles have had two doses of the MMR vaccine (currently 75 of the 1275 cases in New Zealand). This is because no vaccine is 100 percent effective.
When tens of thousands of people are vaccinated, a small number of these will still contract the disease. If 100 vaccinated people were all exposed to measles, we would expect 1 or 2 to get the disease. If 100 unvaccinated people were exposed to the disease, then about 90 of them would get measles.
4. Mothers immunised against measles do pass on some protection to their unborn child. This protection doesn’t last more than a few months.
Measles is not a disease that can be easily treated.
The complications from measles can be managed, but as mentioned, there are never any guarantees that we will successfully manage all cases, even in well-nourished, breast-fed children and with the most advanced heathcare. It is a credit to the NZ health services that to date no one has died in this outbreak, despite much severe illness.
Although we can’t treat measles, we can prevent it. Since 2000, 21.1 million deaths have been prevented by the measles vaccine (World Health Organisation data).
The WHO cautions against “Vaccine misinformation” which it indicates “has the potential to impact public health and is as contagious and dangerous as the diseases it helps spread”.
Amazing Science Lesson: Environmentalists Declare War On Photosynthesis In Stupefying Effort To Exterminate All Recognizable Life On Planet Earth January 21 2020 | From: NaturalNews
We were all taught how photosynthesis works in high school… or at least you should have been taught how it works. Photosynthesis is arguably the single most important metabolic process on the planet, and it is from this process that nearly all complex life is sustainted.
Photosynthesis is a process by which plants produce metabolic energy.
Using this energy combined with elemental materials pulled from air and soil, they build tree trunks, food crops, leaves, pollen, seeds, stems and everything you’ve come to associate with living plants.
Even alga use photosynthesis to grow and divide, which is why microalgae such as spirulina require sunlight to flourish.
Photosynthesis is the foundation of most food webs on the planet.
Any rational scientist would agree that if photosynthesis were halted, nearly all recognizable life on planet Earth would be exterminated.
Environmentalists Are at War With Photosynthesis and All Plant Life on Planet Earth
It seems impossible, but environmentalists are at war with two out of the three primary inputs required to sustain photosynthesis.
First, they’re at war with carbon, and you often hear them talk about the “war on carbon” or “carbon sequestration” - a way to bury carbon in the ground so that it’s removed from atmospheric air.
Environmentalists have even declared carbon dioxide to be a “pollutant” even when it is the single most important molecule for supporting photosynthesis and nearly all plant life across the planet.
Only a complete moron would declare war on the molecule of life that sustains trees, forests, plants, food crops, grasses, algae and seaweed, yet that’s exactly what environmentalists have done.
Their goal is the complete elimination of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere - an outcome that would exterminate all recognizable life on Earth.
All in the name of being “green,” of course, since virtue signaling is more important than actually supporting living organisms these days.
Environmentalists seem to be utterly oblivious to the fact that all humans, plants, animals and insects are carbon-based life forms.
That’s because nearly every molecule in your body contains carbon.
You are made of carbon.
Vitamin C is made of carbon. The anti-cancer nutrients in broccoli are made of carbon.
Wait… you didn’t know that?
Astonishingly, very few people realize that vitamins, essential oils, fatty acids, natural medicines and even pharmaceuticals are almost all made of carbon.
To prove this to yourself, visit ChemSpider.com and search for any phytochemical you want. If you search for “ascorbic acid” - vitamin C - you get this vitamin C page revealing the molecular formula for ascorbic acid: C6H8O6.
That formula, of course, means that one molecule of vitamin C is made from 6 carbons, 8 hydrogens and 6 oxygens. Mapped out in a 2D diagram, the molecule looks like this:
If you’re not a chemist, you might be wondering, “So where’s the carbon in that?” Chemists laugh at the question because every intersection of black lines indicates a carbon atom.
Carbon atoms are so common in organic chemistry that chemists don’t even note them because every diagram would be littered with the symbol for carbon.
As the molecular diagram shows, vitamin C is made of just three elements Carbon (C), Hydrogen (H) and Oxygen (O). Nothing else.
The black lines are not elements; they merely indicate chemical bonds. Double lines indicate double bonds, and the stair-step lines indicate the 3D orientation of the elements.
Plants Use the Same Three Elements to Build Millions of Different Molecules, Including Medicinal Nutrients and Antibacterial Phytochemicals
Did you notice that these same three elements are also found in photosynthesis? CO2 provides the Carbon. H2O provides the Hydrogen.
Sunlight provides the energy. Vitamin C is synthesized by plants using carbon dioxide, hydrogen and metabolic energy for synthesis.
Any environmentalist who hates carbon dioxide must also hate vitamin C, herbal medicines, essential oils, nutrients, plant pigments and omega-3 oils… because they’re all made out of carbon. If you are at war with carbon, you are at war with life itself.
Many people who are into saving the planet are also into healthy, plant-based oils such as omega-3s or DHA. What an interesting coincidence, since DHA - Docosahexaenoic acid - is also made out of just three elements. Care to guess what they are?
DHA is synthesized by various species of algae, and they use Carbon, Hydrogen and Oxygen to make DHA, a powerful brain-boosting nutrient that boosts the neurological development of babies.
Environmentalists must think DHA is bad, since it’s made out of carbon.
In fact, millions of useful molecules are made out of carbon. Many of them are synthesized by plants using nothing but carbon (from CO2), hydrogen (from water) and oxygen (from water or CO2).
Environmentalists Who Are at War With Carbon are at War With Life
Just about every molecule you value - and nearly every molecule you’re made of - is made out of carbon. If you are at war with carbon, you are at war with LIFE on planet Earth.
If you want to eliminate carbon dioxide, you are working to exterminate life.
Yet probably 90% of college students today believe that carbon dioxide is a “pollutant” and they would politically support any effort to eliminate it, even if doing so resulted in global ecological collapse and the extinction of humanity.
Astonishingly, environmentalists have been so deeply brainwashed and deliberately mis-educated that they actually think carbon is bad. They must also hate themselves, since 96% of the human body is made of just four elements: Oxygen, Carbon, Hydrogen and Nitrogen.
Maybe that’s why environmentalists are so full of hatred and ignorance: They are made of the very element they’ve declared war against. If you’ve ever wondered why Leftists are so angry all the time, it’s because they’re made of the very element they hate: Carbon.
Hydrocarbons release fresh carbon into the atmosphere where plants can use it to create valuable molecules that support life
Burning fossil fuels, by the way, means combusting hydrocarbons to release energy. One of the byproducts of burning fossil fuels is the release of CO2 into the atmosphere, providing fresh CO2 that plants are starving to harvest from the air.
CO2 levels in the atmosphere right now are at near-emergency low levels of barely above 400 ppm. Forests, food crops and indigenous plants across the globe would flourish at double or triple the current level of CO2.
If we had, for example, 1200 ppm of CO2 in the atmosphere, the Earth would be greener and more lush.
Yet for some reason, environmentalists hate the thought of plants having more nutrients. They want the Earth to be “green,” they say, by eliminating CO2 from the atmosphere, taking away the single most important nutrient for photosynthesis and plant metabolism.
The burning of fossil fuels releases nutrients into the air that plants need to survive. Instead of keeping all the carbon trapped underground, fossil fuel “consumption” actually frees carbon to be used by plants in support of a greener, more lush, more biodiverse ecosystem across the planet.
When carbon is trapped in fossil fuels under ground, that carbon is isolated from the plants that need it.
When fossil fuels are burned, that carbon is finally released into the air so that plants can use it to synthesize the molecules we all use and enjoy, from vitamin C to anti-cancer compounds such as sulforaphane, found in broccoli. Yes, it’s made of carbon: (C6H11NOS2)
Sulforaphane is a lifesaving anti-cancer nutrient that’s synthesized by cruciferous vegetables which pull carbon dioxide out of the air in order to build sulforaphane molecules. If you hate carbon, you hate sulforaphane and millions of other plant-based molecules that are made out of carbon.
A war on carbon is a war on plants, nutrition, herbs, natural medicine, superfoods and life itself. Only a complete moron, a raging lunatic or a brainwashed idiot could be convinced to think that carbon is bad for the planet.
Yet that describes about 90% of the “scientific establishment,” now consisting of complete anti-science idiots who have forgotten how photosynthesis works and why it’s the basis of ecology for the entire planet.
If you really want to “green” the planet, keep consuming clean sources of hydrocarbons such as natural gas, because they release trapped carbon into the atmosphere where plants can finally use it.
Even burning gasoline in your vehicle actually releases CO2 that plants can use. Far from destroying the world, fossil fuels are actually the very source of carbon that can help “green” the world.
If you don’t understand that, you don’t understand the very basis of life on our planet: Photosynthesis.
And if you support the elimination of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere, you support the extermination of all complex life on planet Earth.
If environmentalists succeed in eliminating carbon, they will exterminate life on Earth
Notably, if environmentalists ever succeed in eliminating carbon from the atmosphere, they will almost instantly exterminate all recognizable life on Earth.
Is this their goal? Is the environmental movement some kind of suicide cult? Or, better yet, are they actually pushing an insidious agenda of terraforming planet Earth to make it uninhabitable by humans?
Or are they just stupid and suicidal?
Personally, I wouldn’t necessarily mind all the environmentalists going off to their own planet somewhere and exterminating themselves with their suicidal intentions, but the problem we have is that they are trying to murder the planet where the rest of us live.
That cannot be allowed. The life-killing lunatics must be stopped.
They are ecological murderers… botanical eugenicists. They want to destroy all plant life on Earth in the name of “saving the planet,” and they don’t seem to mind the fact that human civilization cannot possibly survive their insane agendas rooted in either mass delusion or murderous intent.
They’re either trying to kill all life on the planet, in other words, or they’re so incredibly stupid that they’ve been talked into supporting mass murder in the name of environmentalism.
Either way, they are death cult lunatics, and if we hope to survive their dangerous, planet-killing schemes like “carbon sequestration” or “global dimming” (see below), we must rip these lunatics from power, take their hands off the controls and put them all in straight jackets where they belong.
Simply put, there is no future for the human race if the current breed of lunatic environmentalists are allowed to run their “death cult” programs that would shut down photosynthesis and exterminate all recognizable life on our planet.
Thank God carbon dioxide is produced by every living mammal on the planet - including you - meaning that you can help save the planet by taking a jog and simply exhaling.
In the spirit of that simple, inescapable truth, I propose a new bumper sticker: Piss off a liberal. Just BREATHE.
The war on sunlight and the new scheme of “global dimming”
Waging war on carbon isn’t the end of the lunacy of whacko environmentalists. They also think there’s something wrong with sunlight, another key input for photosynthesis.
They’ve launched a program of “global dimming” that seeks to literally pollute the atmosphere by dispersing millions of tons of smog (sulfur dioxide) into the atmosphere, running 4,000 flights a year over the next 15 years, all in the name of “geoengineering” the atmosphere. (These are the same lunatics who said “chemtrails” were a conspiracy theory; now they’ve re-named it “Stratospheric Aerosol Injection” and claim it will save the world.)
In essence, they are terraforming the Earth and making it uninhabitable by humans. Are they completely insane, or are they prepping the planet for colonization by something that isn’t human? (Coming soon: Terraforming.news)
Houston Anthropologist Reveals Irrefutable Proof That Recorded History Is Wrong January 20 2020 | From: WakingTimes
Evidence Found Across the Globe of Highly Evolved Human Species from before the Ice Age, Demand Scientific Recognition of our Past that Depicts Societies of Advanced Technology and Culture.
Houston anthropologist, Dr. Semir Osmanagich, founder of the Bosnian Archaeology Park, the most active archaeology site in the world, declares that irrefutable scientific evidence exists of ancient civilizations with advanced technology that leaves us no choice but to change our recorded history.
An examination of the age of structures across the earth reveals conclusively that they were built by advanced civilizations from over 29,000 years ago.
“Acknowledging that we are witness to fundamental proof of advanced civilizations dating back over 29,000 years and an examination of their societal structures forces the World to reconsider its understanding of the development of civilization and history,” explains Dr. Semir Osmanagich.
“Conclusive data at the Bosnian Pyramid site revealed in 2008 and confirmed this year by several independent labs who conducted radio carbon testing dates the site at 29,400 +/-400 years minimum.”
The radiocarbon dating tests of 29,200 years +/- 400 years was done by Radiocarbon Lab from Kiew, Ukraine, on organic material found at the Bosnian Pyramid site. Physicist Dr. Anna Pazdur of Poland’s Silesian University first announced the news at a Press Conference in Sarajevo in August of 2008.
Professor of Classical Archaeology from the University of Alexandria Dr. Mona Haggag called this discovery “writing new pages in European and World history.”
The C14 date of 29,000 years at the Bosnian Archaeological Park was obtained from a piece of organic material retrieved from a clay layer inside the outer casing to the pyramid. It follows a sample date obtained during the 2012 dig season on material located above the concrete at 24,800 years, meaning this structure has a construction profile stretching back almost 30,000 years.
“The ancient people who built these pyramids knew the secrets of frequency and energy. They used these natural resources to develop technologies and undertake construction on scales we have never witnessed on earth,” said Dr. Osmanagich.
Evidence clearly shows that the pyramids were built as ancient energy machines aligned with the earth’s energy grid, providing energy for healing as well as power.
Ancient historians in the US have news just as astonishing as anything found in the far corners of the globe. For instance, the Rockwall discovery outside of Dallas, Texas, is only one example of how we are now re-examining ancient mysteries to reveal more about our past, right in the United States.
H2 (History 2) popular series Unearthing Ancient America recently filmed an episode about the Rockwall that will air later this year. The Texas site is a complex and massive wall ten miles in diameter built over 20,000 years ago and covered by soil seven stories below the ground.
The question is by whom was this structure built and for what purpose and, most importantly, how can knowledge left by these past civilizations help shape our future?
Newly-revealed or rediscovered traces of ancient civilizations have ignited an innate curiosity about human origins as reflected by recent coverage in mainstream media and TV. The November 2013 issue of National Geographic: 100 Greatest Mysteries Revealed-Ancient Civilizations Unearthed says;
“Sometimes cultures leave behind mysteries that baffle those who come after them, from standing stones to coded manuscripts, indications that ancient people indeed had a profound purpose.”
Forward-thinking scientists continue to pursue knowledge from our past that is useful to determine a better future. Renowned author Michal Cremo in his book Forbidden Archeology theorizes that knowledge of advanced Homo-sapiens has been suppressed or ignored by the scientific establishment because it contradicts the current views of human origins that don’t agree with the dominant paradigm.
Cremo’s body of work has been described as “a useful teaching resource, raising a wide range of issues covering aspects of knowledge transfer, sure to be provocative in the classroom.” It has been reviewed with widespread appraisal by hundreds of academic journals.
Gobekli Tepe in Eastern Turkey
Results clearly indicate that similar advanced civilizations of humans were present all across the globe at that time in history. For example, Gobekli Tepe located in Eastern Turkey, is a vast complex of enormous megalithic stone circles with a radius of between 10 and 20 meters, much larger than the well-known Stonehenge in Great Britain.
Excavations at Gobekli Tepe that began there in 1995 revealed radio carbon dating at least 11,600 years. German archaeologist Dr. Klaus Schmidt from the German Archaeological Institute, Berlin, Germany, with the support of ArchaeoNova Institute from Heidelberg, Germany, has led the excavation of these recently-discovered pre-historic megalithic circles at the Turkey location.
“Gobekli Tepe is one of the most fascinating Neolithic locations in the world,” Dr. Klaus Schmidt claims. But as he explains in a recent report, to understand the new finds, archaeologists need to work closely with specialists in comparative religion, architectural and art theory, cognitive and evolutionary psychology, sociologists using social network theory, and others.
“It is the complex story of the earliest, large settled communities, their extensive networking, and their communal understanding of their world, perhaps even the first organized religions and their symbolic representations of the cosmos,” as reported by Klaus Schmidt.
In addition to the megalithic structures, figures and carvings have been discovered, depicting animals of pre historic nature such as dinosaurs and other wild life. Since excavations started in 1995, four of the circles have been partially cleaned, but it is thought that there are a total of up to 50 circles hidden underground.
These vast monoliths, soaring seven meters in height and 25 tons in mass at Gobekli Tepe, are situated right in the heart of what we perceive as the origin of civilization. This find offers new guidance to the true history of earth and our ancient civilizations.
“Our archaeological research goal is not to simply uncover all of the megalithic circles but to try to figure out their purpose,” adds Schmidt.
Bosnian Pyramid Now in Eighth Year: Proof of Advanced Civilizations from over 30,000 years ago
The Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids now in the eighth year of excavation spans six square kilometers in the Visoko River Basin 40km northwest of Sarajevo. Comprised of four ancient pyramids almost three times the size of Giza and an extensive subterranean pyramid tunnel complex, new discoveries each year continue to reveal proof of a much different history of mankind on earth.
The central pyramid of the Sun rises a colossal 420 meters in to the air and has a mass of millions of tons. By comparison the Great pyramid of Cheops (Khufu) in the Giza plateau is 146 meters high, making the Bosnian Pyramids the largest and oldest known pyramids on the planet.
Since research began at the Bosnian site, Dr. Osmanagich has amazed the scientific and archaeological community by gathering a team of interdisciplinary engineers, physicists and researchers from around the world to conduct open and transparent investigation of the site to try and discover the true nature and purpose of this pyramidal complex.
“This is an unknown culture presenting highly-advanced arts and sciences, technology capable of forming truly massive structures and we believe in that process demonstrating an ability to harness pure energy resources,” comments Tim Moon, who has recently joined Osmanagich as lead archeologist at the Bosnian site.
The archaeological project delivered another significant finding this year in the pyramid tunnel complex known as Ravine. Tunneling deep into a ridge line leading toward the Pyramid of the Sun the team has unearthed several megalith stones.
Oh yeah, that one was definitely made with ropes and pulleys too. Sigh.
We are locating foundation walls around its perimeter and cut stone blocks.” Large quantities of artifacts have been recovered from the associated tunnels leading to the site, including effigies painted on stone, art objects and a series of hieroglyphics or ancient texts carved into the tunnel walls.
Dr. Osmangich stresses that it is time for open sharing of knowledge so we can understand and learn from our past.
“It is time for us to open our minds to the true nature of our origin and destruction of each other as a civilization on this planet. Our mission here is to realign science with spirituality in order to progress as a species, and this demands a clear path of shared knowledge.”
Visitors are welcome to the Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids and its Foundation offers a volunteer program each dig season, running June to September.
To hear Dr. Sam’s interview on Lost Knowledge go here.
For more on the Bosnian Pyramids go to www.icbp.ba.
Advertising Watchdog Partially Upholds 5G Advertisement Claiming Wireless Tech Is Harmful & Wifi, 5G And EMF Pollution Can Cause Psychiatric Effects In Humans, Plus Spontaneous Abortions, Infertility And Cellular DNA Damage
January 19 2020 | From: Stuff / NaturalNews / Wired / Various An advertisement that claimed 5G technology was harmful to people and animals' health has been removed following a decision from the Advertising Standards Authority.
The flyer distributed in a Wellington suburb by advocacy group 5G Free New Zealand claimed that radiation emitted by 5G and wireless technologies could "increase cancer risk, alter brain development and damage sperm" and posed a threat to wildlife.
It also claimed that "over 200 scientists and physicians worldwide who have researched the biological and health effects of radio-frequency radiation have signed the 5G appeal, calling for a moratorium on the use of 5G technology".
The complainant said the statements in the advertisement were false and misleading.
5G Free NZ, whose tagline is "don't let them fry your brain", defended the advertisement saying all its claims were based on published science and actions taken by scientists.
But the authority's complaints board upheld the complaint in part because four of the six claims the complainant had issues with were not sufficiently proven.
According to the Advertising Standards Authority codes of practice, advertisements must be truthful, balance and not misleading and advocacy advertising must clearly state the identity and position of the advertiser.
The board agreed the advertisement's message was a warning about 5G wireless technology because it could be harmful to human health and the environment, and that a significant number of scientists were concerned about it.
While the board found it was clear the flyer was advocacy advertising, the identity of the advertiser, 5G Free NZ could have been made clearer.
The board said that any claims made about about potential harm that could result from the use of new technology needed to be "adequately substantiated".
On the claim that more than 200 scientists and physicians worldwide had researched the biological health effects of radio-frequency radiation, the board found the advertiser had provided sufficient evidence of this.
Sue Grey & Joe Rifici: How to Stop the 5G Deployment in NZ
Joe Rifici of 5G Free Nelson and lawyer Sue Grey sat down together to discuss the question on everyone's mind: what can we do to halt the 5G deployment under way in New Zealand?
The board also did not uphold the complaint about the line "wireless radiation consumes mega amounts more energy than do wired options of communication".
The board found the complainant was not disputing whether wireless radiation consumes more energy than wired options of communication, rather that the advertiser was suggesting its opposition was "to mobile phones per se, not just to 5G".
The board said it was up the advertiser's choice on how it wanted to present its arguments and that statement was not misleading.
However, the board did find that 5G Free NZ's the four other claims were unsubstantiated - "radiation from small cells is not small", "wireless antennas emit microwaves - non-ionising radiofrequency radiation - and essentially function as cell towers", "5G poses a threat to our wildlife" and "independent science shows the type of radiation emitted by 5G and wireless technologies is capable of harming our health".
As a result the advertisement was pulled and upheld in part.
Wifi, 5G And EMF Pollution Can Cause Psychiatric Effects In Humans, Plus Spontaneous Abortions, Infertility And Cellular DNA Damage
Are you aware of just how much electromagnetic pollution is impacting your body on a daily basis?
The problem isn’t just wireless internet, by the way: it’s also fifth-generation mobile telecommunication technology, also known as 5G, as well as every other source of electromagnetic frequencies (EMFs) that exists all around us.
A review published in the peer-reviewed journal Environmental Research draws attention to the many threats of WiFi in terms of human health – and they’re pretty serious.
In addition to spurring the death of healthy cells and damaging human DNA, WiFi signals can lead to psychiatric damage in those who are persistently exposed to them – think depression, difficulty thinking clearly, mood swings, and other behavioral abnormalities.
Neuropsychiatric damage is a common adverse effect of wireless exposure, and it could explain why many people in the modern age suffer from chemical imbalances in the brain that negatively impact their ability to function consistently.
One of the studies included in this review suggests that WiFi exposure during pregnancy could cause impaired neurodevelopment in unborn babies.
WiFi is also associated with increased cholinesterase and changes in GABA and cholinergic transmission, decreased special learning, and a “greatly lowered” ability to “distinguish familiar from novel objects.”
Spontaneous abortion is another common effect of wireless exposure that stems from chromosomal mutations. Besides lowering fertility in both males and females, wireless signals cause oxidative stress that, in pregnant woman, can cause them not to have healthy deliveries.
This includes fifth-generation wireless technology, or 5G, which we’ve shown is a highly damaging form of microwave radiation that just might be the most damaging form of wireless radiation yet.
For more related news about the 5G rollout, be sure to check out 5Galert.com.
5G is Imposed on the People - While the Government Protects Itself
The surroundings of the EU-parliament, WHO, UN, as well as the city of Gates & Co. are safe from 5G radiation at first. However, the new mobile communication standard 5G is imposed on the people although massive opposition is coming from the population. Coincidence or political calculi?
Is All of this Wireless Pollution Spurring on Cancer?
Recognizing the incredible amount of cellular and DNA damage that can arise from perpetual wireless exposure, it only makes sense that cancer is a common outcome after many years of exposure.
Dr. Martin Pall presents four pieces of evidence that EMFs, acting via what’s known as voltage-gated calcium channel (VGCC) activity, can cause cancer.
These include:
By attacking the DNA of cells
By disrupting the tight junctions of cell membranes
By inflammatory carcinogenesis
By triggering mutations through excess activity of T-type VGCCs
Multiple WiFi studies referenced in the review suggest that exposure to microwave EMFs actively reduces testosterone levels inside the body, leading to decreased testicular size. EMFs also damage testicular epithelial structure, as well as induce gross testicular histological changes.
Further, EMFs can decrease spermatogenesis, revealing at least one way that EMFs impair healthy pregnancy and reproductive function.
Similar changes can occur in women, as EMF exposure tends to increase nitric oxide (NO) levels in the body, which in turn inhibits cytochrome P450s.
P450s, in case you’re unaware, are involved in steroid hormone synthesis, and their inhibition can lead to decreased levels of not just testosterone, but also estrogen and progesterone.
One surefire way to help mitigate this is to consume more antioxidant-rich foods, including those that are high in vitamin C.
Anything that can help to remedy the oxidative and DNA damage caused by EMFs will contribute to protecting your body against brain, reproductive, and other associated health damage.
“Telecommunications industry-linked individuals and groups have claimed that there are no and cannot possibly be any health impacts of Wi-Fi,” the review explains.
"However with Wi-Fi exposures becoming more and more common and with many of our exposures being without our consent, there is much concern about possible Wi-Fi health effects."”
5G Smartphones Cause Cancer; Big Wireless Doesn’t Want You To Know
I have been waiting and waiting for this particular form of popular fear to surface again. Electro-radiation fear has been subterranean for decades now.
If smartphones cause cancer (and who knows, maybe they do, why not) then it’s even more likely that electric blankets, high-tension lines, microwave ovens and even household electrical wiring cause even more cancer.
Plus, there must be thousands of other things that cause far more cancer than 5G smartphones, as otherwise we’d be seeing a colossal mortality wave of men and women with brain tumors and most likely ear tumors.
Ever been to California? Where you walk into certain buildings with loud, alarming signs that declare, “Something In Here Causes Cancer In the State of California, Only, There’s Nothing You Can Do About That, Except To Worry”? This is an intervention that is very much like that.
How Big Wireless Made Us Think That Cell Phones Are Safe: A Special Investigation
The disinformation campaign - and massive radiation increase - behind the 5G rollout.
Mark Hertsgaard, the Nation’s investigative editor and the author of seven books, and award-winning investigative journalist Mark Dowie offer the first exposé of the wireless industry’s decades-long, global campaign to war-game science, manipulate media coverage, and massage government officials into convincing the public that cell phones are safer than independent science suggests.
Everyone knows Big Tobacco lied about cigarettes; Big Oil lied about climate change.
This is the third leg of the stool: how Big Wireless used the same exact playbook to deceive the public and create the appearance of scientific uncertainty - making people think that cell phones are safer than independent science suggests.
This, despite the fact that the wireless industry’s own scientists privately warned it decades ago there were “serious questions” about wireless radiation’s links to cancer and genetic damage.
(One key player has not been swayed by all the wireless-friendly research: the insurance industry.
We found not a single insurance company that would sell a product-liability policy that covered cell-phone radiation.
“Why would we want to do that?” one executive asked with a chuckle before pointing to more than two dozen lawsuits outstanding against wireless companies, demanding a total of $1.9 billion in damages.)
Cell Phone Radiation & 5G Dangers | An In-Depth Exploration
In the 1980s, cell phones were allowed onto the US consumer market without any government safety testing.
This year, 5G is poised to roll out across the country, where antennas the size of a pizza box will have to be installed approximately every 250 feet to ensure connectivity.
Wall Street is salivating at the potential trillions of dollars in economic activity - but by fast-tracking the technology and not doing premarket safety testing, will we make the same mistake with 5G as we did with cell phones?
According to the National Toxicology Program’s study, commissioned by the FDA in 1999, there is much more evidence of a cancer-cell phone connection than is widely assumed.
More shockingly, NTP brass attempted to water down the public health implications of their findings - in line with the wireless industry’s long-standing denial that cell phone users face risks.
Ten Insane, Completely Irrational Things Millions Of People Believe As We Enter The 2020s
January 18 2020 | From: NewsTarget / Various The 2020s may one day be called the “decade of insanity,” given all the insane things believed by a surprisingly large number of people.
The frantic beliefs of these people are, of course, driving them to the brink of insanity. [Comment: This article is somewhat dramatic, however it does highlight some highly relevant points.]
When the masses can be convinced that they are all going to die, they tend to become rather crazed and irrational.
And that’s where we are today in America [The West], no longer the “land of the free” but rather the “cesspool of the insane,” led by psycho-terrorism organizations known as CNN, the Washington Post and the New York Times [The Mainstream Media].
They’ve all abandoned journalism and now prioritize carrying out acts of psychological terrorism (or what I’ve called “journo-terrorism”) against the people.
So now we launch the decade of the 2020s as a nation that’s largely run by criminals and traitors (i.e. most of Congress and the bureaucracy), where the university students are taught by libtard nut jobs pretending to be “professors,” where investors think the stock market will never suffer a correction again, and where CNN literally reports that men can get pregnant and give birth to human babies, some of whom the Left says should probably be murdered in the name of “women’s rights” (i.e. abortion).
We are now living in the Age of Insanity, and it’s not looking any better for 2020 and beyond.
So here’s a list of 10 totally insane things that millions of Americans believe right now as we enter this decade of insanity.
Hint: Given all the 5G radiation, brain damaging fluoride in the water, heavy metals in the food and hormones in food packaging, it’s certain that the insanity is only going to get worse, so buckle up and prepare for life in a mad, mad world.
Insane Belief #1: Men Can Become Women by Wishing it So
Nearly all Leftists literally believe there are more than two genders and that a person of one gender can magically transform into a completely different gender just by wishing. (See Gender.news for many examples.)
Yes, Leftists now believe that men can get pregnant and have babies, and children are being taught that there are an infinite number of genders when, in reality, there are only two.
By the same token, children are also being taught that getting the right answer on a test question isn’t important anymore… it’s how you feel about your answer that’s the new “reality.”
Insane Belief #2: Stock Market Crashes are a Thing of the Past
This belief afflicts nearly all the masses, the oblivious retail investors who stupidly think their pension funds and mutual fund investments will keep growing forever, with no retractions, corrections or crashes.
So they buy and buy even as we are in such overbought territory that all the professional investors are selling everything and heading to their cabins in the woods with bars of gold.
In 2020, the typical American is now in “full FOMO” mode (Fear Of Missing Out) and is almost fanatically plunging all assets into the stock market in a desperate effort to chase the irrational exuberance to its final, disastrous end.
When the day of reckoning comes for these markets, the masses will be destroyed. But if the Fed plays along with more money creation and spontaneous liquidity, that day may yet be delayed until perhaps 2021 (or not).
Insane Belief #3: The Earth Will be Destroyed in 10 Years if We Don’t Stop Using Fossil Fuels
AOC reminds us that we now have a clinically retarded lunatic as a member of Congress, and she quite literally believes the entire planet will cease to exist in just ten years if we don’t immediately stop burning fossil fuels.
But she’s not alone: The incessant fearmongering of the journo-terrorism media has managed to transform all sorts of previously rational people into raving climate lunatics who, when they speak, sound dumber than dirt.
If we were to halt the use of fossil fuels, of course, the global food supply would almost immediately collapse, leading to mass starvation, disease and a population implosion. Perhaps this is what the globalists really want, it seems, since they keep demanding it at every turn.
What’s new in all this is the fact that climate lunatics are now terrorizing children, then holding them up as “warriors” to fight for “climate justice” when, in reality, they’re just terrorized, abused young people who will one day come to harshly resent how they were exploited and psychologically terrorized by left-wing lunatics for political gain.
Insane Belief #4: A Human Baby that’s Born Alive Isn’t Really “Alive” Until the Mother Decides She Wants to Keep It
According to the same lunatic Leftists who have decided that men can somehow become women by wishing for a sex change, human babies that are born alive and healthy aren’t really “alive” until the mother decides she wants to keep that baby.
Until that moment comes, the mother, the doctor and apparently anyone in the room with a baseball bat can legally murder that child in the name of “progressivism,” Leftists insist.
This is the new culture of the mainstream Left: Infanticide and violence against human babies. Celebrated and applauded by all Democrats.
And they justify it all by claiming that Trump is bad, therefore murdering babies makes it all even, somehow.
Yes, it’s insane, but this is how the Left thinks. And it brings up the question: If these people are willing to murder their own children, do you really think they will hesitate to murder their political opponents if given the opportunity?
Keep that in mind the next time some baby-killing Governor (Northam, anyone?) announces he’s coming for your guns.
Heck, they probably need your guns to help them execute all the children they plan to kill in the hospitals, while Michelle Wolf celebrates how killing babies makes her feel “like God.”
Insane Belief #5: Flat Earth
Yes, in the year 2020, we still have millions of Americans who quite literally believe the Earth is flat… like a disc floating in space. They also believe the sun and moon are discs, and that satellites don’t exist, and that gravity isn’t real.
And they are rather fanatical about these beliefs, convincing themselves that there is a global conspiracy to silence the truth about the “flat Earth” in order to prevent humans from discovering the edges where you can step off into outer space… or something.
At least the Flat Earthers aren’t fascists who demand we give up combustion engines or something, like AOC. Mostly, the Flat Earth movement is all about a “thought experiment,” but they aren’t dangerous like Leftists who want to murder children and collapse entire economies.
If we had Flat Earthers in congress instead of climate lunatics, we’d actually be better off, come to think of it. And elections would be far more entertaining.
Insane Belief #6: All Vaccines are Safe, Because Somebody on the News Said So
It’s amazing how many people still believe vaccines are safe, even when the federal government itself publishes vaccine damage statistics and details of the billions of dollars in payouts that have been made to the families of vaccine-damaged children. You can download the data yourself at VAERS.HHS.GOV.
Yes, the CDC openly admits vaccines contain neurotoxic substances such as formaldehyde, mercury, squalene and aluminum.
There is no debate that vaccines carry risk of harm and manage to harm a great number of children each year, yet many American adults who consider themselves to be “informed” have no clue of this reality.
That’s because anyone who talks about vaccine safety is immediately de-platformed from all the major tech platforms.
And that’s happening because the vaccine deep state is run by the same CIA that runs the tech giants, and they’re using vaccines as a depopulation bioweapon against humanity, right now at this very moment. If you’re curious to see the overwhelming evidence that proves this assertion, check out this article and video.
Insane Belief #7: The Mainstream Media Tells the Truth, or at Least Tries To
Of all the really stupid beliefs held by modern Westerners, the belief that the mainstream media is even attempting to tell the truth is among the most insane.
It’s not just that CNN, the NYT, the WashPost, MSNBC, etc., get every major story wrong, it’s the fact that they intend to lie to their audiences.
For years, they’ve peddled false conspiracies about Russia and election meddling, always running cover for Hillary Clinton, Joe Biden and the deep state, while knowingly publishing damned lies about Trump and his supporters.
The corporate media in America is, plainly stated, openly engaged in criminal treason against the United States of America, yet there are still a (shrinking number of) morons who can somehow watch CNN’s Brian Stelter and not laugh out loud or puke all over themselves.
I’m not sure which is shrinking faster: CNN’s audience, or the brains of the remaining few who somehow still watch CNN.
Insane Belief #8: Food Isn’t Medicine, and “Real” Medicine Can Only be Acquired From Pharmacies
Despite all the remarkable research about healing foods, nutrients, disease prevention, superfoods and “miraculous” food cures, there are still people - many of them are doctors - who think the only “real” medicine comes from a pharmacy.
Somehow, we are entering the decade of 2020 while millions of people still carry a belief system from the 1950s, when it was widely believed there were just four vitamins, and food was thought to be useless in promoting good health.
Now, of course, we know the truth: Pharmaceuticals are fake medicine, and food is the real medicine.
If you’re not preventing disease and healing yourself through food, you’re not really up to speed on what modern science has documented about food as medicine.
In fact, we cover these breakthroughs every day at sites like FoodScience.news or SuperfoodsNews.com. Check them out to stay informed and prevent disease on a daily basis.
Insane Belief #9: All White People are Evil, and the Only “Experts” in the World are Children
This is a two-fer: The insane, delusional Left has now convinced millions of people that all white people are evil, but also that children are the new “experts” on things like gun control and climate change.
Yep, adults are stupid and children have all the answers. Is this a freaking Disney movie?
And if you put up a poster that says, “It’s okay to be white,” you are immediately accused of hate crimes. Yes, it’s okay to be black, and it’s okay to be brown, but it’s never okay to be white in today’s insane “progressive” society defined by left-wing bigotry, racism and hate.
And if you’re Asian, the entire left-wing university system will brazenly discriminate against you for being too smart, making sure they can usher in a bunch of unqualified minorities who can’t compete with Asians when it comes to cognitive tests, so they’re given bonus points for “social justice,” whatever that means.
As we enter the 2020s, I do want to welcome all the Asians to the club, where we are all called “racists” by the very libtard lunatics whose policies are, by definition, the most racist of all.
Just remember, if you don’t agree with everything a Leftist says, you are engaged in hate speech.
Insane Belief #10: The World as You Know it is Sustainable and Normal, and Nothing Will Collapse Because that’s Unimaginable
Finally, the really big false belief is summarized by the phrase, “normalcy bias.” People think the world will always operate as it does now because that’s all they know.
They are incapable of imagining anything else, such as a grid down collapse, an economic collapse, World War III, a civil war on the streets of America, a food collapse followed by mass starvation, visitation by aliens and so on.
So they lead their pointless lives as sheeple living out some sort of mad experiment in shared insanity, oblivious to the reality that almost everything they think is permanent is actually headed for collapse.
Much of what currently functions in the world is entirely unsustainable, and that means it must come to an end.
Endless money creation must come to an end. Government debt spending must come to an end. The loss of fossil water to irrigate food crops must come to an end.
The ecological destruction of the planet will eventually collapse the food supply on which we depend. The pensions will collapse once the market corrects.
The dollar will eventually be abandoned as a failed fiat currency. The nuclear power plants will eventually fail and melt down, perhaps following a severe earthquake that already places multiple nuke plants in California in the direct line of fire.
You get the point. The history of our world has rarely seen as long a run of peace and prosperity as the one we are currently experiencing.
Most of human history has been punctuated by genocide, democide, world wars and economic collapse. The fool thinks that’s all “history” now, and modern humans finally have it all figured out, but the wise person knows that history repeats itself.
There’s nothing new under the sun, my friends, and all the stupid things humans did in the past are about to be magnified in the present because humans are more stupid today than ever before.
This is partially thanks to Google, which is now in the business of suppressing human knowledge and dumbing down the masses, but it’s also the fault of the masses, who decided the internet was invented to deliver porn instead of wisdom.
Yes, we’re fighting against all this with the upcoming launch of our own search engine called Webseed.com - launching in January - which will focus on health and wellness content.
But that’s just a drop in the bucket compared to the ocean of idiocy that now defines those who both use and run Google, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. Will The West survive past 2025 as it is structured now?
It is my belief that America as we know it will not survive beyond 2025, which means these are in the last five years of a world structured as “normal,” at least as you and I have come to know it.
I hope I’m wrong, but I fear I’m right, as I was right about the 2000 dot com crash, the 2008 sub-prime housing bubble crash, the criminality of Obama, the false flag operations of the FBI and a hundred other accurate predictions I’ve made over the last two decades.
Believe what you wish, just know that the more closely your beliefs are aligned with reality, the better chance you have at surviving what’s coming. Those who believe nonsensical things won’t fare well as reality smack them hard.
A Whole Branch Of Science Turns Out To Be Fake
January 17 2020 | From: NoMoreFakeNews / Various Devotees of science often assume that what is called science is real and true. It must be. Otherwise, their faith is broken.
Their superficial understanding is shattered. Their “superior view” of the world is torpedoed.
Such people choose unofficial “anti-science” targets to attack. They never think of inspecting their own house for enormous fraud.
For example: Psychiatry.
An open secret has been slowly bleeding out into public consciousness for the past ten years.
There are no definitive laboratory tests for any so-called mental disorder.
And along with that:
All so-called mental disorders are concocted, named, labeled, described, and categorized by a committee of psychiatrists, from menus of human behaviors.
Their findings are published in periodically updated editions of The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM), printed by the American Psychiatric Association.
For years, even psychiatrists have been blowing the whistle on this hazy crazy process of “research."
Of course, pharmaceutical companies, who manufacture highly toxic drugs to treat every one of these “disorders,” are leading the charge to invent more and more mental-health categories, so they can sell more drugs and make more money.
But we have a mind-boggling twist. Under the radar, one of the great psychiatric stars, who has been out in front in inventing mental disorders, went public. He blew the whistle on himself and his colleagues. And for several years, almost no one noticed.
His name is Dr. Allen Frances, and he made VERY interesting statements to Gary Greenberg, author of a Wired article: “Inside the Battle to Define Mental Illness.” (Dec.27, 2010).
Major media never picked up on the interview in any serious way. It never became a scandal.
Dr. Allen Frances is the man who, in 1994, headed up the project to write the latest edition of the psychiatric bible, the DSM-IV. This tome defines and labels and describes every official mental disorder. The DSM-IV eventually listed 297 of them.
In an April 19, 1994, New York Times piece, “Scientist At Work,” Daniel Goleman called Frances “Perhaps the most powerful psychiatrist in America at the moment…”
Well, sure. If you’re sculpting the entire canon of diagnosable mental disorders for your colleagues, for insurers, for the government, for Pharma (who will sell the drugs matched up to the 297 DSM-IV diagnoses), you’re right up there in the pantheon.
Long after the DSM-IV had been put into print, Dr. Frances talked to Wired’s Greenberg and said the following:
“There is no definition of a mental disorder. It’s bullshit. I mean, you just can’t define it.”
BANG.
That’s on the order of the designer of the Hindenburg, looking at the burned rubble on the ground, remarking, “Well, I knew there would be a problem.”
After a suitable pause, Dr. Frances remarked to Greenberg, “These concepts [of distinct mental disorders] are virtually impossible to define precisely with bright lines at the borders.”
Frances should have mentioned the fact that his baby, the DSM-IV, had unscientifically rearranged earlier definitions of ADHD and Bipolar to permit many MORE diagnoses, leading to a vast acceleration of drug-dosing with highly powerful and toxic compounds.
Here is a smoking-gun statement made by another prominent mental-health expert, on an episode of PBS’ Frontline series. The episode was: “Does ADHD Exist?”
PBS FRONTLINE INTERVIEWER:Skeptics say that there’s no biological marker - that it [ADHD] is the one condition out there where there is no blood test, and that no one knows what causes it.
BARKLEY (Dr. Russell Barkley, professor of psychiatry and neurology at the University of Massachusetts Medical Center): That’s tremendously naïve, and it shows a great deal of illiteracy about science and about the mental health professions.
A disorder doesn’t have to have a blood test to be valid. If that were the case, all mental disorders would be invalid…There is no lab test for any mental disorder right now in our science. That doesn’t make them invalid.
Without intending to, Dr. Barkley blows an ear-shattering whistle on his own profession.
So let’s take Dr. Barkley to school. Medical science, and disease-research in particular, rests on the notion that you can make a diagnosis backed up by lab tests. If you can’t produce lab tests, you’re spinning fantasies.
These fantasies might be hopeful, they might be “educated guesses,” they might be launched from traditional centers of learning, they might be backed up by billions of dollars of grant money…but they’re still fantasies.
Dr. Barkley is essentially saying, “There is no lab test for any mental disorder. If a test were the standard of proof, we wouldn’t have science at all, and that would mean our whole profession rests on nothing - and that is unthinkable, so therefore a test doesn’t matter.”
That logic is no logic at all. That science is no science at all. Barkley is proving the case against himself. He just doesn’t want to admit it.
Psychiatry is all fraud all the time.
Without much of a stretch, you could say psychiatry has been the most widespread profiling operation in the history of the human race. Its goal has been to bring humans everywhere into its system.
It hardly matters which label a person is painted with, as long as it adds up to a diagnosis and a prescription of drugs.
300 so-called mental disorders caused by…what? No lab evidence. No defining diagnostic tests. No blood tests, saliva tests, brain scans, genetic assays. No nothing.
But psychiatrists continue to assert they are the masters of causation. They know what’s behind “mental disorders.” They’re in charge.
What about the generalized “chemical imbalance” hypothesis stating that all mental disorders stem from such imbalances in the brain?
Dr. Ronald Pies, the editor-in-chief emeritus of the Psychiatric Times, laid that hypothesis to rest in the July 11, 2011, issue of the Times with this staggering admission:
“In truth, the ‘chemical imbalance’ notion was always a kind of urban legend - never a theory seriously propounded by well-informed psychiatrists.”
Boom. Dead.
The point is, for decades the whole basis of psychiatric drug research, drug prescription, and drug sales has been: “we’re correcting a chemical imbalance in the brain.”
The problem was, researchers had never established a normal baseline for chemical balance. So they were shooting in the dark. Worse, they were faking a theory. Pretending they knew something when they didn’t.
In his 2011 piece in Psychiatric Times, Dr. Pies tries to protect his colleagues in the psychiatric profession with this fatuous remark:
“In the past 30 years, I don’t believe I have ever heard a knowledgeable, well-trained psychiatrist make such a preposterous claim [about chemical imbalance in the brain], except perhaps to mock it…
The ‘chemical imbalance’ image has been vigorously promoted by some pharmaceutical companies, often to the detriment of our patients’ understanding.”
Absurd. First of all, many psychiatrists have explained and do explain to their patients that the drugs are there to correct a chemical imbalance.
And second, if all well-trained psychiatrists have known, all along, that the chemical-imbalance theory is a fraud…
…then why on earth have they been prescribing tons of drugs to their patients…
…since those drugs are developed on the false premise that they correct an imbalance?
The honchos of psychiatry are seeing the handwriting on the wall. Their game has been exposed.
The chemical imbalance theory is a fake. There are no defining physical tests for any of the 300 so-called mental disorders.
All diagnoses are based on arbitrary clusters or menus of human behavior. The drugs are harmful, dangerous, toxic. Some of them induce violence. Suicide, homicide. Some of the drugs cause brain damage.
So the shrinks have to move into another model of “mental illness,” another con, another fraud. And they’re looking for one.
For example, genes plus “psycho-social factors” cause mental disorders. A mish-mash of more unproven science.
“New breakthrough research on the functioning of the brain is paying dividends and holds great promise…” Professional PR and gibberish.
Meanwhile, the business model demands drugs for sale.
So even though the chemical-imbalance nonsense has been discredited, it will continue on as a dead man walking, a zombie.
Two questions always pop up when I write a critique of psychiatry. The first one is: psychiatric researchers are doing a massive amount of work studying brain function. They do have tests.
Yes, experimental tests. But NONE of those tests are contained in the DSM, the psychiatric bible, as the basis of the definition of ANY mental disorder. If the tests were conclusive, they would be heralded in the DSM. They aren’t.
The second question is: if all these mental disorders are fiction, why are so many people saddled with problems? Why are some people off the rails? Why are they crazy?
The list of potential answers is very long. A real practitioner would focus on one patient at a time and try to discover what has affected him to such a marked degree. For example:
Severe nutritional deficiency. Toxic dyes and colors in processed food. Ingestion of pesticides and herbicides. Profound sensitivities to certain foods.
The ingestion of toxic pharmaceuticals. Life-altering damage as a result of vaccines. Exposure to environmental chemicals. Heavy physical and emotional abuse in the home or at school.
Battlefield stress and trauma (also present in certain neighborhoods). Prior head injury. Chronic infection. Alcohol and street drugs. Debilitating poverty. Other items could be added.
Psychiatry is: fake, fraud, pseudoscience from top to bottom. It’s complete fiction dressed up as fact.
But the obsessed devotees of science tend to back away from this.
They close their eyes. If a “branch of knowledge” as extensive as psychiatry is nothing more than an organized delusion, what other aspect of science might likewise be parading as truth, when it is actually mere paper blowing in the wind?
Higher Fluoride Levels During Pregnancy May Be Linked With Lower IQ Scores In Kids: Study
January 16 2020 | From: CTVNews / Various
Children whose mothers were exposed to higher levels of fluoride in their tap water during pregnancy scored lower on IQ tests than those with mothers who had less exposure while pregnant, according to a new study.
In an effort to determine whether fluoride should be considered a neurotoxin, researchers from York University in Toronto conducted an observational study of 512 mother-child pairs from six major Canadian cities.
Of this sample, 40 per cent lived in communities with fluoridated municipal water.
“We went into this not knowing what to expect… no study had been done on pregnancy and fluoride exposure,” lead author Christine Till told CTV News.Comment: Really? See below...
"It was shocking to see the size of the effect. I suppose it’s a shock because we were all told that it’s safe… but when you think about it, we shouldn’t be so shocked because there is a literature and decades of work showing this effect.
There are biological reasons the fetus can be at increased risk of neurotoxicity, so we are taking these findings very seriously."
The Public Health Agency of Canada (PHAC) says fluoride molecules can strengthen teeth by hardening tooth enamel, contributing to tooth surface re-mineralization, and deterring oral bacteria.
For decades, governments around the world have added fluoride to public drinking water to reduce rates of tooth decay in children and adults.
Despite being endorsed by major public health bodies around the world, including the World Health Organization and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, which considers water fluoridation one of the top 10 public health achievements of the 20th century, communities have resisted adding the mineral to their water supply out of concern that it is potentially toxic.
According to PHAC, only 13.9 million Canadians or 38 per cent of the population had access to public fluoridated water in 2017.
By comparison, the York University researchers said that 66 per cent of U.S. residents had access to fluoridated water.
Europe, on the other hand, only had fluoridated water for 3 per cent of its residents, but they rely on other strategies to distribute the mineral, such as supplements and dental treatments.
For this study, published in the JAMA Pediatrics journal on Monday, the academics used information from the Maternal-Infant Research on Environmental Chemicals report to determine the potential association between fluoride exposure during pregnancy and cognitive development in children.
The children’s exposure to the mineral was estimated by the fluoride concentration in the mother’s urine samples while they were pregnant and how much water they reported they consumed during their first and third trimester.
When the children were three to four years old, their IQ was assessed using the Wechsler Primary and Preschool Scale of Intelligence test.
After controlling for other confounding factors, such as fluoride metabolism and children’s intellectual abilities, the researchers found that a 1-mg/L increase in maternal urinary fluoride concentration was associated with 4.5-point lower IQ score in boys. There wasn’t a statistically significant association in girls, the study said.
"This is a major loss of IQ points that would have societal and economic impacts; it would definitely be felt at a population level,” said Till.
“4.5 points is a dramatic loss of IQ, comparable to what you’d see with lead exposure, and that’s why we’re so concerned.”
However, when the exposure was measured only by the pregnant mothers’ self-reported daily intake of water, a 1-mg/L increase in fluoride was associated with a deficit of 3.7 points in both boys and girls.
In a statement to CTV News, the Canadian Dental Association said it was reviewing the findings.
“While the study does not address the oral health benefits of fluoridated municipal water, the Canadian Dental Association is reviewing the findings in consultation with our colleagues in the scientific community,” read the statement.
"It is important to recognize that this is one study with small sample sizes within the context of more than 40 years of other research on the safety and health benefits of fluoridated water.
Careful attention to oral health is particularly important during pregnancy, and CDA recommends that women see their dentist as part of maintaining their oral health.”
The study’s authors acknowledged some of the limitations of their research, including its observational design, how fetal fluoride exposure and estimated fluoride intake was measured, and the lack of assessment of fluoride exposure during infancy.
The researchers said their findings indicate a possible need to reduce fluoride intake during pregnancy.
“Based on our findings, we’re recommending that women reduced fluoride intake during pregnancy,” Till said.
"It’s important to note that there are many sources of fluoride, but one major source is fluoridated water, that counts for about 70 per cent of our intake.”
Till acknowledged that the study results may be controversial.
“Given the nature of the findings and their potential implications, we subjected it to additional scrutiny for its methods and the presentation of its findings,” read a statement issued alongside the publication.
“Publishing it serves as testament to the fact that JAMA Pediatrics is committed to disseminating the best science based entirely on the rigor of the methods and the soundness of the hypotheses tested, regardless of how contentious the results may be.”
The Global AI Index - The Artificial Intelligence Arms Race
January 15 2020 | From: TortoiseMedia / Various A groundbreaking new index ranking 54 countries in the AI race.
The world is in the grip of an unprecedented AI arms race, with the US and China surging ahead in a contest that could reshape our societies from the ground up, new data reveals.
More than 10,000 artificial intelligence (AI) companies have been founded since 2015, attracting private funding of $37 billion, and thousands of extra programmers have been drafted onto AI projects globally in the last three years as demand for the technology soars, a new index by Tortoise Intelligence shows.
AI technology simulates human intelligence to process information faster than conventional computers – often by learning from its mistakes. It has the potential to transform multiple industries from healthcare to finance, but has also been used to covertly monitor populations, develop deadly weaponry and transform the labour market.
Elon Musk, the billionaire entrepreneur, and Sir Stephen Hawking, the theoretical physicist, have both warned about the dangers of such “thinking machines”.
In 2018 Musk said that AI was more dangerous than nuclear weapons and called for global regulation:
"It’s capable of vastly more than almost anyone knows and the rate of improvement is exponential.”
Hawking, who died last year, warned in 2014 that AI could:
"Spell the end of the human race”.
To investigate this shift, the Global AI Index by Tortoise Intelligence has ranked 54 countries based on their AI capabilities, measuring performance across 150 indicators including research, coding platforms, investment and government spending.
For the first time, it discloses the huge acceleration of AI across the globe as the technology becomes a new battleground for influence and power.
Since the Canadian government issued the first national AI strategy in 2017, at least 30 more countries have followed suit, our data shows. The number of AI companies has doubled in four years, with almost 20,000 now developing technologies ranging from self-driving cars to medical algorithms capable of detecting disease.
Total investment in AI firms last year topped $26 billion – up from $7 billion in 2015 – according to Crunchbase, a business information platform.
On Github, the world’s biggest open source development platform, the number of Chinese contributions to AI code rose from 150 per year in 2015 to 13,000 per year today. Those from Americans rose from 7,000 to 42,000.
Tortoise Intelligence has developed the Index to further understanding among policy makers, entrepreneurs and the public of a new technology that some suggest is a breakthrough as remarkable as the discovery of electricity.
“AI is one of the most important things humanity is working on,” Google CEO Sundar Pichai said last year. “It holds the potential for some of the biggest advances we are going to see.”
The Language of AI
Artificial intelligence is the defining technology of our future. Here is a short linguistic guide to help you navigate the revolution.
Algorithm: a set of rules that a computer can follow, as a mindless drone, in order to find a solution.
used in…
Artificial Intelligence: the science of programming intelligent machines with many algorithms so that they are able to do things that people would usually do – driving a car, or reading an MRI scan.
which spawned…
Machine Learning: the part of artificial intelligence that’s all about moving from programming machines, to training machines to perform tasks.
and then…
Deep Learning: A subset of machine learning, made up of algorithms that allow software to train itself to perform tasks such as image recognition or understanding human language.
and most recently…
Neural Networks: an artificial intelligence system that mimics the way the human brain works – they cluster and classify data. Neural network is a metaphor for the structure of the machine learning algorithm with the nodes and links looking a lot like a simple diagram of the brain.
many of which are developed by coders who’ve taken…
Massive Online Open Courses (MOOC): an online learning course, offering the opportunity to pick up new skills – many of which are related to computing and artificial intelligence.
and collaborate on…
GitHub: one of the code sharing and publishing services used by developers working on software for artificial intelligence, where coders around the world collaborate on projects.
where you might find code for…
Fundamental Platforms: a toolkit for building intelligent applications; some offering pre-built algorithms. Word is to a word doc, as a fundamental platform is to artificial intelligence software.
which may well be written in…
Python: a general purpose programming language used by lots of artificial intelligence developers; the use of which is a great indicator of how many developers are out there and what they are doing.
and require a supportive…
Operating Environment: the context for artificial intelligence in terms of rules, restrictions, trust and opinion that make technologies harder or easier to adopt.
Over 12 months, we measured 54 countries across seven key indicators: talent; infrastructure; operating environment; research; development; government strategy; and commercial ventures. Each indicator was weighted for importance after consultation with experts across the field.
The AI Index: Key Findings
The US is the undisputed leader in AI development, the Index shows. The western superpower scored almost twice as highly as second-placed China, thanks to the quality of its research, talent and private funding. America was ahead on the majority of key metrics – and by a significant margin. However, on current growth experts predict China will overtake the US in just five to 10 years.
China is the fastest growing AI country, our Index finds, overtaking the UK on metrics ranging from code contributions to research papers in the past two years. Last year, 85 per cent of all facial recognition patents were filed in China, as the communist country tightened its grip on the controversial technology. Beijing has already been condemned for using facial recognition to track and profile ethnic Muslims in its western region.
Britain is in third place thanks to a vibrant AI talent pool and an excellent academic reputation. This country has spawned hugely successful AI companies such as DeepMind, a startup founded in 2010 which was bought by Google four years later for $500 million. Britain has been held back, however, by one of the slowest patent application process in any of the 51 countries. Other countries are snapping at its heels.
To view an interactive version of this table in a new window (to see country scores) click on the image above
Despite playing a starring role in the space race and the nuclear arms race, Russia is a small player in the AI revolution, our data suggests. The country only comes 30th out of 54 nations, pushed down by its failure to attract top talent, and by a lack of research. Anxious to catch up, President Vladimir Putin announced last year a new centre for artificial intelligence hosted at the Moscow Institute for Physics and Technologies.
Smaller countries – such as Israel, Ireland, New Zealand and Finland – have developed vibrant AI economies thanks to flexible visa requirements and positive government intervention. Israel’s Mobileye Vision Technology, which provides technology for autonomous vehicles, was purchased in 2017 by Intel for $15.3 billion.
More than $35 billion has been publicly earmarked by governments to spend on AI development over the next decade, with $22 billion promised by China alone. Many more billions may have been allocated secretly through defence departments which are not made public.
Countries are using AI in very different ways. Russia and Israel are among the countries focusing AI development on military applications. Japan, by contrast, is predominantly using the technology to cope with its ageing population.
Neuralink: The War Against Humanity Goes Mainstream
Multiple nations have expanded their AI capabilities as ministers realise that attracting top AI talent and research is dependent on government-led investment.
This month, the government of Jair Bolsonaro in Brazil announced the creation of eight new AI labs, with one working in direct partnership with the Brazilian army. “Since we came to the government, this has been among the priority plans to improve the country’s capacity for AI,” the country’s science minister said.
Nigeria is pushing out AI initiatives too, announcing a new agency for Robotics and Artificial Intelligence, while Slovenia have announced an International AI Research Centre in partnership with Unesco.
Last month, Hungary’s Minister for Innovation and Technology announced the establishment of the Centre of Excellence in Artificial Intelligence.
The Seven Pillars
We measured the 54 countries against these key indicators.
Research
In 2010, US authors in top-rated AI journals outnumbered Chinese counterparts by two to one. That ratio has now reversed. Last year, 1,073 AI experts based at Chinese universities were credited in AI journals such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers’s Transactions on Neural Networks, compared to 492 US authors. Australia and Israel also do well on this metric.
When experts are ranked according to their ‘H-index’ – a metric of productivity and the citation impact of the publications of a scientist or scholar – Americans occupy 626 of the 1,000 top spots, including all of the top ten spots at the time of our analysis. New Zealand, Saudi Arabia and Finland’s AI academics are also highly ranked.
Talent
AI-related activity on online coding platforms has skyrocketed globally over the last decade. Code related to AI on GitHub is now being edited 50 times more frequently than five years ago, with developers from China and India claiming a bigger share each year.
But the picture changes radically when adjusting for population. Small nations like Singapore, Israel and Estonia are revealed to be coding powerhouses when examining on a per capita basis, whether it be downloads of Python, one of the biggest languages for data science, or R, a widely used statistical software package.
Citizens of developing countries in particular are seeking AI education elsewhere: from MOOCs, ‘massive open online courses’. The top visitors to sites like Coursera and edX, which offer a wealth of data and AI-related lessons remotely, are from India, Turkey and Brazil, according to our analysis of web traffic via Alexa Rank.
Commercial Ventures
The US is king of the commercial AI world: a key determinant of AI capability over all. US AI firms have raised $65 billion since 2000 but almost a quarter of that funding – $15 billion – came last year. Our commercial data comes from Crunchbase, a platform for finding business information, so these figures are biased towards Western companies, however.
In 2010, AI companies generated $676 million in funding rounds with investors. Last year, the figure was $26 billion.
Development
Last year, seven out of every 10 AI patents were filed in China, compared to just one in two in 2015. Patent applications are going up around the world, with 18 times more AI patents now filed globally each year compared to a decade ago.
Patent offices are also getting faster at approving AI patents. In 2015 AI-related patents granted had been waiting for approval on average for 800 days. For those granted in 2018, the wait dropped to 300 days.
Collaboration between AI experts in China and the US is at an all time high, both in terms of patents and jointly-written journal pieces. China’s tech giants, Alibaba, Baidu, Tencent and Huawei, are increasingly working with US academics. Some 6,595 patents filed by China’s tech giants have had at least one American inventor.
Infrastructure
Over half of the world’s 500 fastest supercomputers reside in either China, Japan, South Korea, Singapore, Taiwan and Hong Kong.
East Asian and Pacific countries also have an average download speeds of 33 mbps, including the two highest fliers in our index: Taiwan with 85 mbps and Singapore 71 mbps. While North American and European countries are not far behind in terms of download speed, countries in Latin America, the Middle East and Sub-Saharan Africa are all constrained by speeds of as low as 5.86 mbps.
As tech giants from Amazon to Alibaba offer more capabilities from the cloud, domestic computing power is becoming less relevant, however, especially to the world’s smaller AI nations.
Operating Environment
Canada has one of the fastest visa processing times in the Index: just two weeks and the offer of a right to bring dependents. This policy has enabled the North American nation has become a destination for mobile AI professionals. By contrast, a data scientist hoping to work abroad in the Index’s two worst performers – Egypt and Pakistan – faces a wait of six months for a visa and has no right to bring family.
China overwhelmingly leads on public confidence in AI, with 70 per cent of respondents to a 2018 IPSOS survey saying they trust the technology. This contrasts with the situation in the West, where only 23 per cent of UK citizens and 25 per cent of Americans trust AI. China correspondingly has higher adoption rates for AI, although trust in AI seems to have less of a correlative effect on how well a country develops the technology in the first place.
Government Strategy
China has earmarked over one and a half times more public money for AI than every other country in the world combined. However, countries’ public commitments are spread over different horizons, and China’s is the longest. In its national AI strategy published in 2017, Beijing sets aside $22.4 billion of funding over the next 13 years. The US, in contrast, earmarked $2 billion over 5 years; the same as Russia and slightly more than the UK. In India, only $421 million has been set aside. Much AI research will go into sensitive defence projects which will not publicly be disclosed.
“We are facing a widespread deployment of artificial intelligence in business and government,” Prince Zeid Ra’ad Al Hussein, former UN human rights chief, told us.
“It’s important that we make this transition in a democratic, transparent and fair way. That’s what makes information underpinning the Global AI Index so vital – it gives us a basis for comparison, and highlights the areas where this is really working, and where more can be done.”
In India, thousands of citizens have enrolled in AI-based MOOCs – or “massive open online courses” – signalling a democratisation of education around computing.
In terms of talent, India comes third overall. But the country ranks only 13th on investment and on other factors such as infrastructure, operating environment and research, it lies in the bottom half.
Choices made by national governments around AI policy will shape societies for years to come, experts predict. The global AI arms race is just heating up.
Island Gun Laws: The History Of Gun Control And Crime In Australia, New Zealand, And The UK
January 14 2020 | From: Ammo / Various
Politics nowadays are dominated by what gets attention, because what gets attention spreads the fastest and furthest.
This is the dark side of social media and 24/7 news, and one event in particular in the firearms world is ground zero for this phenomenon – mass shootings.
In the wake of a mass shooting, politicians who already dislike law-abiding people owning guns use the tragedy to push for additional gun laws, irrespective of the existing laws already broken.
This is done when emotions are at their highest (and thus rational thinking at its lowest), usually under the auspices of enacting gun laws like those in the U.K. and Australia. President Obama's former Chief of Staff Rahm Emanuel said it best:
"You never want a serious crisis to go to waste. And what I mean by that is an opportunity to do things you think you could not do before."
Careful analysis of these countries’ gun control experiments actually depicts a more nuanced picture of gun policy and crime.
In fact, there is reason to believe that gun control may have actually not had much of an impact on crime in either country – but this sort of critical thinking takes concerted effort, and who has time for such things when politics today are less about sound, long-term policy and more about sensationalizing another's tragedy to advance your agenda?
Below is a guide to help American gun rights activists understand the history of gun registration and gun control efforts in the U.K. and Australia, the two countries which anti-gun politicians often cite as muses for their proposed laws.
On April 28, 1996, Australia experienced a national tragedy. A deranged murderer, Martin Bryant, went on a rampage and killed 35 people in cold blood. In response to this atrocity, known as the Port Arthur massacre, the Australian government undertook a heavy-handed gun control campaign.
This included a mandatory buyback program where Australian citizens had to turn over 650,000 “assault weapons” to the government. This program was followed up by a subsequent buyback program in 2003.
At the center of Australia’s gun control policy following the Port Arthur massacre was the National Firearms Agreement of 1996. Although international media outlets portray the 1996 NFA as a ban, it was actually a draconian form of gun control that still allowed for gun ownership, albeit to a very limited degree.
The only real bans that took place were ones targeting so-called “assault weapons” – long-guns such as rifles and shotguns. Handguns were still accessible to the public, but were subject to stiff restrictions.
Events That Led to Gun Laws in Great Britain
Britain’s first gun control package passed in the modern era was the Firearms Act of 1920. Fearing a growing wave of unrest in the aftermath of World War I, British politicians passed this gun control law despite scant evidence showing that crime was on the rise during that time period.
The Firearms Act of 1920 was only the beginning – as the 20th century was a time of progressive government growth in all facets of life, and the U.K. was no exception.
After the enactment of the Firearms Act of 1920, the British government passed gradually stricter laws in 1937, 1968, and 1988. Despite having comprehensive gun control at the national level, the homicide rate in Great Britain slowly grew from the 1950s into early 2005.
When it came to mass shootings, British gun control efforts proved futile. Shooting rampages in Hungerford, England and Dunblane, Scotland received international attention, which put the island nation at a major public policy crossroads. Like its Australian counterpart, the United Kingdom opted for stiffer gun control.
After the Hungerford massacre, the government responded with the passage of the Firearms Act of 1988, a new gun control measure that placed draconian restrictions on rifles and shotguns.
Arguably the most popular example of foreign gun control, advocates of tougher gun laws routinely cite Australia and its 1996 NFA law as an example of gun control causing crime to fall. Although Australia is a nation characterized by a low degree of crime, there’s more to Australia’s low crime rates than gun control.
Homicide rates have been declining across Western Europe, Canada, and the U.S. since the 1990s. Australia was not exempt from this trend, and in fact, Australia’s falling crime was essentially the norm for industrialized countries in the West.
Homicides were already a rare occurrence before the passage of the 1996 NFA. In sum, we can barely learn anything meaningful from slight changes in Australian homicide rates around this time.
"There is now general agreement, at least for developed English-speaking countries and western Europe, that homicide patterns have moved in parallel since the 1950s.
The precise timing of the declines has varied, but the common pattern is apparent. Homicide rates increased substantially from various dates in the 1960s, peaked in the early 1990s or slightly later, and have since fallen substantially.”
This same trend of declining violence was on display in the United States. American homicide rates reached a 51-year low in 2014. During this time period, there wasn’t a gun control measure as comprehensive as Australia’s NFA in America that we can point to in explaining this decline.
In fact, American gun ownership per capita increased by 56 percent from 1993 to 2013. This was accompanied by a gun violence decrease of 49 percent. Correlation is not causation, but this goes to show the explanations behind crime rates are complex and are not necessarily about passing a so-called gun control “fix.”
The Effects of Gun Control in Australia
According to gun researcher John Lott, homicide rates in Australia have been on a downtrend since 1969. During this timeframe, the only time homicide rates increased was from 1998 to 1999, not long after the NFA was passed.
However, Ryan McMaken argues that Australian crime data is very spotty. He contends that the data is not very reliable because crime was such a non-issue that the government did not prioritize recording it. McMaken provides further context:
"Australia is a small country, with only a few more million people than Florida, spread out over an entire continent. In the relatively high homicide days of the early 1990s, Australia's homicides totaled around 300.
This means in a bad crime year, in which homicides increase by only 20 or 30 victims, it could swing overall rates noticeably.”
All in all, what we can gather is that Australia had low crime rates well before the passage of the 1996 NFA. However, this is one part of the story.
Australia’s gun buyback program from 1996 to 1997 was able to reduce the supply of firearms from 3.2 million 2.2 million, but the declines in homicide or suicide rates were not as high as many gun control advocates expected.
Interestingly enough, Australia’s gun buyback did not even stifle civilian gun ownership. In 2010, private gun ownership was back to 1996 levels.
Plus, data from 1997 to the present day show that gun ownership in Australia has actually grown three times faster than the population. The total number of firearms in circulation went from 2.5 million to 5.8 million.
Gun control advocates maintain that the more guns present, the more likely crime rates will skyrocket. Crime rates were already low before gun control came into being and continued to fall even after gun control was implemented.
Moreover, Australia still experienced an increase in the amount of guns in the country despite the gun control laws in effect.
Indeed, it’s hard to place what factors exactly contributed to Australia’s decreasing homicide rates. It’s simplistic to believe that gun control is the missing x-factor in lowering crime.
Additionally, the Australian experience shows that Australia’s decision to not completely ban gun ownership has given some law-abiding gun owners a little bit of flexibility in acquiring firearms.
The Australian gun control case actually looks quite bleak when compared to the U.S.’s higher degree of gun rights over the past few decades. From 1995 to 2006 – a time when firearm ownership was reduced – Australia witnessed a significant increase in rapes and sexual assaults.
New Document shows the role of Police in Christchurch Attacks
In 400 Years of Gun Control, author Howard Nemerov specifically pointed to numbers indicating a 21.4 percent increase in rape and sexual assault rates during this period.
On the other hand, America saw increased gun ownership during this time, so it’s no surprise they fared better when it came to sexual assaults, which fell by 16.8 percent.
Gun ownership tends to benefit the most vulnerable in society, like women and the elderly, who are often overpowered in violent assaults by criminals who rely on brute strength. With guns entering the equation, the playing field is ultimately leveled. All in all, gun control down under is not what it seems.
The Effects of Gun Control in the U.K.
Like Australia, low homicide rates have been generally the norm in recent British history. At the beginning of the 20th century, England and Wales were already some of the safest countries in the world based on global and historical standards.
At first glance, the gun control measures appeared to coincide with decreases in Britain’s homicide rates, which started taking place after 2002.
However, there is reason to believe that there were other factors contributing to Britain’s falling crime rates during that period. John Lott argues that increased policing in the U.K. is a more plausible explanation for this drop around the early 2000s.
Although Lott recognizes that the police play a crucial role in fighting crime, his research over the years has led him to the conclusion that the police can’t always be at crime scenes to save lives.
They usually end up at the crime scene after the fact, thus demonstrating the need for other security options at our disposal. An increased law enforcement presence eventually hits a point of diminishing returns as witnessed in the U.K. during the mid-2000s.
Despite a substantial increase in the police force, the murder rate was still above the pre-handgun ban rate. Gun control advocates remain steadfast in their belief that gun control was solely responsible for the fall in murders after 2002.
Even if we concede ground on this point, we also have to ask why gun control was not at fault for the repeated increases in murder rates from the 1960s until the 1990s – a time when homicide gradually increased despite new gun control legislation being passed throughout those decades.
We must also keep in mind that statistical figures in the U.K. should be viewed with a certain degree of skepticism given the differences in the way crimes are accounted for.
Starting in 1967, homicide figures in England and Wales exclude cases that don’t result in convictions. Put simply, when no arrest for a homicide is made, which in turn results in no conviction for the murderer, the murder is not accounted for in statistical figures.
The U.S. has a different approach to recording homicide statistics – including cases that did not result in murder convictions. For example, deaths caused by defensive gun use as well as unsolved cases would be classified as homicides in the U.S.
This makes crime rate comparisons between countries like the U.S. and the U.K. rather tricky. When adding gun control laws and their effects on crime rates into these comparisons, the picture becomes murkier.
Confounding variables abound which can lead to flawed interpretations of these events. Recent data show that the U.K.’s gun control experiments are actually causing more harm than good.
Like its Australian counterpart, which also implemented draconian gun control in the 1990s, negative criminal trends have started to surface since new gun control laws were enacted.
Sexual assaults have seen an alarming rise from 1995 to 2006, specifically increasing by 76.5 percent according to Howard Nemerov’s book 400 Years of Gun Control. All the gun control in the world has not been able to save the U.K. from steadily increasing rates of violent crime.
One particular interesting detail about crime under the country’s gun control regime is that criminals have now changed the tools they use to carry out their dirty deeds. Specifically, British criminals are using knives to commit crimes.
The Guardian reported on the recent knife crime wave sweeping across the U.K.:
"Police recorded 39,598 offences involving a knife or sharp instrument in the year to December 2017, a 22% increase compared with the previous year (32,468), and the highest number registered since comparable records started in 2010. Gun crime rose to 6,604 offences.”
The London Metropolitan Police reports that teenagers commit 49 percent of knife crime. On top of that, three quarters of stabbings were committed by minorities. Breitbart also gave a lurid depiction of London’s ongoing knife rampage:
"London specifically experienced record high knife crime, increasing by 15 percent to a total of 14,987 blade offences – representing 38 percent of all knife crimes across England and Wales and averaging 41 knife crimes a day.”
With questionable immigration policies that prevent assimilation and an environment that does not protect law-abiding Britons’ right to self defense, the U.K. risks sliding into social chaos.
Sadly, British politicians still believe more government control is the answer to this problem. In the face of this stabbing epidemic, London Mayor Sadiq Khan has advocated for knife control.
One Member of Parliament Scott Mann has even floated the idea of embedding GPS trackers on all knives sold in London.
Instead of considering alternatives like tougher policing in crime-ridden neighborhoods or even arming their citizens, elected officials in London have created a de facto surveillance state.
A report from WorldAtlas uncovered that London is the most surveilled city in the world with an estimated 51,000 cameras used to snoop on London residents.
New Zealand: An Addendum
On March 15, 2019, New Zealand faced its own Port Arthur incident. A 28-year-old Australian citizen by the name of Brenton Tarrant opened fire on two mosques in Christchurch, leaving 50 people dead.
The shocking nature of this massacre had media talking heads around the world on edge for the next week
In an already polarized environment in western countries, where identity politics have strong pull, politicians were quick to make their pro-gun control stances heard.
There is no question this event was a horrific tragedy and the atrocious nature of the incident will forever rock New Zealand’s public conscious.
That being said, analyzing this incident and figuring out how to go from there requires level-headed thinking. Much to the dismay of pro-gun advocates who want to see their countries expand gun rights, emotion tends to reign supreme in all public policy discussions.
As with the Australian and British cases, we find that New Zealand has also witnessed the same declining crime rates trend the rest of the West has experienced in the past few decades. In 2014, New Zealand’s homicide rate stood at 0.9 per 100,000 people. Particularly curious, New Zealand hit a 40-year low in its murder rates in 2017 – with only 35 people being killed in the country. Murders peaked in the 1980s, with 1986 being the year with the highest total of murders, standing at 79.
It should be noted that New Zealand does feature pretty strict gun control. Gunpolicy.org notes that in New Zealand, “the right to private gun ownership is not guaranteed by law,” which is a stark contrast from the U.S. – which nominally recognizes it as a right.
Prospective gun owners in New Zealand must have a license before buying a gun. Then, they must go through a universal background check of sorts that “considers criminal, mental health, medical, addiction and domestic violence records.”
Following the Mosque shootings, Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern immediately called for bans on semi-automatic weapons and “military-style” variants.
She got her wish a few days after the shooting, with a new ban on “assault weapons.” Despite the New Zealand government’s push for gun owners to turn in their firearms in the wake of the mass shooting, a paltry number of firearms have been turned in so far.
Like Australia, we cannot assume with certainty that gun control has been the primary driver of New Zealand’s already low crime rates. The effects of New Zealand’s new gun control laws will be an interesting case study nonetheless.
But with the American counterexample showing how crime rates can still decrease, even with certain jurisdictions liberalizing gun laws, we must call into question the conventional wisdom that gun control is the alpha and the omega of decreasing crime rates.
When push comes to shove, the New Zealand government’s newest gun control package may turn out to be a dud that only satisfied the political class’s “do something.”
Follow the Red, White, and Blue
The British government will eventually have to admit that there’s only so much it can do to fight crime. Instead, the U.K. and Australia, for that matter, should follow in the footsteps of America and expand gun rights. The gun rights victories that have occurred since the 1980s have served America well.
Research from the Pew Center in 2015, showed that the murder rate in America fell by one half – 7 per 100,000 in 1993 to 3.4 per 100,000 in 2014. In the same period, the total number of gun deaths (numbers that include accidental deaths and suicides) dropped by almost one-third, plummeting from 15.2 to 10.6 per 100.
Additionally, the number of privately owned guns and people carrying concealed has grown year by year.
Over the past three decades, gun laws have witnessed unprecedented levels of relaxation at the state level. From reforms such as licensed concealed carry to permitless Constitutional Carry, law-abiding gun owners in certain states have more firearms freedoms than in previous decades.
These numbers at least demonstrate that looser gun laws don’t lead to chaotic episodes of violence. Crime rates don’t suddenly explode when people are allowed to freely own and carry firearms.
The Australian and British cases, on the other hand, show a more mixed picture of countries that were already safe before passing gun control due to political outrage.
The effects of these laws are still being discerned, however, it can be argued that they have had little effect on impacting crime. In the British case, law-abiding citizens may want to have expanded gun rights due to the country’s increasingly unstable migrant crisis and the police’s inability to stop crime.
All in all, a truly free society is one that respects an individual’s right to self defense. No matter the intentions, governments have no authority to infringe upon this sacred right.
Google's Ad Network Monopoly 
Gmail, as every email you write is permanently stored. It becomes part of your profile and is used to build digital models of you, which allows them to make predictions about your line of thinking and every want and desire. 
Facial recognition will soon be everywhere. Are we prepared?
Identify and deal with your emotions: Whenever you have an argument with someone else, things can get heated. If someone involved is emotionally worked up, deal with that problem first. Take time apart to vent, blow off steam on your own, then return to the problem. In a work environment, this may just mean complaining to a friend before you email your boss back. In a romantic relationship, remind your partner that you care about them before criticizing. 
The Sun | Plasma Climate Forcing
1791: Edward Jenner vaccinates his 18 month old son with swine-pox and eight years later in 1798 with cow-pox. His son will die of TB at the age of 21, and Jenner thereafter chooses not to vaccinate his second son. (Yes, he became a “refuser” of sorts, at least where his own family’s health was concerned!)
The US is the undisputed leader in AI development, the Index shows. The western superpower scored almost twice as highly as second-placed China, thanks to the quality of its research, talent and private funding. America was ahead on the majority of key metrics – and by a significant margin. However, on current growth experts predict China will overtake the US in just five to 10 years.
CURRENT AFFAIRS
Aiming for Great and Best for Te Pūtea Matua
Cot Deaths Linked To Vaccinations + Harvard Medical School Doctor: Vaccine Science Is Not Settled
The Facts: 
Cancer 
Related: 
We need to understand that there’s no person out there who will complete us.
The Great Awakening:
